Home

Mobotix MxControlCenter software

1. Grid Windows s small 160x120 PDA 1 large 640x480 VGA h huge 1280x960 MEGA Double Width Size Size Pixel Format du double tiny 160x60 ds double small 320x120 Double PDA dm double medium 640x240 Double CIF dl double large 1280x480 Double VGA dh double huge 2560x960 Double MEGA The double width grid elements du ds dm d1 dh are ideal for the Panorama display mode of Hemispheric cameras since they also have an aspect ratio of 8 3 However double width grid elements are not suitable for layouts in the format of 16 9 Because of the aspect ratio of 8 3 the image height gets adjusted makes the image thus narrower and the areas on the left and right of the image are greyed out 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts Unlike grid layouts see Section 4 2 3 background layouts allow you to freely arrange i the video sources on top of a background image You also have the option of display ing individual MOBOTIX cameras as icons on top of the background image These icons display the viewing direction and lenses of the cameras as well as the camera s status Monitored Not monitored and Connection erron Double click the icon to display the live image of the camera in a separate window MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 17 3 96 An ideal background image of a building can often b
2. 2 3 1 System Requirements Depending on the intended use the system requires different hardware to properly run MxControlCenter ThinClient Minipc Mid RangePc High End PC MxCC surveillance MxCC surveillance Intended Use T ce system video wall system video wall main computer main computer Max Number of Displays per 1 1 2 4 Computer Max Display 1280x1024 1920x1200 2560x1600 2560x1600 Max Number of Concurrent Live Camera Streams per Computer Max Resolution QXGA QXGA per Camera 2048x1536 2048x1536 2048x1536 2048x1536 Frame Rate per 30 fos MEGA 30 fps MEGA 30 fos MEGA 30 fps MEGA Camera 20 tps QXGA 20 tps QXGA 20 tps QXGA 20 tps QXGA Intel Atom Intel Core i3 Intel Core i5 Intel Xeon Clock Rate 1 6 GHz 3 2 GHz 3 2 GHz Video card with Video card with Reduced if MxControlCenter computer runs additional tasks e g image correction display scal ing etc MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 54 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation Thin Client Mini PC Mid Range PC High End PC Display Ports 1x VGA DVI 1x DVI 2 x DVI 4 x DVI Ethernet Interface 100 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps 1000 Mbps Windows XP SP3 Windows 7 64 Bit Windows 7 64 Bit Windows 7 64 Bit Reduced if MxControlCenter computer runs additional tasks e g image correction display scal ing etc MxControlC
3. Password Set a password for accessing this shared folder Activate the Show checkbox to see the password User ID When using NFS storage devices enter the user ID Group ID When using NFS storage devices enter the group ID MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 2 4 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference Quota The maximum size of the storage can be limited according to the criteria listed in the following As soon as one of the criteria has been reached the cameras delete old video sequences to make sure that there is enough storage capacity for new recordings e Max storage size Sets the maximum size of the storage space maximum number is device dependent e Reserve Assigns a reserve for burst mode If the camera cannot delete old recordings from the file server before writing new files the reserve storage space is used for writ ing Deleting the old recordings is postponed until there is less load on the file server e Max age Sets the maximum number of days to retain video data max 10 000 days e Max sequences Sets the maximum number of events max 1 000 000 Details This text area indicates information e g error or success messages that is available from the camera For example if you have entered an incorrect password for a user name the camera shows a corresponding message in this area 6 3 5 The Audio Tab This t
4. 08 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter have been set up to start recording when they are detecting specific events such as video motion sensor events etc O HBIDBOld s OSHS o o am i ee T Property bar Owr Ondino Reload Now Astos entering he man gate Arro the past haur Ad persona ervtering the ont door thet mong Predefined event searches Selected video double click to open event in Player window Search results Player window Player controls The MxControlCenter s Event Search feature provides the proper mechanisms for this job Using three stored searches the operators can easily check for events that had been recorded during the period of time in question The Last Night search could be defined as follows for example e Includes all relevant cameras for the search e Searches from yesterday 18 00 6 pm until 07 00 7 am today The second and third searches are duplicates of the Last Night search but cover different periods of time e Last Week searches from 07 00 7 am seven days ago until now e Last Month searches from 07 00 7 am 30 days ago until now Since the operators can easily adjust the times after running a search they can modify the settings of a search and run it again if they need to examine different times Likewise they can select other cameras or search all cameras should the need arise Once the events have been found the operators can double clic
5. Configure the MxControlCenter user interface to show only the required elements see Section 4 4 Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface Copy the MxControlCenter configuration and program files to the workstations see Section 4 9 Working with MxControlCenter Configurations Login as user and test the configuration on the MxControlCenter workstation e Make sure that you have administration privileges on the MxControlCenter e Make sure that you document the following items workstation Which layouts are to be used for which situation How can the operators switch layouts 4 4 4 Configuring Functions for a Minimized or Hidden MxControlCenter If the MxControlCenter computer is also used for other tasks and it is not necessary that the application is visible in the foreground at all times you can minimize MxControlCenter to the taskbar or hide it behind other windows Bringing MxControlCenter Back to the Top The following methods will bring the application back to the foreground of the desktop Counting seconds Enter the number of seconds to wait until MxControlCenter brings itself back to the foreground of your desktop in the On top after field on the Tools gt Options gt View tab When receiving alarm messages Restores a minimized MxControlCenter if a camera sends an alarm message via the network Select Tools gt Options from the menu Click on the Alarm Handling
6. MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 133 396 You can also manually download the cert pem file from any camera and store the file at the root of the recording folder provided you have the proper rights Please proceed as outlined in Section 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data or ask your system administrator for assistance Prerequisites for Running the Data Integrity Check In order to check the data integrity of recordings the following prerequisites need to be fulfilled e The recording camera needs a certificate either self signed or issued by a certifica tion authority e The recording camera needs to sign the recordings Section 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data Running the Data Integrity Check The data integrity check can be executed for the entire recordings of a camera or only the video sequences that have been collected for exporting e Open the Check Data Integrity dialog using one of the following methods Right click on a MOBOTIX camera in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator panel and select Check Data Integrity this will search the entire video storage of that camera Depending on the size of the storage checking the integrity of the entire recordings of a camera can take quite a long time It is therefore recom mended to use this feature only if you
7. e Camera reference image with heat map This area displays the heat map for the period of time of the selected profile You can show and hide the display of the heat map and the legend for the heat map in the camera s reference image The counting line and heat map evaluations can be called up in the event search or gener ated regularly and automatically sent via e mail This way you have the reports regularly at the desired time intervals without another thought See Section 4 6 4 Generating Reports and Sending Automatically Via E Mail for additional information on generating and sending report profiles Furthermore the counting line reports and heat maps can be directly exported from the event search as HTML and CSV files or as a JPEG file and stored locally or to a storage device Click on Export on the corresponding counting line or heat map profiles MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Additional User Functions 149 396 3 8 Additional User Functions 3 8 1 Working with the Dead Man s Switch The dead man s switch is an operating mode of MxControlCenter that has been added for security applications This feature is used to make sure that the following require ments are met e The personal safety of the operators is monitored e The video surveillance staff are fulfilling their monitoring tasks as assigned In order to achieve this MxControlCenter can
8. e Click on the Print current image button MxControlCenter now shows the image s in the Print Preview dialog This dialog provides mech memes Se anisms for changing the m AA wow n tastes wre Gimme Layout the Page Setup ress Gin i rms ama etc Click on the Print button select a printer and click on Print again to send the file to the printer The Print to PDF button is a useful tool when it comes to NeControlCenter e video Seorch ee pa etter sending the image via NCTE secant ee ea e mail Simply click on this button save the file on your desktop and attach it to an e mail for example e You can also use this feature on Live image windows e When printing post processed images Section 3 5 6 Post Processing of Recorded Images MxControlCenter will show two images in the preview the modified post processed image on top and the original image below MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Saving Printing and Exporting 137 396 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage Saving or printing single images is a good idea when you are trying to identify persons for example see Section 3 6 1 Saving Single Images and Section 3 6 2 Printing Single Images A video on the other hand may give more clues on how a specific situation evolved The recommended procedure to create a video is to compile the
9. Activate alarm sounds in Tools gt Options on Alarm Handling tab MxCC responds slowly Computer performance insuf ficient for number of cameras in layout Use more powerful computer reduce number of cameras in layout Free scaling of many cameras uses too much performance Deactivate free scaling in MxCC MxCC does not show camera in focus window of background layout any more Layout Manager active Deactivate Layout Manager PTZ features do not work Layout Manager active Wrong or no user password set in MxCC for this camera Deactivate Layout Manager Set proper user password in MxCC for this camera When activating Player mode for a display window camera shows No frame available message After replacing camera MxCC does not show any new record ings Wrong storage target set in MxCC Storage target in MxCC still set to path of replaced camera Set correct storage target in MxCC Set storage target to path of new camera MxCC does not allow starting a second program instance Link to start MxCC does not contain MxMultiinstances command line argument Edit link and add MxMultiinstances argument ey ie end of the Target text ield MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using the MxControlCenter Error Log Issue After restarting MxCC uses old progra
10. If you want to change an existing Post VM search simply click on the search in the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel You can now edit the window as outlined in Creating a Post Video Motion Search above or create new windows move and delete them etc Once you are done click on the Search button to restart the search MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 129 396 3 5 10 Using the Video Search If you have defined an external recording target file server for the relevant video source or the MOBOTIX camera has an SD CF card for internal storage the camera can store large amounts of data Searching all of this data may prove to be challenging especially when dealing with several cameras at once This is where the Video Search dialog provides extensive search features To open the dialog click on the Open Event Search button in the MxControlCenter toolbar Video Search t J Camera D MxControiCenter Mx_ES Gateway Cameras Events ss Time amp Date Sequence 14 25 00 Thu 16 11 2006 27 14 26 00 Thu 16 11 2006 28 14 26 29 Thu 16 11 2006 28 14 26 45 Thu 16 11 2006 28 14 27 00 Thu 16 11 2006 29 30 30 31 31 32 14 28 00 Thu 16 11 2006 14 28 57 Thu 16 11 2006 14 23 00 Thu 16 11 2006 14 29 26 Thu 16 11 2006 14 30 00 Thu 16 11 2006 ELEL2 VM ELE Stat 1259 40 Th
11. MOBOTIX MxControlCenter automatically finds all Snap Servers in a Physical Network Snapshot Photograph of a situation created spontaneously and directly with a mouse click or other such event directed by the user Softphone Computer application that simulates an P Phone Subnet Synonym for Logical Network Switch Hardware used to connect multiple network devices computers cameras printers etc within a network As opposed to a Hub a switch does not split the bandwidth among the con nected devices A PoE switch can also supply the cameras with power over an Ethernet cable UMTS 3G Abbreviation of Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Third generation of wireless telephone technology UPS Abbbreviation of Uninterruptible Power Supply Refers to devices that continue to supply power in the event of a sudden power failure These devices usually operate using a battery UPS units are commonly installed on the power lines of devices and systems in order to protect them in the event of a power failure Video Motion Detection Ability to find movements in a video stream MOBOTIX cameras use windows Video Motion Window to determine if there are movements in a video stream Video Motion Window Area in the live or recorded video stream in which MOBOTIX cameras can search for move ments see also Motion Detection Video SIP Similar to S P but with an additional video channel Video Source Any source o
12. Option 1 Create a Shared Folder on This Computer Use this option if you would like to setup Sensors a x Target Comput a share and a corresponding user for the camera Use a different server or storag C If this computer has two network IP Address 10 0 2 15 Shared Folder interface cards select an IP Address Shared folder data Enter a name for the Shared Folder cates Choose e g mxdata ee seer om a Set a Local path by selecting an exist mm om ing creating a new folder e g c IEE mxdata ee rasne Max sequences Select an existing User name and enter the corresponding Password or create a new user by clicking on Create Details MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Recording 208 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration e Click on Apply to create the user and the shared folder e Check the Details box if everything has been set up properly Option 2 Use a Different Server or Storage Medium Use this option if you want to use camera hardware built in or attached or a different file server i e not this computer e Set the type of Storage make sure that you have the correct access infor E Eternal Recording Target Computer rs bared toig on this comol Usea different server or storage media Storage SO Flash Card v Server Shared Folder Shared folder mati
13. Select the master camera and click on the Save Settings button Save the configuration file to a separate folder and name the file appropriately Disconnect the master camera from the network Connect and power up the other cameras Click on the Search Cameras button You should see the cameras you connected Select all connected cameras and click on the down arrow of the Upload Settings button MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration 3 5 3 96 8 Select the file you stored in Step 3 The Upload Camera Settings dialog opens Upload Camera Settings C2 E Upload configuration file mx10 8 85 61 2011 09 01_MASTER cfg Please select the sections of the configuration that should be updated Make sure that you are not overwriting important settings like network addresses Read the warnings at the bottom of the screen Sections for Updating J Security v Network H TranserProties vJ Time Tasks File Server V Time Tables Logos J Audio vV Page language softbuttons Event Control Camera time server LEDs Video Motion windows Select all Warning Caution you are updating the network settings for other cameras The configuration file is not intended for this camera Take care not to override important settings J Back up Configuration Files Before uploading store configurati
14. e Select the MxServer channel in the Add Video Sources list and add it to the system as described in Section 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter Step 4 Set the Storage Location of the Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter Since this step works exactly as for setting the storage location of an IP PTZ dome please proceed as described in Sfep 3 Set the Storage Location of the IP PTZ Dome in MxControlCenter of Section 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras Scenario B Integrating Analog PTZ Cameras Using a Third Party Video Server In this scenario a third party video server handles the digitizing of the video generated by an analog PTZ camera MxServer again handles the recording by continuously storing M JPEG images from the analog PTZ camera To connect an analog PTZ camera for live streaming and playback using a third party video server 1 Connect the analog PTZ camera to the third party video server 2 Setup recording of the analog PTZ camera to MxServer 3 Add the video server in MxControlCenter as a video server channel 4 Set the storage location of the analog PTZ camera in MxControlCenter These steps are described in more detail in the following MxControlCenter currently supports the following third party video servers e Axis Video Server Step 1 Connect the Analog PTZ Camera to the Video Server Please read the video server s product manual on how to connect an analog
15. A 7 Finishing the Lab Configuration of the Cameras Configuring a Time Server Camera In case the cameras do not have an Internet connection or there is no internal time server you need to configure one or more cameras as time server for the other cameras Click on Admin Menu gt General Administration gt Time and Date in the time server camera s browser interface and activate the time server as outlined in the help A 8 Configuring MxControlCenter After having completed as much as possible of the lab configuration of the cameras you can now start to configure MxControlCenter on one workstation Later on this pre configured installation is applied to the remaining workstations of the VSS If you cannot access all cameras of the system in the lab e g because the system is too large you may have to postpone this step until you are on site and all compo nents of the system are running see Section A 10 Mounting and Initial Operation A 8 1 Configuring the Global Settings e Start MxControlCenter and click on Cancel to close the Add Video Sources dialog e Configure the connection defaults Tools gt Options gt Connection Defaults In the Connections to Cameras section enter the user name and password for accessing the cameras as defined in Creating the Users in Section A 5 3 Setting the Admin Menu Options mike in the example If a file server NAS system is used in this surveillance system en
16. E M12 fe a mes PC Server c Video grabber card WindowsXP MxPEG Server 4 m 2P 6 m22 TEA Analog Kamera Bosch TVI Lederer Bosch PAL NTSC RAW RGB MxControlCenter D12 PC Server WindowsXP MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 268 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Automatic search Insert manuall MPEG dip Recording path This task is performed by MOBOTIX MxServer a software component for Windows com puters that uses a special frame grabber card connected to the analog cameras and provides the digitized analog signals as an M JPEG data stream just like an IP camera in an IP network This means the analog camera is integrated in MxControlCenter via the IP address of MOBOTIX MxServer The cameras connected to the frame grabber card which accepts up to four cameras are normally accessed via port numbers 81 to 84 Analog cameras are integrated accordingly using the Add Camera dialog box Section 5 5 MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras and Section 5 5 3 Connecting an Analog PTZ Camera to MxServer To connect an analog PTZ camera for live streaming and playback using MxServer 1 Connect the analog PTZ camera to MxServer 2 Set up recording of the analog PTZ camera in MxServer 3 Add the analog PTZ camera in MxControlCenter as an MxServer channel 4 Set the storag
17. If this is the case you need to decide if you want to either displaythe live video stream in MxControlCenter or just record it using MxServer Devices with such a limitation should be replaced as soon as possible by MOBOTIX cameras since they can handle multiple video streams and store their recordings autonomously 5 5 5 Setting Up Recording in MxServer Setting up a storage path for both third party analog and IP cameras provides the mecha nism to store digital video data in a MOBOTIX file server structure MxControlCenter can then read that data from the storage location as a file server path When configuring either an analog or IP camera you can enter a storage location for that specific camera using either a mapped network drive or a UNC address Make sure that you have the following information before proceeding e Which folder on a network share computer name IP address and share name can use to store the video data e How much capacity is available on this share MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras 277 396 To configure the storage location Activate the ON option to record the selected channel Enter the storage location in the Recording root directory path as mapped network drive or UNC path M DATA mapped network drive MyFileServer DATA UNC path Set a recording disk quota and o
18. Recording Tab The Audio Tab The Events Tab The Network Messages Tab The Time Server Tab The MxAnalytics Tab MxControlCenter Start Parameters Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline Collecting Information About the System Lab Installation of Components Defining Hardware Groups A 2 2 Naming Labeling of All Components A 2 3 Connecting and Powering Up All Components A 2 4 Installing MxControlCenter on One Workstation MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 279 280 281 283 284 285 288 290 290 291 294 296 298 301 304 306 307 307 308 308 309 31 312 314 316 320 324 325 329 331 332 334 336 337 337 337 338 338 339 7 396 8 396 MxCC User Manual A 3 Configuring the Storage Systems A 3 1 Configuring the Server Settings of the Storage System A 3 2 Configuring the Network Settings of the Storage System A 3 3 Finishing the Configuration of the Storage System A 4 Configuring the Camera Network Settings A 5 Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration A 5 1 Overview A 5 2 Using the Quick Installation Wizard A 5 3 Setting the Admin Menu Options A 5 4 Additional Camera Settings A 5 5 Storing and Testing the Master Configuration A 5 6 Distributing the Master Configuration A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras A 7 Finishing the Lab Configuration of the Cameras A 8 Confi
19. Regular cameras lenses gt 32 mm Zoom or n n Full Image select Image Area Image Area e Full Image Delivers the full image as generated by the image sensor This is the default display mode e Image Area Once you start zooming in the camera shows the image area which is only a section of the full image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance Display Modes of Cameras with L22 Lens Cameras with L22 lens such as the Q22M M24M D24M and T24M basically offer the following display modes e Full Image Delivers the full image as generated by the image sensor This is the default display mode e Image Area Delivers a zoomed section of the full image i e anytime you zoom into the image e Area Corrected Delivers a section of the image where the slightly distorted lines have been corrected the same as for Hemispheric cameras see next section The Area Corrected display mode is only available if this lens has been explicitly selected in the camera s Admin Menu If you need this image mode please ask your system administrator for assistance Display Modes of Hemispheric Cameras with L11 Lens The area in which you can execute the virtual PTZ actions is rather limited for regular lenses i e lenses with focal lengths of 32 mm and higher Hemispheric cameras e g the Q22M with 180 lens an
20. Sending Reports via e mail 217 Sequencers Configuring 181 Using 77 Sequencers glossary 376 Settings Saving of cameras 247 Uploading of cameras 247 Setting up Storage 211 Sidebar Navigator 20 Player 20 PTZ Controls 20 Softbuttons 20 Sidebar panels Background Images Layout Manager mode 70 Grids Layout Manager mode 70 MxControlCenter 70 Navigator 70 Player 70 PTZ Controls 70 Softbuttons 70 Signal input glossary 377 Signal output glossary 377 Signing Recorded video data 228 Single images Printing 136 Saving 135 SIP glossary 376 Snap Server Configuring 254 Editing 254 Using NAS systems 253 Snap Server glossary 377 Snapshot glossary 377 Softbuttons 20 Sidebar panel 70 Softphone glossary 377 Software updates Update Assistant 238 Solutions to common issues 364 Start Layout MxControlCenter 75 Status Discovered video sources 58 Storage Activating 211 Setting up 211 Using Snap Server NAS systems 253 Storing Suitable evaluations 217 Subnet glossary 377 Switch glossary 377 Switching features of a camera 80 Switching layouts 75 Synchronized Playback of several cameras 114 Search of several cameras 114 Synchronized playback Example 115 System Backing up 250 Configuring 152 Installation and Initial Operation 50 System backup MxControlCenter installation 250 System Configuration 152 System requirements Computer 53 MxServer 272 Time synchroni
21. Simple navigation from overview plans unlimite to detail plans for branch operation Search filter functions Yes Rapid mee layouts e g locations by entering the search filter criteria in the text field Process navigation of the layouts Yes Display of the most recently used layouts as in browser forward and back buttons with selection lists Building plans Yes practically Symbol display with automatic alarm unlimited activation with live player alarm focus windows Grid layouts Yes practically Automatic predefined and individually unlimited configurable grids available Layout sequencer Yes Shows all layouts for the set duration in succession MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxControlCenter Functions Display Live image window Yes practically Scalable display of the live images of unlimited one camera Player window Yes practically For fast access to the recordings of one unlimited camera Alarm window Yes Automatic live display of the cameras reporting an alarm Sequencer window Yes No fixed camera assignment shows all cameras in the layout for the set duration in succession Focus window Yes No fixed camera assignment always shows the live stream of the camera most recently clicked Preview window Yes practically unlimited Displays the bandwidth optimized
22. To change the aspect ratio to 16 9 right cklick the desired layout in the Navigator panel and select 16 9 The change applies and is saved when closing the Layout Manager e To change the type or the video source of a display window right click on a window and select Edit e To remove the contents of a display window right click on a window select Empty and confirm the prompt The display window itself will remain in the layout and will not be deleted You can later assign a different video source to this display window This option is also useful if a display window is to remain in the layout even though the video source is temporarily unavailable e To delete a display window right click on a window select Delete and confirm the prompt The remaining display windows will move up by one position Configuring Display Windows in Grid Layouts You can configure a display window in the Edit Display Element dialog right click a display window and select Edit in the context menu Depending on the selected element type MxControlCenter shows different configuration options The maximum size of a display window is 2560x960 pixels see the Changing Existing or Creating New Grid Definitions section below Edit Display Element E Element ype Empty Video source Live Add Preview Video clip File server ead Live Alarm window Sequencer window MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www m
23. You can now use the playback buttons in the sidebar to examine the recorded video sequences Navigating the Recordings below An event sequence includes all images that have been recorded for one particular event alarm This normally includes the video and audio data recorded before the event the actual event image itself and the data recorded after the event Navigating the Recordings When the Player panel of the sidebar is active you can use its buttons to browse the recorded images This section shows how to use the individual buttons Buttons for Playing Back All Images The playback buttons within the red frame allow playing back all recorded images either one by one or consecutively Use these buttons to review the individual sequences more closely Using the Mouse Over Buttons In addition to the controls in the sidebar you can also use the buttons that appear when you move the mouse over the bottom edge of a Player window i e you can use them even if the Player sidebar is not visible Click once on the button to execute the corresponding function the button turns yellow Move the mouse again over the same position and click again on the but ton to stop the function The corresponding bright blue buttons have been added in the Player Window column of the table below PIR ili Aaa bade Name Explanation Fast Starts fast reverse playback of the recorded lt lt A K Backward images fro
24. You can use the preview video stream with a specific image sensor reduced frame rate and resolution in addition to and independent of a live regular video stream of the same camera Example You would also like to see images from your cameras at home in the office At home you can run MxControlCenter with a regular live window In the office you are using a preview window for the same camera since the upstream bandwidth of your home DSL connection is too low for a live video stream e Video clip This display window can be used to automatically show a previously recorded MxPEG video clip mxq file in continuous playback This element type can also be used for alarm list files In addition you can set the size of the display window This element is typically used to quickly see the video from a live recording or after exporting an MxPEG file for example Available video sources MxPEG mxg files When added to a layout using drag amp drop MxPEG files are automatically added as video clips e Player Select this display window to show video source s recordings You can play back the recordings of this element using the controls of the Player sidebar panel In addition you can set the size of the display window This element is typically used to define player layouts that are copies of layouts with live display windows Using such a layout allows you to quickly access the recordings of an entire set of camer
25. Z MxCC User Manual Jh A Security Vision Systems MOBOTIX Ultra fast Live Display 40 smooth video streams CIF MxControlCenter Professional Video Management Dual Screen Free camera definition on 2nd screen Approx 90 cameras Field Tested during World Cup at Kaiserslautern stadium Free Software Download www mobotix com Floor Plans Layout editor with indiv floor plans Alarm time or image Alarm Event list sorted by camera or by time Search Search possible even while recording Event Search Synchronized search on several cameras Image improvement Post Processing Zoom contrast distortion correction e Proven worldwide in the most demanding video applications A ae e Unlimited number of users and cameras no license fees bidirectional via IP e Individual user interface adaptable to each individual user analog and digia e Simplest installation and complete use on any standard PC AA e Convenient layout editor for integrating real building plans AEA e Integration of conventional network and analog cameras y with automatic switching of floor plans Exports recordings as AVI or Quicktime video with sound 60 172_EN_V2_04 2014 Third party Cameras Integration of analog amp digital PTZ domes Innovations Made in Germany Synchronized realtime viewing of The German company MOBOTIX AG is known as the leading pioneer in network camera technology and its se
26. e Test the user functions Are the joysticks working properly at the MxControlCenter workstation if installed Can you load all layouts in MxControlCenter without errors Are the alarm functions working properly if you trigger events e g by clicking on the UC Event softbutton in the Softbuttons sidebar panel of MxControlCenter e Test the system performance Are the system response times acceptable when viewing the live layouts e Test the storage targets Are the cameras recording on the storage targets click once on the Player but ton in one camera s browser interface then click on the Player button again Remove the network connection to storage targets Are the cameras sending warning e mails as configured Cut the power to network components Are the UPS working properly and are you getting warning e mails as configured Correct any errors you have found and repeat the corresponding tests A 9 2 Exporting and Distributing MxControlCenter Export the MxControlCenter configuration with all application and ancillary files to a net work share or other storage medium so you can later add the entire installation to the remaining MxControlCenter workstations see Section 4 9 2 Saving Program Settings and Exporting Installations This concludes the final lab test of all components and you are now ready to set up the actual VSS on site MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany
27. s DynDNS client The router uses port forwarding to provide access to the individual cameras e g mycam era dyndns org 8001 forthe first camera mycamera dyndns org 8002 forthe second etc the numbers following the colon are examples for the individual ports MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS 257 396 A port allows offering different services on one computer using the same IP address This way one computer can be used as web server port 80 and as e mail server port 25 for sending port 110 for receiving e mails at the same time for example The router can assign certain ports of its external interface to specific internal addresses this is called port forwarding For more information on ports please see the TCP port numbers topic on en wikipedia org The port forwarding itself is also configured on the router Ports of the router s external IP address 8001 and 8002 in the example are assigned to local private IP addresses of the cameras 192 168 178 201 and 192 168 178 202 In the example the two ports are assigned to the IP addresses of the following cameras e 8001 192 168 178 201 e 8002 192 168 178 202 Once this has been configured the router will forward a query from the Internetto port 8001 of its external IP address 213 63 87 154 to the local IP address 192 168 178 201 and thus to camera
28. section below for more information on the available options 6 Quit the Layout Manager see Deactivating the Layout Manager in Section 4 2 ass 7 7 ai Creating and Editing Layouts The layout will be saved automatically Additional Rules for Editing Background Layouts e Display elements already placed in the layout can be moved to a different position using drag amp drop e The size of the display elements is determined automatically taking into account the existing elements and the proximity of the element to the border MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 172 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration X e When moving a video source to a display window that is already used the two video sources swap positions as soon as you release the mouse button as indicated by the swap mouse cursor and the green frame of the target window e Dragging a video source from the Navigator sidebar panel to a display window that is already used replaces the original source with the dragged one e You can drag amp drop multiple video sources to any empty layout keep the CTRL or SHIFT key pressed and click with the mouse to select multiple video sources When you let go of the mouse MxControlCenter will ask you to select an element type e To change the type of an existing display element or to assign a different video source right click on an element sele
29. www mobotix com sales mobotix com 82 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter lt 0 aeua leen 3 2 9 Using the Virtual PTZ Functions on Live Images Current MOBOTIX camera models and software PTZ Controls z versions include enhanced virtual PTZ features Caner r Mote a eee ee vPTZ These features allow using a joystick or A the mouse to digitally zoom in on images fromthe Area Corrected gt selected video source and to virtually move the MxCC Display Mode lt O 2O enlarged image section within the entire image 7 sensor area Unchanged z 5 PTZ Views In Camera The image area available for these virtual PTZ ix zeon cnr MOH commands depends on the options available on Auto Move the camera model Cameras featuring lenses with Panteft PanRight 9 Jo E02 focal lengths gt 32 mm M12D D12D M24M etc 75s 145 Same NES ooog have an image area significantly smaller than in hemispheric cameras Additional camera views are provided for hemispheric cameras to quickly adjust the camera image to current conditions In hemispheric cameras this also includes the suitable mounting position setting Both of these functions image view and mounting position are set per image sensor in hemispheric S14D models PTZ com mands can also be executed per image sensor To do this select the desired image sensor in a displayed dual image using ALT click The symbol to open the OnScreen Control i
30. 10 11 02 TT 09 10 11 02 10 10 01 TT 10 10 02 10 09 01 TT 10 09 02 10 08 01 TT 10 08 02 Store To permanently use the current settings you need to store the complete configuration to flash memory A 12 Final Tests Repeat the tests you performed during the lab test in Section A 9 1 Testing and Correcting If you do not get the same results as in the lab test you need to check for errors and correct the corresponding settings The table in Section B Troubleshooting lists some typical errors in such a system and how to correct them MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Hand Off and User Training 3 61 3 9 6 A 13 Hand Off and User Training e Finalize the system documentation Compile the system documentation you received from the planner and in which you documented the camera names for example Create a list of all user names and passwords for the entire system Create alist of cameras and reference images using the Update Assistant activate View gt Preview Image then select File gt Print to PDF from the menu Document the status of the cameras that are using a file server NAS as storage target as follows In the browser click on the Player button on one camera per storage target click again on the Player button and store the entire HTML page with images or copy the HTML page to a text document MOBOTIX Q24 Cam1 B10 F2
31. Camera sonaloutous Amars vere Sequencer J Allow v Allow A Alarm handing J Allow V Allow x Lox cancel e Adjust the privileges for the groups as required red frame shows Owners group as an example MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 2 0 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration The Right to Control Group Rights The most powerful right on the Group Rights tab is the Access control right in the Access control section at the bottom of the dialog since it controls access to the Users amp Groups dialog itself Make sure that you grant this right to at least one group e g Admins in the example but not to any other groups who could change and thus damage the MxControlCenter configuration If you are setting up a professional video surveillance system you need to ensure that only very few people have the rights to change the configuration of the surveillance system Make sure that you restrict the following rights to e g an Admins group e Access control section Access control e Application section MxCC configuration Layout Manager if you want to prevent other users from changing layouts Using the Options of the Dropdowns The dropdowns on the Group Rights tab have two options besides A ways and Never that require some explanation e Reason Requires that the user of the system enters a reason that is
32. Connection Defaults you can use it here MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 211 396 Configuring MxAnalytics 4 6 Configuring MxAnalytics The following configuration steps are necessary to use MxAnalytics video motion analysis on a Q24M camera in MxControlCenter e Activate MxAnalytics and set the process parameters such as detection settings object display and defining detection areas and counting lines e Setup storage of MxAnalytics data for future evaluation e Adapt the camera s factory supplied report profiles for the evaluation where necessary e Create and store suitable evaluations in MxCC We recommend familiarizing yourself with the MxAnalytics product description and read the notes tips and tricks it includes for configuration in order to generate opti mal analysis results The description is provided on the MOBOTIX website at www mobotix com gt Products gt Hemispheric Q24 gt MxAnalytics 4 6 1 Activating Setting Process Parameters and Setting Up Storage You must activate MxAnalytics before video motion analysis can be used Go to the Camera Configuration dialog and open the MxAnalytics tab which is structured in the sub tabs Basic Configuration and Visual Configuration to activate video motion analysis Open the camera you would like to configure by right clicking either in a layout or in the VIDEO SOURCES section in the Navigator
33. File gt Export configuration Select this menu command to open the Export Configuration dialog This dialog provides more options for creating MxContro Center packages see The Export Configuration Dialog below To see which configuration file MxControlCenter is currently using select Tools gt Options from the menu and check the Configuration line at the bottom of the dialog The Export Configuration Dialog This dialog allows creating differ ent types of configuration copies by using one of the options below Export Configuration a Select Mode Configuration and resources instruction files dips images sounds Complete package configuration resources MxControlCenter program files Configuration and resources Use this option to save both the configura tion file Mxcc ini and all required resources back ground images instruction files audio files MxPEG clips etc to the target folder set in Select Destination Select Destination m C Users Gate Guards Export as ZIP package Complete package This option does the same as the Configuration and resources option above but also copies the MxControlCenter program files to the target folder You can thus use this option to create entire installations on shared server folders for example Export as ZIP package Creates a ZIP package of an entire MxControlCenter installa tion in the destination folder You can transfer
34. Options Dialog The Options dialog controls the basic settings of MxControlCenter Click on Tools gt Options in the menu to open this dialog Overview of the Options Dialog Tabs General This tab controls the application behavior when launching automatic logon and automatic bandwidth reduction as well as the custom folder for the local archive Connection Defaults This tab stores the default connection parameters for accessing cameras the settings for a default file server and for a MxRemotePreview server Note that you can override these settings for individual video sources later on View This tab controls all settings regarding the mouse the display of the layouts and the application window itself Alarm Handling This tab configures the application s behavior when receiving camera alarms via live images or in alarm messages TCP IP network messages Remote Control This tab allows setting up MxControlCenter to receive remote control commands via network messages from MOBOTIX cameras and other MxControlCenter computers or applications Monitoring This tab contains the settings to monitor cameras and to display camera failures and latency timeouts In addition this tab contains the parameters of the dead man s switch and the event cache Action Log This tab allows setting a different location for the action log including user name and password information if required and controls how often MxControlCent
35. Player postfixes to the layout names Make sure that you document the naming conventions you used 4 3 2 Configuring Layout Selection Selecting different layouts is one key feature that controls how the operators of a security system work with the system When setting up the system you need to decide how the operators should switch layouts e Operators are using the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel Continue with Arranging Grouping Layouts in the Layout Manager e Operators are using buttons within background layouts Continue with Using Layout Buttons in Layouts MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 180 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 LAYOUTS 4 Overview Outside B Main Entrance B west gate B Parking B Garage Entrance 4 g Overview Inside B Reception B Elevators B Back Entrance B outside Player B Inside Player 4 VIDEO SOURCES Back to Overview West gate e Operators are using toolbar buttons at the top or at the bottom of MxControlCenter s main window Continue with Using Layout Buttons in the Toolbar Arranging Grouping Layouts in the Layout Manager To group or rearrange the layouts in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel proceed as follows e Drop a layout on another one to start a group e Move a layout up or down to change the order e Move a layout to
36. This may take a long time and may consume a large amount of hard disk space You will be able to use the Post Video Motion search in any case You can change this behavior any time in the application options By default the event searches are disabled Click on Enable in this dialog to activate the event searches Note that these searches depend on the event cache see below The event cachestores information about the events of all cameras of an MxControlCenter installation on the computer s local hard disk MxControlCenter then searches the event cache rather than searching all cameras individually This provides for much quicker searches If you do notneed event searches you should keep the event cache disabled to save computer resources To manually control the event cache select Tools gt Options from the menu then click on the Monitoring tab In the Event Cache group box you can activate deactivate the Enable fast event search requires event cache checkbox The Event Search User Interface Open the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel and click on one of the predefined event searches or on Local Searches to see the interface below Note that the search results may still be empty on a fresh installation of MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 121 396 Hep AB
37. and zoom 1 speaker 0 1 Starts stops the sound output beep Plays a beep sound on the target computer OnTop Moves MxCC to top and restores the window CloseMxCC Closes MxCC without saving MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog Command Values Remarks Changes channel n to IP address and ChangeChannel n lt IP address gt lt params gt Use parameters port PTZ loadpreiayo t Loads the preferred layout of the active channel player enable disable Activates deactivates player mode player play Starts playing the recordings player stop Stops player player nextframe Skips to next frame player fastforward Starts winding in fast forward player jumptobeginning Jumps to the beginning of the recordings player jumptoend Jumps to the end of the recordings player rewind Starts rewinding in fast backward player previousframe Skips to previous frame player Peis yyyy mm dd Jumps to the frame before this time MM SS stamp openeventsearchattime Opens event search with given time prayer yyyy mm dd hh mm ss stamp showInAlarmWindow lt IP address gt Shows camera in a Live Alarm window showInExtraWindow lt IP address gt Shows camera in an extra window showMessage lt Text gt Shows text in a modal message box 160x120 320x240 352x288 384x288 size 640x480 704x57
38. and not the older Time Protocol This ensures that the time is synchronized in a continuous man ner rather than once a week which is the default setting on Windows computers It is possible to differentiate between three important situations regarding the network 1 Local camera network without an Internet connection or an existing time server and without a MOBOTIX GPS Box In this case set up ONE camera as the master camera to become the time server for all other cameras and devices This at least ensures time synchronicity within the system even if this time deviates from the global time 2 Local camera network without an Internet connection or an existing time server but a MOBOTIX GPS Box is connected Here the GPS Box is automatically used as a time source for the MOBOTIX camera connected to it In turn this camera is used as a time source for all other cameras and devices 3 Camera network with an Internet connection or an existing time server In this constellation one or multiple cameras can be linked with an external time server and these cameras can then be used as a time server for other cameras To find more information about using NTP on Windows computers go to Microsoft s web site and search for Windows Time Service MxCC allows you to quickly and easily set a common time reference for all the cameras according to the three scenarios outlined above You can do this in the Time server tab of the Camer
39. any time This service provides a convenient method to access your MOBOTIX cameras from home or work if the camera internet connection is not through a Router which assigns a fixed IP address but instead over a DSL connection with a dynamically assigned IP address from the provider A well known provider of this free service is Ethernet The most common technology for communication within a wired network It provides for data exchange between all devices computers printers IP cameras etc connected to a local area network LAN Events Refers to a situation when something happens or changes In terms of video surveillance this means a change in the status of an area that is being monitored This can be movement of a person a change in brightness a drop in ambient temperature the detection of a noise via a microphone an electrical signal at a signal input the manual operation of a button etc ExtiO MOBOTIX expansion module that the camera uses to directly operate lamps sirens and door openers as well as external audio components speakers and microphones Fast Ethernet Ethernet connections with speeds of up to 100 Mbit s FixDome Camera without moving parts in a dome shaped housing Flash Memory See CF Card fps Abbreviation of frames per second see Frame Rate Frame Rate Specifies how many frames per second fps are generated and sent by the camera The human eye perceives movement as a fluid
40. e Sort the camera list by version click on the Version column heading Y e Make sure that all cameras you would like to update are showing the OK connection Status e Select all cameras with the same first digit of the software version you would like to update e Click on the software with the same first digit on the Camera tab of the Software Packages panel MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Update Assistant Software Updates and More e Click on the Install button red box in figure below to update the software on the selected cameras For M22M 012 V12 022M M12 Q22M Date Fie MX_system_de_3_5223r3 mpl_ Languages German Engish Software version in all available languages for all MOBOTIX M12 D12 MX V3 5 2 23 r3 MX V3 5 2 23 r3 mx10 885 61 Bpom mx va 0 6 9 a2 thio EEK a o mevao 731 improvements and enhancements in exposure control image settings data storage Hemispheric functions LED signaling and a new ActiveX e The Update Assistant asks you to confirm the storage location of the camera con figuration backup files Upload software version MX V3 5 2 23 r3 to 3 cameras V Store Configuration Files Before uploading store configuration files r5 Me Desktop MxCC 2 5 MxConfig Backup 2011 06 30 29 Choose Cox cancel _ e Ifyou click on OK Update Assistant creates the configuration b
41. e g if you suspect that you could use the video later on without having to access the regular recordings This is a simple method for permanently storing an interesting video clip without having to change the configura tion of the system Example Think of a detective in a big department store The detective uses a layout that shows several MOBOTIX cameras Once the detective spots a suspicious person he she presses the Live recording button Since the suspicious person leaves the area monitored by one camera the detective simply clicks on the next camera to follow the person MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 9 3 3 9 6 Ne lf the next camera is on a different layout you need to restart live recording after switching to the next layout To stop the recording simply deactivate the Live recording button in the current layout How to Use Live Recording e Start live recording Click on the Live recording button Ey e Switch cameras while recording Click on the desired camera in the same layout yellow frame highlights current camera e Switch layouts while recording Automatically stops recording see Caution box below e Stop live recording manually Click again on the Live recording button Ey e Access live recordings Live recordings are stored iN 4 on acute the LOCAL ARCHIVE section of the Navigator sidebar panel You
42. etc see Section 5 2 2 Configuring and Editing Snap Server Settings Different subnet Yellow Besides the cameras that have already been added in the same logical network subnet as your computer MxControlCenter also finds new MOBOTIX cameras with factory IP addresses using Bonjour see Example above Preview image MxControlCenter displays the live images from the selected camera in this field as long as this camera is available i Z3 more than one camera is selected using CTRL click the preview window displays the images from the last camera you Clicked on You can thus quickly find the cameras you want to use in MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Launching MxControlCenter for the First Time 59 396 Manually Adding Video Sources To The List In addition to MOBOTIX cameras that are found automatically you can also manually add video sources to the list of video sources in MxControlCenter e Camera Enter the IP address or the DNS name of a MOBOTIX camera or a third party IP camera see Section 5 4 Using Rotor Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks and Section 5 5 MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras This also applies to cameras that are to be integrated via DynDNS see Section 5 3 Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS e MxPEG Clip Adds an MxPEG video clip previously recorded by a MOBOTIX camera as a
43. many smaller live windows around see figure A layout can only have one focus window Focus windows in background layouts have a gray title bar MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 6 5 3 96 Other Elements Besides the layout elements already described in To Install an MxControlCenter Language Package and Elements with Variable Video Sources above the following additional elements are available for background layouts only e Close Windows This button closes all extra floating live image windows Extra live image windows are automatically opened when you double click any display window or icon that has an assigned video source Right click on the button to delete it or to set its background color e Configure Sequencer This button Mee e a aaa opens the Sequencer Configuration i Show Camera IP Name dialog which provides a convenient j pete 10212168 way to configure the order of display EE ela siS and the sequencer times for all video Defa 19218 V Default 10 2 1 93 sources contained in the layout Boas AIi J Default 10 2 12 168 Right click on the button to delete it or to set its background color TN LT e Layout This button opens the cor Show for 3 1 60 sec responding layout when clicked cal Right click on the button to delete it or to set its background color e Command
44. saeee Microphone Notification Recording Recordable Events by a MOBOTIX Camera In addition to an integrated high performance computer a modern MOBOTIX camera has a high quality image sensor for high resolution images to be used as evidence supported by full duplex audio with a microphone and speaker for lip synchronized sound a passive infrared sensor PIR a temperature sensor and can be connected to for example external smoke sensors and an electrical door closing device via various camera connections Depending on the application a camera can be programmed in MxCC in such a way to automatically e record movements and persons in the sub area detected by the camera using digital image analysis or PIR e detect temperature changes and noises e process external signal inputs MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 29 396 What Happens Then Recording Alarm Message etc When a camera is programmed to record all movements persons in the warehouse of a shoe store outside of opening hours the MxCC user is offered a multitude of reactions that are automatically triggered by the camera and or video management system jointly or individually e The incident is recorded as video with sound and displayed in the MxCC alarm list e The camera emits an acoustical alarm or plays an audio file e The camera sends Emails or SMS via a provider with an alar
45. set up a different start layout you can do so yourself provided you have the proper rights right click on a layout in the Navigator panel then select Use as Start Layout from the context menu If you do not have these rights you should contact your system administra tor to set a different start layout for you 3 2 2 Switching Layouts Switching between different layouts is one of the main tasks when you are working with many cameras There are three methods to switch between the layouts of your MxControlCenter installation e Navigator Make sure that the sidebar is visible View gt Navigator j Sidebar gt Show and the Navigator panel is open 4 ayours The layouts are grouped and have names that should 4 j Outside describe their purpose Select the layout you want to E Overview see you may have to open a group by clicking on the P Parking lot open icon in front of the group name i sy Ly gs Nig See Arranging Grouping Layouts in the Layout Manager in Section 4 3 2 Configuring Layout Selection e Layout buttons within background layouts These buttons allow Overview Outside aoe t 5 A nP 4 eo p LY FMD S AS ji Jertrum f r switching directly from one layout to ne ike E SEA mee interdiszipl ait the next Asan example you could Forsch amg 2 West gate switch from the country overview ee as Ween to one region then to one city and Parking Z 2 Volt non maof Uai on
46. spective on the way recordings are taken and fis pme E oo processed later on Consider the example below Zoomed and corrected during Recorded full image playback The camera is recording full images left but when examining the recordings later on you can use the MxControlCenter s virtual PTZ features to zoom into the recorded image and to pan tilt the image section right You can thus find a specific image area and play back the recorded video stream until you find the interesting footage of an incident for example MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 119 396 When playing back recordings you can only apply distortion correction if the cam era had been recording full image If this had been the case you can use the MxControlCenter Panoramaand Panorama Focus display modes for example see table in the MxControlCenter Display Modes section Activating the Virtual PTZ in Recordings Open a recording by doing one of the following On alive window click on the Activate Player mode button Click on a player window Open any event search in the Navigator gt EVENT SEARCHES section in the sidebar then double click on an event to open it in the player panel Open the PTZ Controls sidebar panel In the MxCC Display Mode group set the lower dropdown to Image Area or Area Correct
47. the MxControlCenter computer MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 177 396 Setting the audio path of all other cameras in the layoutio the audio path camera will always use that camera to make the announcement regardless if a camera has been selected or not If only some of the cameras in a layout are using the audio path property you need to select at least one camerato make an announcement 4 3 Setting Up Live Video Monitoring This section contains information on how to set up alive video surveillance system including some hints for planning a layout structure for the users for configuring the user interface and for powering video walls using the remote control functions of MxControlCenter For the purpose of this section we are assuming the following e You have activated the Layout Manager e You know how to deactivate the Layout Manager see Section 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts e You know how to store the configuration see Section 4 9 2 Saving Program Settings and Exporting Installations e You have set up a computer to run MxStatus Section 4 1 6 MxStatus Status Monitoring for Multiple MxControlCenter Computers 4 3 1 Planning a Layout Structure If you only have a few cameras twelve or less you can use a simple approach e Create one layout for every four cameras with live c
48. 1 In the same manner the router will be forwarding queries on port 8002 to the local IP address 192 168 178 202 i e to camera 2 Registering a DynDNS Name In this first step you need to create an account at a suitable DynDNS service if you have not already done so e g www dyndns org Make sure that you keep the access data User name and password stored in a safe place You will need this information later on when configuring the DynDNS client of the router In this step you should also register the DynDNS name for the router that you would like to use for accessing the remote cameras The DynDNS name in our example would be mycamera The DynDNS service providers usually offer a selection of domains to add after the DynDNS name separated by a dot For this example we selected dyndns org The name for accessing the cameras thus always starts with mycamera dyndns org MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 5 8 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Configuring the Router e Setting up the DynDNS client on the router Open the user interface of the router in your web browser by entering the router s IP address or its mDNS name e g http 192 168 178 1 or http fritz box respectively If this does not work please read the documentation of your router to find the correct IP address for accessing the router Open
49. 1 1 The General Tab the MxControlCenter configuration file which was last saved opens default setting The last configuration file does not automatically load if this checkbox is activated Instead the application displays the dialog box to open any configuration file every time you start the program If you would like to MxControlCenter always load a specific configuration file use the shortcuts to do so as outlined in Section 4 9 3 Using Different MxControlCenter Configurations 4 9 2 Saving Program Settings and Exporting Installations If you are working with smaller security systems that only have one computer chances are that you do not need to bother working with different configuration files For larger installations you may want to create different configuration files for testing and for the individual workstations for example MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Working with MxControlCenter Configurations 235 396 You can store the current configuration by doing one of the following Save configuration Click on this toolbar button to save the current configuration file File gt Save Select this menu command to save the current configuration file File gt Save as Select this menu command to open the Save Configuration as dialog This dialog can save the current configuration file with a different name and to a different location
50. 1 1 Elements of the Update Assistant Dialog To open the Update Assistant dialog select Tools gt Update Assistant from the MxControlCenter menu Update Assistant New Camera List o es File Camera View d 2 E tt e p a 7 Q Toolbar Add Cameras Connection Settings Search Cameras Reboot Upload Software Save Settings Upload Settings Open Browser Name Address Version Alt Address Progress Software Packages a x Miia Name Platform Version Time anguages Extension MX V3 5 2 23 3 5 Software Packages __ MX System 4 0 4 19 panel with list of MX V4 0 6 9 E D2MT2M QM MM 5 13 11 software for down mpl German Russian Japanese loading MX V3 5 2 23 r3 nen gt P nes a MX V4 0 7 31 Camera Information 8x Status Connected Camera Information NEREIS panel with Update Model MOBOTIX Q24M Secure Log Preview Camera MX V3 5 2 23 r3 Address abbassi information tabs Factory IP 10 8 85 61 MX V3 5 2 23 3 Alt IP Host name main entrance Software version MX V4 0 6 9 Resolution Custom Size 1024x384 eras List of MOBOTIX cameras 7 cameras 1 selected To show or hide individual panels of Update Assistant check uncheck the checkboxes in front of the panel names of the View menu MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 240 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features 5 1 2 Update Assistant Toolbar Buttons As shown in the o
51. 15 Thu 26 0 Con EA itt Start 15 38 04 Tue 07 09 2010 End 16 06 30 Tue 21 09 2010 Search Time 14 27 00 14 27 12 14 27 59 16112006 142712 ie KLCC le Laa Reference Time JEE Preview of single events Video Player Image post processing MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com _ 33 396 Time Search for Multiple Cameras The synchronization function via timeserver lets you store all cameras integrated in MxCC with the same system time This is an important prerequisite for data to meet court standards but also for the special MxCC function of directly finding all events that were recorded in a specific time period and displaying them together on the monitor For example the path of an intruder from the parking lot until the break in can be traced in the server room The compiled video reproduces the complete event up to the point when the stolen devices are loaded into the trunk of a vehicle with a recognizable license plate It can thus provide valuable evidence for further criminal investigation This event sequence 1 to 9 recorded by several cameras can be storend in MxCC as a complete video aj a ai aa s 5 4 a d mI Ga Srch Modei Off 041971 0 00 00 H 0 And what is most useful In the event search you discover the man with the suitcase in the parking lot By stopping the recording you no
52. 2 1 Power Supply When Connected Directly to a Computer 1 Connect the pre installed cable of the camera to the Camera connector of the Network Power Adapter 2 Connect the Ethernet cable of the computer to the PC Power connector of the Network Power Adapter 3 Plug the RJ45 connector of the external power supply into the LAN Power con nector of the Network Power Adapter If everything has been connected properly the camera LEDs in the front start blinking and the camera powers up this takes about one minute PoE Adapter MX NPA PoE Power supply PC 10 8 0 11 255 0 0 0 Camera 10 8 0 99 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com For the Q24M M24M D24M and T24M cam eras you need to use the new blue MX NPA PoE Set Previous MOBOTIX network power acces sories such as the NPA Set Power Box and Power Rack MX NPA Set MX NPR 4 and MX NPR8 20 are not suitable for use with these camera models og The IP addresses in the diagram are only an example 52 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation The IP addresses in the diagram are shown only as an example 2 2 2 Power Supply and Network Connection Using a PoE Switch 1 Connect the pre installed cable of the camera to one of the PoE powered Ethernet connectors of the PoE switch router The switch router must support the PoE stan dard IEEE 802 3af 2 Co
53. 20 1 O H BISA 3 0O20 Temy neo Sartay CaneiTime gt Setoad Manay v 1 4 EVENT SEAROHE s Astos entering te man gate Arro Pe past har Al persons entering the ert door the The figure above contains the event images of all selected cameras in the search results panel in the sort order set in the properties bar e g by name descending Event Search User Interface Elements Properties bar It contains the controls to select cameras filter the events set the time range to search in etc The Creating an Ad Hoc Event Search section below explains how to use the elements of the properties bar Predefined event searches These searches have been stored in the MxControlCenter installation Simply click on any search in the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel to open the search There are two types of searches Event searches This is the default search type that finds the events recorded by the selected cameras in the specified time range Post Video Motion searches This search type finds all events in which MxControlCenter detects movements in a custom search window of one camera more on this in Section 3 5 9 Using Post Video Motion Detection in Recordings Search results This panel shows the events found by MxControlCenter using the search criteria defined in the properties bar Move your mouse over any event to get a tooltip help with information on the event camera name
54. 396 Click on the Restore button of the application window fo return to the regular window and deactivate View gt Free scaling Changing the Display Window Scaling The commands of the View gt Display window scaling menu and the options of the cor responding button see figure at the right allow changing how the individual display windows are scaled within the current layout If you want to show the selected video source as large as possible within the application window select the Maximize command for example The available commands depend on whether or not you have selected a video source yellow frame Showing Only the Display Area To maximize the display area within the application window select the View gt Saved views gt Display area only menu command MxControlCenter hides all application con trols and the menu bar and maximizes the current layout within the application window Displaying the Layout in Full Screen Mode If you want to show the current layout on the entire monitor you can select the View gt Saved views gt Full screen menu command MxControlCenter hides all application controls and the application frame and shows the current layout in full screen mode e When using multiple monitors and several MxCC instances on one computer the Full screen view causes the corresponding MxCC instance to be automatically displayed on the monitor that shows the Windows taskbar If you would rather sho
55. 7 10 12 58 57 PM Camer a selected MxControlCenter stores new alarms from other cameras in the alarm list but shows only the alarms of the selected camera MxControlCenter shows only the alarms of the selected camera until a new alarm from a different camera arrives Shows only Lost Connection errors of the selected camera Click on the button again to return to the unfiltered list Connection Lost 1 10 7 10 1258 57 PM Adding Images to the Alarm List i MxControlCenter automatically adds the alarm images of the alerting cameras to the Alarm List If you want to store additional images in the list you can use this command Click on the Copy current image to Alarm List toolbar button to execute this command or right click on the window and select Image gt Copy to Alarm List Showing the Alarm Instructions of a Video Source The Alarm Instructions are used to store important information for specific cameras If an instruction file has been set for the active video source yellow frame this button is active in the toolbar To open the alarm instructions file of a camera fF e Grid layouts The Show camera s alarm instructions button in the toolbar indicates that an instruction file is available Click on the button to see the file or right click on the window and select Show Alarm Instructions MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com How
56. 9 VIDEO SORGOS 4 EVENT SLARCHE Table of predefined sm tor pe nan ge arro ne omn rar Event Searchs Search Results Fre 6O ibis OR Video Player Quickfinder Selected Video In order to directly obtain video clips with many events in succession a quickfinder with an event histogram is displayed for immediate access using a mouse The number and height of the vertical bars symbolizes the number and duration of the events many bars many events MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com _ 35 396 Filtering Events The recordings can be filtered specifically for special event types e g switch contacts IR motion sensors doorbell One example that may be cited is filtering for only the images recorded at the video door stations after the doorbell is pressed Convenient Playback Functions Clicking directly on the preview window of a stored event activates the video player integrated in MxCC Selected video clips can be scrolled forwards and backwards quickly or simply image by image Details in still images can be enlarged via the zoom function The perspective of images distorted by very wide angle lenses can be corrected digitally for easier evaluation Printing Event Images If an image has been corrected or zoomed by post processing the original non processed image will be also be printed A print file can also be output as a PDF for easy sending and archiv
57. 94 Scaling 94 Common Time Server Configuring 154 Computer Automatically starting MxServer 277 Concept Decentralized MOBOTIX concept 16 Configuration parameter MxControlCenter 334 Configurations Saving initial 63 Using different 236 Working with 234 Configuring Action log 231 Alarms 196 Alarms on the cameras 198 Common time server 154 Dead man s switch 233 Display functions 190 Extra windows 183 Functions for minimized or hidden MxControlCenter 194 Getting started 152 Layout selection 179 Live recording 182 Local archive 182 MxAnalytics 211 MxControlCenter reactions 201 MxControlCenter remote control 183 MxControlCenter video wall 183 Program views 190 Recordings 196 Scaling functions 190 Sequencers 181 Snap Server settings 254 System 152 Toolbar 190 User interface 190 Video analysis 211 Video sources 56 Views 192 What to record 200 Where to record 207 Connecting Analog PTZ cameras to MxServer 275 Remote cameras using DynDNS 255 Third party IP camera to MxServer 276 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 8 2 3 96 MxCC User Manual Index Connection Defaults Options tab 294 Connections Encrypted to access cameras 225 Controlling Video motion detection 216 Correcting Distortion 36 Correct panorama view 180 cameras 62 Counting Lines MxAnalytics 146 Creating Event searches 119 Groups and users 218 Layouts over
58. AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 58 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation Unknown status ok Access denied Unknown error Snap Server O Different subnet Statuses of the Discovered Video Sources MxControlCenter automatically monitors and displays the operating status of all video sources The status is shown as a colored dot to the left of the video source s name I Unknown status Gray MxControlCenter has not yet determined the status but is working on it OK Green The camera is ready and responding hence it can be integrated immediately Access denied Green with blue lock The camera can be integrated but is password protected and the password is yet unknown to MxControlCenter Right click on the camera select Authenticate and enter the correct user name and password Once a valid user name and password have been entered the symbol changes to a green dot and the lock disappears Unknown error Red The camera is found but not responding This occurs while a camera is rebooting but can also be caused by a disruption in the HTTP connection network error firewall during normal operation Snap Server Blue These devices are Snap Server NASsystems detected on your network Right click on a Snap Server to configure it directly from MxControlCenter You can rename the Snap Server add edit and delete users
59. Alarm Player Window in a Layout An Alarm Player window shows the saved alarms from any camera that you click on in the alarm list The saved alarms are not displayed in a list but rather as a video from a video recorder You can therefore fast forward or rewind through the alarms and the recorded image sequences of each alarm Alarm player windows in background layouts have a gray title bar For more detailed information about how alarm player windows work Section 3 5 5 Playback in Layouts with Alarm Player Windows Application Related Options When an alarm arrives MxControlCenter can also execute the following actions e Add the camera alarm image to the Alarm List even though the camera is not part of the current layout e Restore the application window if MxControlCenter is minimized e Bring the application to the foreground if MxControlCenter is hidden behind other windows 3 4 2 Acoustic Alarm Features In the event of an alarm MxControlCenter can play back sounds over the audio system of the computer This can be a standard sound beep or a custom sound file wav To set the sound file open Options gt Alarm Handling in the menu and search for a sound file Likewise you can set how often MxControlCenter will repeat the sound and when the sound will stop after acknowledging an alarm see Section 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms Acoustic alerting is only available if either the Alarm List or the Alarm Message
60. Audio Messages audionotify Sound Profiles rescon General Image Settings camdriver aioe Settings imageimprover Color Settings imageimprover2 Image Control JPEG pe zoomcontrol Text amp Display Settings views vPTZ Settings vpiz time Time and Date signals Camera time server LED Setup signalout LEDs Error Notification weatherstat Sensor Configuration systemalarm sensors Domes admin ethernet Ethernet Interface Isdn iP address and host Routing route name Dynamic DNS Client dyndns General Network Client Settings modem Manage Hardware Extensions serial rs232d rescon Storage on External File Server fileserver File Server Flash Device camerachecks Storage Failure Detection rescon Manage Image Files medialist Logos Logo Profiles logolist Image Profiles timetable MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 5 O 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Camera Dialogs Configuration File Sections homepage Language and Start Page httpd Page language and Softbuttons softbuttons softbuttons MultiView Screens multiview Multi Watcher softbutton multiwatcher cameras General Event Settings Event Settings eventdlite Event Control Event Filter signalout Video Motion windows Event Logic timetable Recording rescon Action Group Overview 5 1 8 Backing Up and Restoring the Entire System Whereas the mechanisms described in Section 5 1 7 Saving and U
61. Configuration Sett e Click on Open to use the selected file acc2s A MCC 25 Virtual d MCC Configueati gt In case you do not want to use a configu p e ration file click on Cancel Note that you will have to reconfigure MxControlCenter from scratch add the video sources again morne pa uau create new layouts etc see Section 2 4 1 cee coe Finding and Configuring Video Sources Loading a Specific Configuration Using an Absolute File Name If you would like to use different MxControlCenter configurations e g for different users there is a much more comfortable method to do this By creating different shortcuts for launching MxControlCenter you can automatically load specific configuration files oe n e Create a shortcut to MxCC exe in O ENR lt the MxControlCenter program folder Security Details Previous Versions e Set the shortcut properties right click Geosai Compatbiy on the shortcut select Properties from MxCC GateGuards South Gate the context menu Target type Application If required add the MxNoSave parameter to the MxControlCenter launch command in the Target field to prevent inadvertent changes to the configuration Chadet kav Nana C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe MxNoSave MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany Target location MxCC AxNoSave C MxCC GateGuards SouthGate ini www mobotix com sales mobotix com Work
62. Double click on the Handler Mappings icon in the center pane Below Actions in the right pane click on Add Module Mapping In the Add Module Mapping dialog enter these values in the following fields of the center pane Request path jpg Module CgiModule Executable optional C inetpub cgi bin MxRemotePreview cgi exe Name MxRemotePreview service Click on OK Confirm the Add Module Mapping dialog Do you want to allow this ISAPI extension In the Connections pane right click on Default Web Site and select Add Virtual Directory MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 284 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Enter the following value in the Add Virtual Directory dialog e Physical Path lt camera recordings folder gt This value may point to a share on a different computer or NAS provided it has already been mapped as a network drive on the local computer Click on OK In the Connections pane select the server name Double click on MIME Types to open dialog under Actions in the right pane select Add This opens the Add MIME Type dialog Enter the following values in the Add MIME Type dialog e File name extension erdinfo e MIME Type application octet stream Click on OK 5 6 4 Testing the Web Server with MxRemotePreview Testing the CGI Module in the Browser 1 Open
63. Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline e Conduct a user training Present live monitoring and vPTZ functions Demonstrate how to search print and export recordings Show how alerting and user feedback work Present emergency procedures MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 64 396 MxCC User Manual Troubleshooting B TROUBLESHOOTING B 1 B 1 1 Issue Solutions to Common Issues Power and Connectivity Issues Possible Cause Solution Network interface switch indi cates no connection to camera Cables at NPA improperly con nected switched Attach devices correctly to NPA Network interface speed set incorrectly e g 1 Gbit s Set speed to 10 100 Mbit s MxCC does not find camera automatically After manually adding camera camera does not show images Camera is behind a router connected via Internet Add camera manually No power supply to camera not connected to PoE switch Port has been included in camera address Connect power supply PoE switch Specify port in separate text field Protocol e g http has been ad
64. In the Add Cameras dialog add the IP Address IP Range URL User Password and Proxy information as required 4 Click on Add to create an entry in the camera list 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the list contains the cameras you would like to keep in this list 6 Select File gt Save Camera List or Save Camera List As to save the camera list MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using Snap Server NAS Systems 253 396 5 2 Using Snap Server NAS Systems MOBOTIX cameras in larger installations typically use file servers to store their record ings Instead of file servers you can also use NAS Network Attached Storage systems MxControlCenter supports Overland Storage Snap Server NAS systems When adding new video sources MxControlCenter automatically finds new Snap Servers with a firmware GOS version 5 2 056 and higher In addition you can use MxControlCenter to set up the Snap Servers add users configure the network settings etc 5 2 1 Adding Overland Storage Snap Servers When setting up a new system that includes Snap Servers MxControlCenter automati cally finds all Snap Servers on the same physical network see Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources When adding Snap Servers to an existing system make sure they are properly connected to the network then select Video Source gt Add from the menu Wait until all Snap Servers h
65. MOBOTIX cameras that are not in the current layout can only add images to the alarm list if they are sending alarm messages to the MxControlCenter computer For more information on how to do this Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras and Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxContro Center Reactions Showing Connection Alarms in the Alarm List EEANAEP 4RNNE a _ In case MxControlCenter loses the connection to any camera in the system MxControlCenter adds a Connection Lost alarm He to the alarm list If alarm acknowledgement has been set in 1E MxControlCenter you can acknowledge the alarm as any other EZ alarm Section 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms cached do If the MxControlCenter Alarm List is not visible or does not open when an alarm comes in you should ask your system administrator for assistance MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com How the Alarm Features Work 101 396 Title Bar Colors and Types of Alarm List Images Every image in the alarm list is shown with a title bar It displays the alarm time camera name and the elapsed time since the alarm The colors of the title bar have the following meaning Title Bar Explanation MxControlCenter detects an alarm in this camera within current layout Unacknowledged event alarm Unacknowledged event alarm from selected camera Alerting camera sends network message to MxCon
66. MxControlCenter s network message log is listing the received command To see the log s contents do the following MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 187 396 Select Tools gt Options from the MxControlCenter menu Click on the Remote Control tab MxControlCenter lists the received commands in the Network Message Log box The Network Message Log box shows the commands received since the last launch of MxControlCenter the last remote control command is on top If you close the application and launch it again the log is empty The Network Message Log box does not update automatically To see commands that have been entered while the log is visible close and reopen the Options dialog Step 4 Configure the Application Device to Send a Remote Command The application or device that is trying to remote control MxControlCenter needs to able to send an HTTP GET request this is basically what the browser does when you press the RETURN button in Step 3 Test the Remote Control In this example we will implement a video wall by using MxControlCenter on the main computer to remotely control anther MxControlCenter instance running on the client computer The remote control command switches to a different layout that is part of the client computer s MxControlCenter configuration The operator clicks on a lay
67. MxStatus in the command prompt and press RETURN The command prompt should now look like this By default MxStatus uses any net work card i e IP address of the computer and port 8080 seeblue Suess peg MxCC 2 5 gt MxStatus This is MxStatus 1 3 15 1 frame in figure MxStatus accepts Es Sea ss TER ess Sela Sa j Defaults ip 0 0 0 0 port 8080 two parameters shown as lt ip gt GCSE EEREN and lt port gt in the figure Press q lt Enter gt to quit Server socket listening on addr 0 0 0 0 8080 Command Prompt MxStatus e lt ip gt Use a specific IP address if you have more than one network card on your computer and you would like to use only one of these cards mxstatus 172 16 0 20 e lt port gt Use this parameter if you need a different port than the default port 8080 Note that you need to enter both parameters even though you only want to set a specific port enter 0 0 0 0 as first parameter to use this port on all network cards mxstatus 172 16 0 20 9000 h prance When running the application for the first time Windows will ask if it O should continue to block the program Make sure that you click on Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program E Unblock in the Windows Security Alert dialog shown on the left may said agen tbe atoa on sion nenat Pa N enea E EE Jf yey look different depending on your Windows version unblock Da progam it wil ea be unbiodedon al private networks tha
68. Object halo Specify the color for the movement outline of the moving objects Counting lines Counting line deadtime Specify the period of time within which an object that has crossed a line is no longer counted by the line This setting increases the accuracy of the object counting process if objects are moving on the line in close proximity and crossing the line more than once Display Specify how counting lines are displayed in the camera image Counting line color Specify the color for counting lines Text color Specify a color for counting values and line IDs to ensure that they are easily visible against different background images Counting line IDs Choose whether you would like to display the counting line IDs in the camera image Counting values Choose whether you would like to display the counting values in the camera image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 4 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Heat Map Settings e Display Choose whether you would like to display heat maps in the live image We recommend switching on the display for a short check only as the display in the live image generates a high computing load e Minimum and maximum values This setting allows you to specify whether you would like to display all the movements captured in the heat map or movements within specific value ranges only This way you can choose to o
69. Overview MOBOTIX cameras automatically detect movement within a monitored area MxAnalytics video motion analysis is built into the camera and delivered with every Q24M camera as standard It makes it possible to track people and objects and collect statistical behavior data Various specifications should be set in order to collect the appropriate behavior data that deliver useful analysis results You can find an overview of these technical specifica tions at www mobotix com gt Products gt Hemispheric Q24 gt MxAnallytics Tracking and Evaluating Movements Heat Maps Which shelves in the shop attracted the most customers this month Which waiting areas in the departure hall are preferred in the after noon All movements of objects of a particular size are recorded and evaluated either in the live image or in a previously defined detec tion area to provide answers to questions like these The frequency of the movements is shown visually through different colors in a heat map Counting People and Objects Counting Lines How many people go in and out of an entrance to a shop during the day Counting lines can be defined at the desired positions in the cam era s live image The system records how often each counting line is crossed within a specified period The evaluation of the individual count ing lines can be viewed as weekly and monthly counting lines reports in a table in the event search The reliability of the
70. Pause before video streaming resumes Continue decoding Only minimizes the application window but continues to decode the video streams i e MxControlCenter can detect alarms in the current layout When using the Pause and Stop alloptions MxControlCenter cannot detect alarms in the live video streams If this a requirement make sure that you do the following e SetWhen minimized to Continue decoding e Configure the cameras so they send network messages to the MxControlCenter computer see Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 196 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 5 Configuring Alarms and Recordings When configuring this part of the MxControlCenter installation you are setting up the autonomous system functions of the cameras and MxControlCenter and how the users will interact with the system You will need to decide on the following questions e Which cameras should trigger which alarms using which sensors See Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras e What should the cameras record See Section 4 5 2 Configuring What to Record e How should MxControlCenter react when it receives the alarms and how can test the reactions See Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions e Where should the cameras store the recordings See Section 4 5 4 Conf
71. S A and other countries Microsoft Windows and Windows Serverare registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Apple the Apple logo Macintosh OS X iOS Bonjour the Bonjour logo the Bonjour icon i Podand iTunesare trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S A and other countries iPhone iPad iPad mini and iPod touch are Apple Inc trademarks Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds All other marks and names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective owners Copyright 1999 2014 MOBOTIX AG Langmeil Germany Information subject to change without notice Download the latest version of this and other manuals as PDF files from www mobotix com gt Support gt Manuals MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com ee sees Sets tay yy f 3 Da e MOBOTIX Video System Solution 5 1396 PERFECT INTERACTION THE HIGH RESOLUTION VIDEO SYSTEM SOLUTION FROM MOBOTIX The MxControlCenter MxCC is the video management software developed by MOBOTIX with all the functions necessary for a professional security control center Above all KoL MxCC maximizes its fullest potential when combined with the decentralized high 100 EREE resolution MOBOTIX cameras a complete security system from one source and at an Vof Y unbeatably low total cost Ny Proven Many Times Over Worldwide MxCC has been used in proj
72. Sends an e mail using the settings you specified above For more information on this topic see Section 3 8 1 Working with the Dead Man s Switch Event Cache O This checkbox enables MxControlCenter s event cache which downloads event information from all cameras that are listed in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel If this option is deactivated the event searches EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel will not work see Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches The default setting of the Network cache size is 64MB the maximal value is 2GB Provided that you have sufficient storage capacity on your hard drive we recommend setting the maximum value to minimize the loading times of the video system for event searches Limit the setting of the Network cache to 0 to prevent local access to the data MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 O 6 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 1 7 The Action Log Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options om General Connection Defaults View Alarm Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log Action Log File 1 Custom User name Password User Archive Action Log Every day 2 Every week Every month When exceeding 1 MB No configuration loaded Action Log File e Custom Shows the current location of the action log fil
73. The Player sidebar panel controls the playback of stored recordings If the layout Player 4 contains more than one camera you can show the recordings in synchronized mode eae aaa Ica calcd based on the time of the recording Besides showing the playback commands this sidebar panel also allows adding video clips to the Export List for exporting purposes 09 02 12 ee ee For more information see Section 3 5 Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings y and Configuring How MxControlCenter Accesses the Recordings in Section 4 5 4 aceite Configuring Where to Record e The PTZ Controls sidebar panel is used to control the PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom functions PTZ Controls of a camera Depending on the type of camera this may be the virtual PTZ or a cme fw camera on a pan tilt head This panel can also contain additional controls depend O 2 ing on the camera and lens you are using If the current camera supports Hemispheric ems features a MOBOTIX Q22M for example this panel will be expanded accordingly eee For more information see Section 3 2 9 Using the Virtual PTZ Functions on Live peat Pen Images and Section 3 5 7 Using the Virtual PTZ Features When Playing Back aes ee Recordings e The Softbuttons sidebar panel contains the same buttons as the web interface of softbuttons the selected MOBOTIX camera These softbuttons are used to access special cam E era functions making them available
74. This button executes the assigned HTTP command when clicked Command buttons are mainly used to control video wall layouts where the main MxControlCenter computer controls other MxControlCenter computers connected to the monitors of the video wall See Section 4 3 6 Configuring MxControlCenter Remote Control and a Video Wall for more information on how to use a command button Right click on the button to edit or delete it or to set its background color MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 6 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Status Icons and Focus Windows Unlike in grid layouts which only accept one focus window background windows can have more than one focus window By clicking first on a focus window and then on a status icon you can dynamically assign different MOBOTIX cameras to the focus windows Gelandeplan To show the camera of a status icon in a focus window Click on the focus window to select it 2 Click on the status icon to display the camera Repeat clicking on a focus window then on a status icon to see the corresponding live stream in the focus window MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 167 396 4 2 3 Defining Grid Layouts By definition grid layouts only have display windows in con i trast to background lay
75. W This element is not tied to a specific camera and only displays the live video stream of the Focus last camera or status icon you clicked on W When used on a computer system with two 7 7 7 7 This element is not Sean to one spe cific MOBOTIX camera but rather switches between the selected cameras at preset x intervals The sequencer windows are very effective when used in conjunction with status Display Windows on Background Layouts mxcam i E 62 ey g In contrast to the display windows in grid layouts display windows in background layouts have a title bar If the icons in the title bar are yellow you can execute additional com mands for this video source such as opening an instruction DAM E MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 75 396 file the preferred layout a reference image etc See Section 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms for more information on the available functions The Show as Grid Layout Auto Grid Button When you click on this button MxControlCenter shows all video sources in the current layout in an automatically generated grid layout This is especially helpful if you are using a background layout with camera icons and you would like to get a quick overview of all live streams The Start Layout This is the layout loaded automatically after launching MxControlCenter If you need to
76. When using a third party IP camera with a mechanical PTZ feature integrated into the system the pan tilt and zoom features are automatically enabled No further settings are necessary The mechanical PTZ actions for both pan tilt heads as well as connected PTZ dome cameras are controlled in the same manner as the virtual digital PTZ actions of MOBOTIX cameras To connect and display an IP PTZ dome camera in MxControlCenter e Select Video Source gt Add from the menu to open the Add Video Sources dialog e Click on the Camera button to open the Add Camera dialog e Select the appropriate camera Type Address Axis IP camera MxServer channel Merit Li Lin IP camera User name Toshiba IP camera Axis Server channel Panasonic IP camera Password Sony IP camera e Enter the IP address or DNS name port number and login data User name and password and activate SSL if necessary e Click on OK to close the dialog This adds the camera to the Add Video Sources list e Select the camera in the Add Video Sources list and add it to the system as described in Section 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter Step 2 Connect the IP PTZ Dome Camera to MxServer for Recording If you want to store and playback video data from a third party IP PTZ dome camera you need to connect the third party IP camera to an MxServer instance to store the video streaming data in a MOBOTIX file server structure This allows MxControlCen
77. and Open door via camera buttons are active i e not gray they may execute other commands than switching the lights or opening doors respectively Make sure that you have access to the documentation of your system so you know the exact functions of these buttons 3 2 8 Using Image Post Processing on Live Images By default MxControlCenter displays all live video images as they are transmitted by the video source Post processing allows adjusting the color saturation brightness contrast and sharpness settings of live video footage Applying post processing to a live video stream can help when trying to recognize persons for example Post processing means that MxControlCenter can change both live and recorded images Since this constitutes a manipulation of the original image printing such an image will always print two images the original and the adjusted image MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 8 3 9 6 Before you can activate image post processing in MxControlCenter you should change the settings until you get satisfactory results Proceed as follows to activate and adjust image post processing e Make sure that you have selected a video source in the layout yellow frame e Click on the down arrow to the right of the Image post processing button Bh e Move the Image Post Processing dialog to the right
78. and ignore any warning messages e Double click on the FFSSetup exe file in the MxControlCenter program folder usually C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC and follow the instructions e Launch MxControlCenter MxControlCenter shows the New MxFFS volume dialog and offers to create a new layout G k BS New MxFFS volume kol A MxFFS volume with recordings from the camera mx10_10_49_22 10_10_49_22 is added to the list of video sources folder Recording Folders The list is visible inside the Layout Manager Properties Name MxFFS Volume 1 of mx10 10 49 22 Folder Path Path 667926 0 Encryption keys Time range Key Mi 12 Dez 05 00 08 2012 Mi 12 Dez 14 20 33 2012 V Automatically generate new layout MxFFS Volume 1 of mx10 10 49 22 e If you have encrypted the SD card when formatting it click in the area below Keys in the Encryption keys field and enter the encryption password MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxControlCenter to Read SD Cards e Click on OK to see the recordings one for each display window in the new layout e Open the Player sidebar panel and click on one display window to select it e Click on the Play button to play back the recording MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 290 396 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 6 1 REFERENCE The
79. and is archived with the recordings This option is very useful when submitting recorded images as digital evidence for legal proceedings Recording Mode Recording Mode Sets the type of recording Snapshot JPEG images Records triggered events as a series of individual images Events MxPEG clips Records triggered events as a MxPEG video clip Audio can be included when recording event clips Continuous MxPEG stream Continuously records the live video stream at a specified frame rate When the camera triggers an event the camera uses the Event frame rate which can be higher to record more details see Recording Start and Duration below w The standard frame rate for continuous recording is set in the Frame rate drop down next to the Mode dropdown Audio If activated also records the audio channel from the camera Note that this option is not available for Snapshot recording mode Full Image Recording Always records the full image of the camera regardless of the size and format of the live image stream that is being displayed e g Panorama format of a Hemispheric camera This also ensures that the recording always con sists of the full image even though the operator may have used the vPTZ features to zoom into the image in order to examine a specific detail Resolution Controls the size of the recorded video stream or of the JPEG images in Snap Shot recording MOBOTIX AG Security Vis
80. and prevent undesired data abuse already in advance User Dependent and Group Dependent Access Rights It is neither desirable nor practical for every employee to be allowed and required to use the same complete scope of functions of the video system and the management software The tool Users amp Groups in MxCC therefore provides the system adminis trator an extremely powerful and versatile tool for access rights Bo MControicenter 193 File View Layout VideoSource Recording Took Help EB tive EE Recherche M c 31 kbi 5870 09 10 04 Wed 15 09 10 Depending on whether a user or a user group is a system administrator data protection officer security guard a cashier house detective manager works council member policeman or private person the program s user interface can have a different appearance The range extends from the live image recorded by a single camera to the professional desktop with all active MxCC functions and control elements MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com E Users amp Groups Users amp Groups Group Rights Please specify user rights for the groups Live PTZ configuration Post processing Post PTZ configuration Audo Camera signal outputs Sequencer Alarm handlina Scheduled Access Control The basic functions activated for a user can be individualized even further For example th
81. any key on your keyboard while MxControlCenter is the active application MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com e MxControlCenter Dead Man s Switch i Dead Man s Switch wil activate in 14 seconds qe 5 O 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 8 2 Using the Two Man Rule A two man rule mandates that two persons need to be present to execute certain critical system functions A common task where the two man rule is required is the playback of recordings in which the employees of a company are visible This usually necessitates the presence of an employees representative when playing back the recordings Example In order to access the recordings of the camera that monitors the inside of the cash teller booths in a bank the representative of the bank worker s union needs to be present For this purpose a special MxControlCenter workstation has been set up which can only access the recordings of the cameras inside the cash teller booths To implement this scenario the administrator has set up two groups and at least one user per group e Playback Users of this group can access recordings but only if a member of the Union Representatives group has given his her authorization e User Representatives Users of this group can authorize users of the Playback group to access recordings Using the two man rule requires that such a setup has
82. apply e The question mark separates the image file extension jpg and the first parameter e The amp ampersand separates one parameter or parameter value pair from the next parameter or parameter value pair e Parameters and parameter value pairs can appear in any order URL Parameters for Testing CGI Settings Maximum dimension in pixels such as 320x240 320 px previewsize lt h gt x lt v gt horizontally by 240 px vertically e g previewsize 320x240 Frames per second fps with decimal e g framerate lt fps gt amp framerate 1 5 Quality of JPEG encoding integers from 1 to 100 e g quality lt percent gt amp quality 30 noaudio Exclude audio from recordings 5 6 5 Using MxRemotePreview Servers to Access Video Sources By default MxControlCenter retrieves the recorded video via the camera or by directly accessing the corresponding files on a file server If you would like to use MxRemotePreview when getting preview images in MxControlCenter you need to tell MxControlCenter that specific video sources are using preview datainstead of accessing the original recordings Recommended Procedure When Using MxRemotePreview Servers 1 Set the Default Preview Settings to the MxRemotePreview server that is used most often for this installation 2 Use the Access Recordings dialog to instruct MxControlCenter that specific video sources are using preview data when accessing the recordings 3 F
83. ate additional numbered files until the end of the video data in the export list has been reached When exporting large amounts of recorded video data make sure that the individual clips of the exported video data are not larger than the amount of RAM that is available on the target computer If in doubt use the default set ting 128 MB to create smaller clips Subtitle Provides options for generating overlays with additional information such as timestamp camera name custom text and information about gaps in the record ing In addition you can generate a subtitle file that contains precise information on the events MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 44 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter The Export List dialog remembers the format settings you specified for each of the export formats listed in the Export as dropdown Setting the Export Options Optional These options are used in different scenarios to create packages check the data integrity or to apply the virtual PTZ settings Note that the availability of the individual options depends on the selected export format Setting the Video Format above e Apply image post processing incl PTZ This option will export the video while using the same settings as in MxControlCenter You have applied post processing options e g adjusted the image contrast settings Secti
84. automatically return to a certain layout Leave the field empty to deactivate this option e Registered cameras Allows automatically restarting the cameras attached to this MxControlCenter installation or the NTP services on the cameras after launching MxControlCenter set to Nothing by default MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 9 2 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference Behavior amp Store changed image settings in camera Changes of various image settings that are made in the PTZ Controls sidebar panel only take effect when you change the layout of the camera or the camera This option controls if and how changes are saved Never Changes are not saved to the camera Always Changes are always saved without prompting Ask user Before the changes are saved you will be prompted This applies to changes of the following image settings lens selection dual cam eras display mode hemispheric installation setting of preset views and locking unlocking of the PTZ feature Local Recorder size MxControlCenter creates a buffer of this size in the computer memory RAM for each live camera The buffer allows controlling the smoothness of the video streams before showing them Using a Local Recorder size higher than 2 MB per camera when viewing many live streams will use large amounts of RAM on the MxControlCenter computer Sequencer time Allows s
85. available from our technical support team www mobotix com gt Support e Joystick control By default the displayed image or the camera itself is moved to the right when moving the joystick to the right You can use these options to invert the horizontal X direction and vertical Y direction movements MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 3 3 9 6 6 3 The Camera Configuration Dialog The Camera Configuration dialog is the main dialog for configuring the cameras of a MOBOTIX surveillance system Do the following to open this dialog e Selecta video source in a layout yellow frame or in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel e Do one of the following Right click and select Configure from the context menu Select Video Source gt Configure from the menu Click on the Open camera configuration button pi The Camera Configuration Dialog Tabs E Camera Configuration E QRH SV Ow Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audo Events Neteork Messages Time Server Mosnalytcs Name W Amao 9 Recording ado fj Bews H Mode ER Recording Target i Codec f Resson Jal Quality m YM M2 U rorth cote 5 off v n von wu tr EY events lt intemalran gt Pol mees Po vaa 640x480 BET co esstgate y On v n on G wm m2 H events o H
86. be at least 250 cm Tilt angle Tilt of the camera in degrees Ceiling mounting corresponds to 90 wall mounting not recommended corresponds to 0 Light and shadow The quality of the analysis results is dependent on the light ing and environmental conditions to which the camera is exposed You can set various parameters that adapt the camera to different lighting and environmental conditions in order to maintain good quality Three environment settings are pre defined for this purpose Itis also possible to customize the environment setting Artificial light no shadows Select this option if the environment to be ana lyzed is illuminated by artificial light only and there are no shadows cast by the objects to be detected Sparse sunlight blurred shadows Select this option if the environment to be analyzed is subject only to minimal changes in illumination such as sunlight and any shadows cast are of a diffuse nature Heavy sunlight well defined shadows Select this option if the environment to be analyzed is subject to serious changes in illumination such as a large window or harsh shadows arise Custom setup Selecting custom setup opens options and checkboxes that can be used to select and link different illumination situations and shadow detection methods MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring MxAnalytics 213 396 Const
87. been implemented and documented properly Section 4 7 3 implementing a Two Man Rule e Start MxControlCenter e In the Login as dialog select the user that can access the recordings after autho rization gary Playback in the example and enter the corresponding password e Switch to a layout that shows the camera with the recordings you would like to see e Click on the Player button e MxControlCenter shows the Two Man Rule dialog The user that can authorize this action selects his user name mike Union Representatives in the example and enters the corresponding password User gary can now search the video for interesting scenes and export them if a case of fraud has been discovered for example MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Additional User Functions MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 5 2 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The previous chapter has shown how to use MxControlCenter in a video surveillance installation In this chapter you will learn how to configure MxControlCenter and MOBOTIX cameras so that you can get a video surveillance system up and running You will learn how to set up layouts how to configure live video surveillance how to adjust the user
88. by MxServer The converted video streaming data can be read into MxControlCenter later as offline playback or used for post video motion detection If no Event Recording path is defined for the analog camera MxControlCenter will only show the live video coming directly from MxServer or the third party video server This section describes two scenarios for integrating analog PTZ camerasin MxControlCenter A Using MxServer to digitize the video stream B Using a third party video server to digitize the video stream Both scenarios support live streaming as M JPEG video in MxControlCenter In the first scenario an MxServer computer digitizes the analog video signals using a video grabber card For this scenario to work you will need an MxServer installed and configured with an IDS Falcon QuattroPro Pro card and a network interface LAN WAN connection to the MxControlCenter client In the second scenario a third party video server such as an Axis Video Server digitizes the analog video signals Note that these scenarios do not support audio Regardless of the scenario used MxServer can also record the digitized video as M JPEG video in the MOBOTIX file server structure Scenario AA Integrating an Analog PTZ Camera Using MxServer Integrating analog cameras requires an intermediary step in which the analog video data is converted to a digital format that is compatible with MxControlCenter MxPEG or M JPEG i r Cam Control serial
89. by entering the camera s address as in the example below https mycamera dyndns org 8001 Access Data Information Display PTZ Rotor MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks 261 396 5 4 Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks Besides MOBOTIX cameras you can also connect third party IP or analog cameras for example Axis IP cameras Bosch AutoDome Siemens Speed Dome to MxControlCenter Some camera models feature motorized pan tilt units and zoom lenses that can be con trolled from within MxControlCenter using a joystick or the PTZ Controls sidebar panel If a MOBOTIX camera is mounted on a pan tilt head and configured accordingly its pan and tilt features can also be controlled from an MxControlCenter computer In the remaining parts of this section we are going to describe the following scenarios e Section 5 4 1 Using MOBOTIX Cameras with Pan Tilt Heads This standard scenario describes how to set up a MOBOTIX camera with one of several supported rotor head protocols including notes of using PelcoD rotor heads e Section 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras This scenario describes how to connect an IP PTZ dome camera directly in MxControlCenter set up for M JPEG Live Streaming and PTZ controls This includes setting up MxServer for continuous M JPEG recording in th
90. called MkPEG DirectShow Codec_ Setup exe where is the codec version e Obtain the MxPEG DirectShow Codec _ Setup exe installation file Download the installation file from the MOBOTIX website and save the file on your computer for example on the Desktop If you have received installation media CD DVD USB stick find the folder of the installation file e Quit Windows Media Player if the application is running e Launch the MxPEG DirectShow Codec_ Setup exe installation file e Follow the instructions of the installation wizard Make sure that you are keeping the defaults as proposed by the wizard Once the codec is installed you can double click on any mxg file to play it back in Windows Media Player 4 1 5 Configuring a Common Time Server Setting a common time base and the corresponding synchronization mechanisms is one of the most critical tasks that you need to accomplish when setting up your video surveil lance system Since no computer can measure time with absolute perfection you should make sure that the following prerequisites are fulfilled e All components of the MxControlCenter video management system cameras work stations file servers and NAS systems are using the same fime server MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Getting Started 155 396 e The time server should be an NTP Network Time Protocol time server
91. camera to West gate Player Open the camera s Properties of dialog doing one of the following Right click on a camera in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select Properties from the context menu Right click on a camera in any layout and select Properties from the context menu Open the Display tab From the Preferred Alarm Layout list select the West gate Player layout Click on OK to close the Properties of dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 04 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Setting the Instruction File for the Camera To set the instruction file e Open the camera s Properties of dialog doing one of the following Right click on a camera in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select Properties from the context menu Right click on a camera in any layout and select Properties from the context menu e Open the Display tab e SelectthedesiredInstructionfile e g D Instructions EmergencyProcedures txt or enter a URL e g http webserver Instructions as required Certain characters in the URL need to be percent encoded also called URL encoded e g a space character would be 20 For more information on percent encoded characters see the Percent encoding topic on en wikipedia org Configuring the Win
92. can view and export these video clips later E My Recordings on by dragging the clip to your computer s desktop or any other folder see Section 3 5 11 Playing Back Recordings from the Local Archive and Section 3 6 Saving Printing and Exporting Switching layouts while the Live recording button is activated will stop the recording Make sure that you click again on the Live recording button to resume recording MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 94 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Soo 3 3 Display Modes of the Application Window The layouts of the display area t gt Sql red frame in figure show the video sources usually cameras that are displayed using the size defined by the display windows When maximizing the applica tion on the computer monitor you can easily see that the size of the display windowsis adjusted z J automatically by switching back and forth between the predefined display window sizes Quarter PDA PDA CIF VGA Mega Example Consider the screenshot of a Quad layout with four VGA display windows 640x480 pixels in the figure above If you make the application window smaller and MxControlCenter cannot display the four VGA windows any more it will automatically reduce the display windows to CIF size 320x240 pixels 3 3 1 Scaling and Display Commands The commands and option
93. codec 6 3 3 The Exposure Tab This tab shows any defined exposure windows with a thin green border Click on an exposure window to activate it and to show its coordinates in the Frame Details group see below This tab contains the following sections E Camera Configuration et B eBBWSE S OC fw Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audo Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytics Sensor Control Left Sensor _ Exposure Time Exp program O Standard 2 Min exp tme 1 8000 sec X Max exp tme 1 8 sec Exposure Hode Virtual PTZ Exposure Windows Quarter O j Show windows Off X g3 oY ETEN Weight 100 v w Balance Tota Brightness 40 2 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 317 396 This tab of the Camera Configuration allows selecting only one video source On dual lens camera models the right sensor is the default image sensor The options of the Exposure Windows Weights and Frame Details sections are only available if Exposure Mode has been set to Recording Sensor Control GD These buttons allow selecting the lens image sensor that the camera currently uses only available on Dual camera models Right Uses the right image sensor of the camera default Left Uses the left image sensor of the camera Both Creates a double width ima
94. com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 2 05 3 Q 6 Windows Vista Open the Windows Control Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel In the Security section click on Allow a program through Windows Firewall Click on Continue if the system asks for your permission In the Windows Firewall Settings dialog click on the Exceptions tab and then on the Add port button In the Add a Port dialog enter a descriptive name e g MxCC Alarm Handling Port and the port number 31754 Make sure that the TCP option is activated and click on OK Close all open Firewall related dialogs and the Control Panel Windows 7 Open the Windows Control Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Click on System and Security and then on Windows Firewall In the left panel click on Advanced settings Enter an administration password or allow this action if the system prompts you to do so In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog click on Inbound Rules in the left panel then click on New Rule in the right panel In the New Inbound Rule Wizard select the Rule type and click on Next Select the TCP option enter 31754 as in the example in the Specific local ports field and click on Next Select the Allow the connection option and click on Next If this is not a mobile computer you should deactivate the Public checkbox for security reasons Click on Next Enter a descriptive name for t
95. control Soe ay OSE Fa i Comer Right v A l e Make sure that the PTZ Controls sidebar panel area corrected l A is visible or use the joystick attached to the E lt gt 20 computer Al y l W e Right click on the camera in the layout PTZ Views In Camera e Select Properties from the context menu ixzoom centr MME e Move the Properties dialog so you can see the a 2 dialog the PTZ Controls sidebar panel and the CEs camera image e In the Properties dialog click on the PTZ Rotor tab e Zoom into the image using the slider of the PTZ Controls MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 91 3 9 6 e Find the setting that is best for you PTZ In Camera Activate deactivate the two Joystick control Joystick contro 7 Invert horizontal direction AN options as required see figure to the right J Invert vertical direction gt A Click on Apply to test the settings do not close the dialog yet lt O Move the joystick and check if the joystick works as you need it If this is not the 4 case repeat the last two steps until you have found your setting V e Once you have found the setting that is best for you click on OK to close the Properties dialog e Repeat the process for all other cameras Using the Preset Views Every one of the buttons 1 through 15 can be used to save and open a specific position and
96. date time and event type Selected event Click on any eventin the search results panel to select it MxControlCenter highlights the event with a dotted frame Player panel This panel shows the recorded video stream of the event and allows setting export ranges MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Property bar Predefined event searches Selected video doble click to open event in Player window Search results Player window Player controls MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 09 02 12 exit cet 07 23 45 v mozi v craw Pe e Player controls Click on any event to select it then click on any of the buttons in the Player sidebar panel to start playing back the contents of the clip Using Predefined Event Searches Simply click on one of the searches in the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel to open it MxControlCenter automatically searches all events recorded by the selected cameras during the specified period of time For example your installation could have the following predefined event searches e Last 30 minutes e Last night e Last week If you have installed MxControlCenter for the first time you will not see any predefined event searches To find out how to create new event searches and how to customize them see Creating New Event Searches further down Since MxControlCenter event searches c
97. dialog which lets you automatically youhave chosen to add 2 video source s create a new Grid Layout with the selected cenerote new grid layout for selected video sources cameras or add the cameras without creating None EES a new layout Only add video sources to system do not create layout If you choose to create a new layout highly recommended you should enter a suitable name e g Entrance East before clicking on OK ox cme A layout can display the video streams from multiple video sources either in a Grid Layout or a Background Layout layout When using a background layout you can show the video sources either as a video window or an icon Grouped layouts provide a structured tree view Automatically Generated Layout in MxControlCenter E MxcontrotCenter Inside Player File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Help BBO WB OG OO G gas8laeeo c3 o Rs00 A 4 LAYOUTS E Overview Outside B main Entrance H west gate B Parting H Garage Entrance E Command Sin TEST H Gate Guard B auto crid B usd vea 4 go Overview Inside B Receoton H elevators B beck Entrance D outside Player B Inside Player B az B Gateway Event Search H Event Search cips 1 a VIDEO SOURCES Cameras rw Player PTZ Controls i MControlCenter Fis 53 kbg 842 12 52 38 Fri 25 02 11 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 6
98. directly from MxControlCenter a E on C E a es MxControlCenter provides many ways to customize its user interface If you cannot find some of the user interface elements described in the following you should read Section 4 4 Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface or ask your system administrator MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 68 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 1 2 MxControlCenter Toolbar Buttons As shown in the overview of the MxControlCenter main window Section 3 1 Elements of the Application Window the toolbar provides quick access to the most important functions of the application Note that the following table shows all buttons Depending on your user rights however you may not see all of these buttons Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights Toolbar Button Name Remark See Tw Only active if configuration has Save MxCC configuration 34 9 2 Also switches the contents of the Activate Layout Manager 4 2 Activate Layout or Camera MxControlCenter stores the last 3 2 4 sequencer selection of the dropdown 4 3 3 Available if the video source of Activate Player mode the selected display window has 3 5 2 recorded at least one event Provides access to the record Open Video Search ings of all cameras for exporting via the export list Available if the alarm list has Show Ala
99. do the following e Play a sound after x minutes of inactivity minimum interval is two minutes e Optionally send an e mail if MxControlCenter did not detect any interaction after the specified interval If the dead man s switch has been activated the MxControlCenter toolbar shows the blue dead man s switch icon see adjacent figure Make sure that you have access to the documentation of your system so you know how long the dead man s switch interval actually is For information on how to activate the dead man s switch and the configuration options Section 4 8 8 Configuring the Dead Man s Switch How the Dead Man s Switch Works e ifthe application cannot detect any user interaction mouse clicks or keyboard entries the blue button starts blinking red 30 seconds before the dead man s switch interval expires e lf still no User interaction is detected within the next 10 seconds MxControlCenter shows an additional countdown dialog during the last 20 seconds of the interval e Ifthe interval has expired without detecting any user interaction MxControlCenter plays a warning sound If this has been configured MxControlCenter also sends an e mail to one or more e mail addresses How to Reset the Dead Man s Switch You can reset the dead man s switch using one of these methods e Click on the red or blue button in the toolbar e Click anywhere within the application window of MxControlCenter e Press
100. end shadow Heavy sunlight wel defined shadows Show Getecton areas J Box Track Halo Transparency White Yelow Gay 7 D Osaa Une color Textcoler Une IDs Counter valves s Onandhighigmonconang v Bue v White 7 Stow Mri Maxum Legend J 0 gt MON Please refer to Section 4 6 1 Activating Setting Process Parameters and Setting Up Storage for descriptions of the individual areas MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 3 3 3 3 Q 6 The Visual Configuration Sub Tab E Comers Configuration fs for H e BWSE V OC Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audo Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytcs Name Basc Configuration Visual Configuration oio Configure Detection area Cdject size Counting ines Save reference image J MM mm ou si 24 Left Tep Right Bottom Ignore Area Line ID Name Tite East Tite West r End ok cane teen Please refer to Section 4 6 1 Activating Setting Process Parameters and Setting Up Storage for descriptions of the individual areas MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 3 4 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 4 MxControlCenter Start Parameters It is possible to use various start parameters when launching MxControlCenter
101. feature as outlined in Section 3 8 2 Using the Two Man Rule MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 222 3 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 7 4 Requiring Users to Enter a Reason for an Action In some jurisdictions users are required to enter a reason for exporting recordings for example You can implement this requirement by setting the Reason user right for the corresponding function Example The guards at the MxControlCenter workstation of the gate members of the Guards group can work with the system but when exporting recordings they need to enter a reason MxControlCenter logs the reason in the action log that is checked regularly by a supervisor To implement this scenario you need to set the Export right of the Guards group to Reason e Select Tools gt Users amp groups in the menu and activate the Group Rights tab e For the Guards group set the Export dropdown in the Playback Export amp Printing section to Reason e Click on OK to close the dialog The guards will now have to enter a reason every time they are exporting video and MxControlCenter automatically logs the reason in the Action Log To view the contents of the action log proceed as outlined in Section 4 8 6 Configuring and Monitoring the Action Log 4 8 Security Considerations When setting up a video surveillance system you should also take every precaution t
102. for grouping your hardware components e g according to location storage MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 3 8 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline target etc practice has shown that it is most efficient to group the devices according to their function and to assign IP address ranges accordingly Note that it is not advisable to use a DHCP server to automatically assign IP addresses but to always assign IP addresses manually The following table shows an example of an IP address grouping scheme Hardware Group IP Address Range Subnet Router 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 MxCC workstations 192 168 1 10 to 30 255 255 255 0 Cameras 192 168 1 100 10199 255 255 255 0 File servers NAS 192 168 1 240 to 250 255 255 255 0 Note that there are enough spare IP addresses to add more cameras or other devices later on e g 192 168 1 200 to 192 168 1 239 for cameras A 2 2 Naming Labeling of All Components After having defined the hardware groups it is recommended to assign names to the components and to label them accordingly In order to identify the cameras easily in MxControlCenter and to mount them at the proper locations later on the names and the labels should reflect these locations Finding suitable names for the other components is not as critical and you are therefore more flexible For small projects it may be sufficien
103. for longer periods of time This may fill the hard drive of the MxControlCenter workstation MxControlCenter does not create the MxControlCenter 1oglog file automatically Note that MxControlCenter overwrites the log file when restarting When trying to troubleshoot document a program malfunction make sure the appli cation does not restart automatically default Create a new desktop link to start the program without automatic restarts by adding NoWatchdog 0 as a parameter to the Target text field of the link e g C Program Files Mobotix MxCC MxCC exe NoWatchdog 0 MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 70 396 MXxCc User Manual MOBOTIX Glossary C MOBOTIX GLOSSARY 2G Second generation of wireless telephone technology see GSM 2G 3G Third generation of wireless telephone technology see UMTS 3G ActiveX Control element on Windows computers which can also be used in other programs including Windows Internet Explorer to run special tasks The MxPEG ActiveX control provides a mecha nism for other applications to play the video and audio data generated by MOBOTIX cameras Arming Refers to the process of activating an alarm system so that specific events
104. group oriented approach in which the groups have specific privileges and each user is assigned to one of the groups For your convenience MxControlCenter comes with a default group structure that you can adjust to the requirements of the cur rent surveillance system 4 7 1 Creating and Editing Groups and Users To create new groups and users or to edit existing ones click on Tools gt Users amp Groups in the menu and activate the Users amp Groups tab Users amp Groups AA Users amp Groups Group Rights Create users and groups and enter details Name Group Settings On Group name Admins Users 3 Comment Administrators have full access to ALL Guards Gi functions and configuration options of the MxCC video surveillance system 4 2 oT nee e To create a user click on a group then click on the Add User button Admins group is selected in this dialog e Fill in the details for the new user e When creating a user remember to click on the Change Password button and assign a password e Tocreate a group click on the Add Group but ton and fill in the details User Settings Login name user Full name User Change Password Comment Member of the Users group MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Users Groups and Group Rights 21 9 396 User Login If one or more users have been created in the Users amp Groups ts
105. gt Titl down up Moved image area virtual PTZ Pan left right O aD When looking at the images from an M24M for example the default display mode Full Image always shows the entire image as it is delivered by the image sensor 2 Once you zoom into the image the camera shows only a section of the image the Image Area If the image has been zoomed you can virtually pan tilt the zoomed image area within the borders of the full image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 84 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Different Display Modes for Different Cameras MOBOTIX cameras nowadays comprise a whole range of cameras for various purposes Depending on the underlying construction principles of the cameras the cameras have different display modes e Regular cameras in general these cameras have lenses with focal lengths gt 32 mm Display Modes of Regular Cameras below e Cameras with L22 lens These cameras only have L22 lenses installed Display Modes of Cameras with L22 Lens below e Hemispheric cameras with L11 lens These cameras have only L11 lenses installed Display Modes of Hemispheric Cameras with L11 Lens below Display Modes of Regular Cameras Regular cameras such as the M12D D12D M24M D24M etc basically offer the fol lowing display modes see figure below
106. gt Users and Passwords e Create at least one user per group and assign user names as in the figure below fA MOBOTIX Q24 mx10 8 85 Open Group Access Control Lists to manage the group definitions and to set the group access rights Caution Make sure to store user names and passwords in a safe place There is absolutely no back door into the camera without the administrator s login Passwords have changed If you are prompted for a password remember to enter the new password Y bg Set X Factory Restore Close e Click on Set to apply the changes Note that the camera will ask you for the user name and password of an admin user e g andrew in the example Setting the Language and Start Page e Click on Page Administration gt Language and Start Page e Select the start page set the language and click on Set Setting the Ethernet Interface e Click on Network Setup gt Ethernet Interface e Deactivate BOOTP DHCP e Enter the Domain as required e Disable Zeroconf if this is required MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 46 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline e Click on Set Setting Up Camera Storage In this section you will set up the camera to use one file server NAS or the microSD card and specify the necessary details if you want to use a different storage target later on you can set this whe
107. involve any recoding and hence requires v File Server Structure AVI MPEG4 Windows XP and newer Quick motion Custom the least amount of time to export It is recommended to use this profile when you need to keep the files in their original format for example to preserve evidence for law enforcement purposes Using the file server structure also allows checking the integrity of the recording if the recordings are signed see Section 3 5 12 Checking the Data Integrity of Recordings e MxPEG MOBOTIX format for playback in MxControlCenter MxEasy and in Windows Media Player after installing the MxPEG DirectShow codec see Section 4 1 4 installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG DirectShow Codec Files in MxPEG format also include the audio data recorded by the camera if this had been activated at the time of recording MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Saving Printing and Exporting 143 396 AVI MPEG4 Creates an avT file for Windows systems The audio track is included if audio recording had been activated for the camera Time lapse Allows the export of recordings as a time lapse which is interesting for the documentation of construction progress for example Custom Allows using different codecs for special purposes For more information on this topic Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage Selecting the Format Settings In the Export
108. logged in MxControlCenter s action log see Section 4 7 4 Requiring Users to Enter a Reason for an Action e Authorize Allows implementing a two man rule where specific actions can only be executed if two persons are present see Section 4 7 3 Implementing a Two Man Rule Click on OK to close the dialog 4 7 3 Implementing a Two Man Rule A two man rule mandates that two persons need to be present to execute certain critical system functions A common task where the two man rule is required is the playback of recordings in which the employees of a company are visible This usually necessitates the presence of an employees representative when playing back the recordings MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Users Groups and Group Rights 2 21 3 96 Example In order to access the recordings of the camera that monitors the inside of the cash teller booths in a bank the representative of the bank worker s union needs to be present For this purpose a special MxControlCenter workstation has been set up which can only access the recordings of the cameras inside the cash teller booths To implement this scenario you need to set up two additional groups and at least one user per group e Playback Users of this group can access recordings but only if a member of the Union Representatives group has given his her authorization e Union Repre
109. making video searches nearly impossible MxRemotePreview helps to overcome this problem by reducing recoding the image size quality and other parameters on the fly without changing the stored recordings Instead of getting the images via the camera or directly from the file server MxControlCenter gets the recoded video sequences from the MxRemotePreview server to accelerate image retrieval How MxRemotePreview Works MOBOTIX camera Internet Bupiozay S oe MxRemotePreview yA server lt S ceq DSL router MxControlCenter sends an HTTP request to the web server which calls MxRemotePreview for specific file types MxRemotePreview reads the original files from the file server recodes the video contents on the fly as specified in the HTTP request and returns the transformed data back to the MxControlCenter computer This allows MxControlCenter to receive the data fast enough to build an event list and to play back the video sequences MxRemotePreview runs as a CGI module within a dedicated web server Apache or Microsoft Internet Information Server on a Windows or Linux machine The cameras can store the recordings on the same machine or on a different file server NAS system If MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxControlCenter computer 2 80 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features the recordings are available on a di
110. of cameras into one layout Using Overview Layouts with Live Cameras Using background layouts as overview lay as outs to present a few important live cameras ai rane on is one approach that is used quite offen in e existing systems a aE Jie a From these layouts the operators can branch out to the other layouts using either the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator side bar panel or layout buttons as described in Section 4 3 2 Configuring Layout Selection Using Overview Layouts with Status Icons Status icons on the other hand provide a different type of overview These icons allow monitoring the status of the cameras and whether or not somebody is currently watching a camera or not for an explana tion of this feature see Ofher Elements in Section 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts Note that double clicking on an icon can open an extra floating window with the video stream of that camera see Section 4 3 5 Configuring Extra Windows ia In addition you can also use focus windows to show the live video streams of the status icons you just clicked on see Status Icons and Focus Windows in Section 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 179 396 Live Layouts and Player Layouts When planing your layout structure one approach would be t
111. of the camera is limited full image recording reduces the attainable data rate of the live image stream which may drop by about 10 to 30 percent In order to minimize the effects on the live image stream it is recommended to reduce the frame rate for storage as much as possible Recording Start and Duration O Some of these parameters vary depending on which recording mode has been set see Recording Mode above e Snapshot JPEG images Start Trigger Sets the events which trigger a recording Image Interval Sets the time span between each of the pre alarm and post alarm images that are recorded Values can be entered from zero to a maximum of 600 000 ms where 250 ms 1 4 s 1000 ms 1 s 60 000 ms 1 min 600 000 ms 10 min Pre Alarm images Number of images recorded before the event Post Alarm images Number of images recorded after the event e Events MxPEG clip Start Trigger Sets the events which trigger a recording Event frame rate Frame rate for recording Time before Period of time recorded before the event MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 3 2 3 3 96 Time after Period of time recorded after the event e Continuous MxPEG stream Frame rate Standard frame rate for continuous recording Start Trigger Sets the events which trigger a recording wi
112. of the time Timezone and Local Time a Timezone Europe v Berlin Local Ge December 5 2012 10 57 23 SESS cameras Time Servers for Standard Cameras Mote Selecting a camera makes it a master FNQ m camera Cameras with attached MOBOTIX hd am Note The camera wil automatically use a Moe Te amers inaaianei such a box is attached The settings described below are applied for all of the cameras selected in the dialog box s camera list Select multiple cameras in the list using Shift click or Ctrl click Time Zone And Local Time Here you can synchronize the time between computer and camera Select the time zone and click on Set time on cameras The manual time set takes effect immediately whereas the time synchronization with one or multiple time servers with defined time differences can take up to one hour Time Servers for Standard Cameras 2 You can synchronize the cameras selected with up to three time servers to ensure all cameras are running in a synchronized manner This ensures that all cameras have the MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 3 2 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference same system time regardless of whether or not there is a time source if you set up more than one time server External time servers or other cameras can be used as time servers A red label is used to indicate if one
113. of these cameras has an MX GPS Box The GPS Box is then used as a reliable timer for the camera connected to it Time Servers for Master Cameras Cameras used as timeservers for standard cameras are master cameras Specifying one or more time servers for the master cameras increases the accuracy of the time synchronization If you select one or more MOBOTIX cameras as Time Servers for Standard Cameras these cameras automatically become master cameras Please note that when applying the settings via OK or Apply together with the standard cameras using the master cameras as time servers these master cameras must also be selected in the camera list on the left 6 3 9 The MxAnalytics Tab Some MOBOTIX cameras allow image analysis The MxAnalytics analysis tool is available for this purpose Use the MxAnalytics tab structured in the sub tabs Basic Configuration and Visual Configuration to configure the settings and define the detection areas and counting lines The Basic Configuration Sub Tab E Camera Configuration o fea H QHD V CO amp prere Overview Image Settings Expomre Recording Audo Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytcs nare a Bese Configuraten Visual Configuration pio General 3 mm arming Enable v Setup Mx miybcs storage O ma eao O e Low 4ight sugeressor 90 hex so aam D 7N Detection Mountrg heght Oem Tit angle a gt Ught
114. one or more MxControlCenter computers MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 312 396 MxCC User Manual Reference When working with the Camera Configuration dialog the following applies e Changes to the camera settings are automatically stored in the camera s when you click on Apply or OK e When making changes without saving them MxControlCenter will remind you to store the changes when you are switching tabs or closing the dialog 6 3 1 The Overview Tab This tab shows an overview of the most important settings for all cameras that are part of this MxControlCenter installation The first column lists the video sources and allows changing access information similar to the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section in the Navigator sidebar panel Click on a camera to see a preview window and more detailed information at the bottom of the dialog Bo Comers Configuration YH e HGE S O amp Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audio Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytcs Ill name W Arming EY Recording amp audo G as f events H Mode H RewrdngTerget E Codec E Reston JEI Quaity m WM M2 U amp Events M noth cate of von v On SB wuc H Events lt internal Ram gt fe mees E vea 640x480 EBT 60 east gare v On on von 6 wm wea u Hi Events m H nes 20 0 32 148 Fj MPEG Sl vca 640x480 DEl 6
115. open at the receiving computer The MxControlCenter users need to acknowledge this message Example http 192 168 1 204 31667 showInAlarmWindow 10 3 0 31 amp showInExtraWindow 10 3 0 31 amp showMessage Caution 20 20door 20is 200pen For a complete list of MxControlCenter remote control commands see table in Section 6 1 5 The Remote Control Tab MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 190 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 4 Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface This section examines how you can adapt the MxControlCenter user interface to the requirements of the security system Many of these settings are attached to group rights as set in the Users amp Groups dialog Tools gt Users amp groups in the menu see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights 4 4 1 Configuring the Scaling and Display Functions The scaling and display functions of MxControlCenter are controlling how the application shows video sources when scaling the entire application or individual display windows see Section 3 3 1 Scaling and Display Commands Make sure that you are using the interpolation method that is best suited to the number of cameras to be displayed and to the computer hardware see Setting the Interpolation Method for Free Scaling in Section 4 2 5 More Options When Editing Layouts Preventing U
116. or left Settings of the MxControlCenter application window e Check the Activate checkbox e Move the sliders up and down to see how the image of the selected video source changes The Image Post Processing dialog stays on your desktop until you close it so you can try to change the settings for other video sources too Simply select a different video source and follow the steps above until you are satisfied with the results If you want to undo your changes click on the Default button to reset the values The image post processing settings are per video source settings i e the settings are stored separately for each video source This allows applying different settings for different video sources Once you have defined the desired settings you can click on the Image post processing button to activate or deactivate post processing for the selected video source in a layout EDs yellow frame Post processing does notchange the actual video data delivered by the video source live or recorded it only changes the way MxControlCenter displays the video From a technical point of view the virtual PTZ features of MOBOTIX cameras including distortion correction for wide angle lenses are also post processing features Since these features are quite complex they are examined in detail in Section 3 2 9 Using the Virtual PTZ Functions on Live Images MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany
117. or video source for which an alarm was triggered most recently If you add several live alarm windows to a layout the first alarm window always shows the live stream of the camera with the most recent alarm and the last alarm window shows the live stream of the camera with the nth alarm Upon a new alarm the live streams of all other cameras are pushed back by one window If you have five alarm windows in one layout for example you will always see the live streams of the last five cameras that have triggered an alarm Note that you also need to activate the Alarm List feature on the Tools gt Options gt Alarm Handling tab Live alarm windows in background layouts have a gray title bar Sequencer window This display window is used to display the content of all elements in the current layout in alternating order For example you can create a layout in which the display of a camero s live image alternates in a large window You can define a global time interval for the sequencer window under Tools gt Options gt General gt Behavior gt Sequencer time Sequencer windows in background layouts have a gray title bar Focus window This display window always shows the images of the last live window or status icon back ground layouts only you clicked on Click on a different camera s live win dow to show the live stream of that camera in the focus window A typical use of this element is one focus window in the center with
118. port in Tools gt Options gt Alarm Handling gt Alarm Messages in MxControlCenter B 2 Using the MxControlCenter Error Log If directed by MOBOTIX Support personnel to activate MxControlCenter s debug error log perform the following steps e Make sure that MxControlCenter is not running on the system e Depending on the Windows version in use open the following folder Windows XP SUSERPROFILE S Local Settings Application Data MOBOTIX MxControlCenter and create an empty file named MxControlCenter log Windows Vista LOCALAPPDATA Mobotix MxControlCenter and create an empty file named MxControlCenter log Windows 7 LOCALAPPDATAS Mobotix MxControlCenter and create an empty file named MxControlCenter log e Start MxControlCenter and attempt to perform the steps needed to reproduce the error s e Let MxControlCenter run until the error or performance problem occurs then quit MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 367 396 3 6 8 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Troubleshooting e f you are only doing a one time documentation of a particular error move the MxControlCenter 1og file to a different location otherwise copy the file e Open the file in Notepad for further analysis or send the file to MOBOTIX Support Do not leave the MxControlCenter error log activated
119. products MOBOTIX cameras have been used to capture all images that appear in this manual Manufacturer MOBOTIX AG Kaiserstrasse 67722 Langmeil Germany Phone 49 6302 9816 103 Fax 49 6302 9816 190 www mobotix com sales mobotix com Registration Office Kaiserslautern Local Court Registration Number HRB 3724 Tax Office Worms Kirchheimbolanden Germany Tax Code 44 676 0700 4 VAT ID DE202203501 You can find the latest version of this and other documents e g declarations of conformity at www mobotix com in the Support section CE Technical specifications subject to change without notice MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Z MxCC User Manual Jh A Security Vision Systems MOBOTIX Ultra fast Live Display 40 smooth video streams CIF MxControlCenter Professional Video Management Dual Screen Free camera definition on 2nd screen Approx 90 cameras Field Tested during World Cup at Kaiserslautern stadium Free Software Download www mobotix com Floor Plans Layout editor with indiv floor plans Alarm time or image Alarm Event list sorted by camera or by time Search Search possible even while recording Event Search Synchronized search on several cameras Image improvement Post Processing Zoom contrast distortion correction e Proven worldwide in the most demanding video applications A ae
120. recordings To manually download the public key e Click on the Open camera in browser button in MxControlCenter e Click on the Admin Menu button in the camera s browser interface you most likely need to enter a user name and password e Inthe Administration Overview dialog click on the Web Server link Network Setup section e In the HTTPS Settings section click on the Download button next to Download X 509 certificate e Store the file as cert pem in the root directory of the file server path that is used by this particular camera If several cameras are using the same file server make sure to use the correct path factory IP address with underscore characters You can now use the MxControlCenter data integrity check on file server paths that have been added as video sources and that are not attached to any camera Testing the Digital Signature To test the digital signature proceed as described in Running the Data Integrity Check of Section 3 5 12 Checking the Data Integrity of Recordings MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Security Considerations 231 396 MxControlCenter will show a separate dialog to warn you if the certificate is invalid generated or self certified 4 8 6 Configuring and Monitoring the Action Log MxControlCenter s action log records all actions performed by the application and the cameras in an encrypted f
121. required remote control ports can be opened from external computers This usually requires that you have administra tor privileges on the computer If you are using a different firewall application you may have to manually configure the firewall to allow accessing these ports from other computers Step 2 Get a List of Remote Control Commands To get such a list do the following e Open a web browser on the same computer that is running MxControlCenter e Enter the IP address the port and the command in the browser address bar as in the example below see also Step 1 Activate and Configure the Remote Control Port in MxControlCenter http 127 0 0 1 31667 e Press the RETURN key The browser window should now show a list of the available commands see List of Remote Control Commands in Section 6 1 5 The Remote Control Tab Step 3 Test the Remote Control To test the remote control function using the beep command do the following e Open a web browser on the same computer that is running MxControlCenter e Enter the IP address the port and the command in the browser address bar as in the example below http 127 0 0 1 31667 beep e Press the RETURN key If the test is successful these things will happen e The computer plays the system sound or the sound you specified when configuring the remote control functions e The browser window shows the text OK on an otherwise blank window e
122. sales mobotix com Solutions to Common Issues 365 396 B 1 2 File Server NAS Issues Camera does not store images video streams on file server NAS Possible Cause Firewall blocks network traffic Solution Correct firewall settings Check if file server share is accessible from workstation Access to stored recordings video searches is slow MxCC is set to access record ings via the camera s Directly access file server NAS share using Access Recordings dialog Direct file server path set to mapped network drive but drive is missing after next login Make sure that mapped network drive is reconnected on next login and that user has proper access rights File server NAS cannot handle load of attached cameras Add more file servers NAS to distribute load more evenly Camera cannot write to file server NAS after some time Storage capacity reached Set or reduce storage limits max MB for camera File server NAS down Check restore file server NAS MxCC cannot find file server path of specified camera MxCC cannot find file server path Check if you can access file server path in Windows Explorer MxCC cannot read from file server path Check if MxCC has read access to file server path Camera does not store on file server NAS Check camera system mes sages and Storage on External File Server dialog Camera only stores single JPEG i
123. same or different sizes Think of a three story parking deck and the security staff that are monitoring the decks The security staff constantly monitors the cameras as MxControlCenter cycles through the three grid layouts Deck 1 Deck 2 and Deck 3 Using the corresponding layout buttons the security staff can manually select one of the three layouts e Background These layouts are typically used to show the camera images or camera fas icons on a floor or site plan Buttons and other links allow switching from one layout to the next and back MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 72 39 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Think of a soccer stadium and its surroundings parking lots roads etc e The control room is staffed with three officers who are watching the live images on different workstations with dual monitors as shown above in this case two instances of MxControlCenter are running concurrently on one computer e The left monitor of each workstation shows an overview map of a part of the soc cer stadium The command buttons in the left monitor allow switching the camera windows at the bottom of the left monitor e The right monitor allows switching between the different layouts that show a specific group of cameras in a grid layout e The head of the surveillance team has a similar setup but the left monitor shows a map of an entire sta
124. should be connected to its own MxServer computer Detailed information on connecting analog cameras and configuring MxServer can be found in the PDF documentation that is installed with MxServer Downloading and Installing MxServer 1 Download the correct MST Windows Installer file for your hardware platform from www mobotix com Support gt Software Downloads The P3 release is optimized for Pentium 3 with SSEI and AMD machines The P4 release is optimized for Pentium 4 machines with SSEII 2 Double click on the MxServer lt version gt Px msi file to start the Windows installer 3 Follow the instructions of the setup wizard Find more documentation on the system in the PDF documentation that is installed with MxServer MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 274 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Running and Configuring MxServer Once MxServer has been installed properly you can start it by double clicking on the MxServer exe file When launching MxServer for the first time Windows shows a message asking you whether or not to block the application Make sure that you click on Unblock so that MxServer can function properly MxServer shows its application window SS MxServer 1 3 11 File ge Channels T 0 0 0 0 80 configure To configure MxServer e Click on File gt Configure in the MxServer menu MxServer starts a
125. sound when MxControlCenter detects an alarm File Plays back the selected audio file wav when MxControlCenter detects an alarm Deadtime Suspends the playback of sounds for the specified period of time after MxControlCenter has played back a sound for an alarm Repeat every Repeats the selected sound at the specified interval until the user acknowledges the alarm in the alarm list Until acknowledging Select one of the values Any alarm Most recent alarm or Every alarm to specify which alarm image s need to be acknowledged in order to stop repeating the sound Repeat for at most Sets the maximum number of seconds during which MxControlCenter repeats the sound Example e Repeat every 3 seconds e Repeat for at most 12 seconds MxControlCenter repeats the sound for a total of five times once upon detecting the alarm and after that every three seconds for the next twelve seconds MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 3 0 3 Q 6 6 1 5 The Remote Control Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options General Connection Defaults View Alam Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log Remote Control Activate listen for TCP IP messages Network Message Log 2 No configuration loaded OK Remote Control e Activate listen for TCP IP messages Activates the server part of Mx
126. tab In the Alarm Messages group activate the Activate alarm message server checkbox and configure alarm messages accordingly see Setting Up Alarm Messages from the Camera to MxControlCenter in Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras Activate the Restore MxCC when minimized checkbox Click on OK to close the dialog MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface 195 396 To prevent MxControlCenter from being hidden behind other applications in the first place you can activate the Always on top checkbox in the Tools gt Options gt View tab Saving Bandwidth When MxControlCenter Is Minimized Finally you can also save bandwidth when MxControlCenter is minimized by setting the When minimized dropdown on the Tools gt Options gt General tab to either Pause or Stop all Pause Suspends all video streams but keeps the layout and the connections to the cameras Upon restoring the application window MxControlCenter quickly resumes video streaming This option corresponds to deactivating the Activate camera con nections button in the toolbar Stop all Disconnects all video streams and unloads the current layout Upon restoring the application window MxControlCenter again establishes the connections to the cameras and resumes video streaming This option requires a bit more time than
127. that MxControlCenter automatically activates the Layout Manager if it had not been activated before e You can now rename the new layout using one of the following methods Double click on the layout and overtype the existing name Right click on the layout select Rename from the context menu and overtype the existing name Press F2 and overtype the existing name e f you want to create a hierarchical layout structure use the mouse to move and reorder the layouts based on your requirements Drop a layout on another one to start a group Move a layout up or down to change the order Move a layout to the left and out of the current group either up or down to change the hierarchy level MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 6 396 To change the definition i e the contents of the layout proceed as described in Section 4 2 3 Defining Grid Layouts and in Section 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts depending on the layout type 4 2 2 Element Types Used in Layouts This section describes the types of elements that are available in grid and background layouts to display video sources As explained in Section 3 2 1 Displaying Video Content in Layouts there are three basic element types display windows icons and buttons cet Layos Franky jp Fie View Layout VideoSeurce Recoring Teels Hel
128. the Video Motion 1 VM set to a suitable position e g a door or draw a new frame using your mouse The new changed video motion window has a solid white border while any existing window on the camera has a dotted line Add more windows as required by drawing them with your mouse e Click on Apply and wait until the camera con figuration has been saved The new video motion windows appear as dotted frames in the camera s live image Setting Up Alarm Messages from the Camera to MxControlCenter e Open the Camera Configuration dialog e Click in the Network Messages tab This tab of the Camera Configuration dialog allows selecting several cameras Use CTRL SHIFT click Any changes to this tab are applied to all selected cameras e Inthe Alarm Targets group box activate the Enable checkbox e Set the Acknowledge dropdown to On e Add anew IP address in the list box MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 99 396 Click on the button doj Double click on the IP Address column in the new line and enter the IP address of the MxControlCenter computer 172 16 0 23 Double click on the Port column in the new line and enter the port of the MxControlCenter computer you would like to use for receiving network alarm messages 31754 in this example Deactivate or delete b
129. the browser interface of the camera The network message will now be sent to the MxControlCenter computer the application window should appear on the screen on top and display the camera that triggered the alarm in its preferred alarm layout MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 207 396 4 5 4 Configuring Where to Record MOBOTIX cameras support a variety of storage targets i e locations where the cameras can store their recordings By default the MOBOTIX cameras are using the built in SD Flash card This section expands on the example and shows how to configure different storage targets for the MOBOTIX cameras and how to access these targets directly from MxControlCenter Open the Camera Configuration dialog Click on the Recording tab Make sure that the External Recording checkbox at the bottom is activated ce Folder SD Flash Card Click on the Setup button at the bottom of the Recording tab to open the External Recording dialog Click on Allow when prompted to run an unidentified program This tab of the Camera Configuration dialog allows selecting several cameras Use CTRL SHIFT click Any changes to this tab are applied to all selected cameras Using the External Recording Dialog You can use this dialog to set up external recording for the camera depending on the options selected at the top of the dialog
130. the camera microphone is not available this button does not work Activate announcement to camera This button allows making announcements on the active camera When doing so the MxControlCenter computer sends the audio from the computer s microphone to the speaker of the camera If a camera has been selected MxControlCenter uses this camera to output the announcement If an audio path see below has been set for the selected camera it will use that camera to output the announcement By default MxControlCenter sends sound i e announcements to the selected camera which plays back the sound on its own speaker Setting the audio path to a different camera uses the external speaker of that camera instead of the selected one see Setting an Audio Path in Section 4 2 5 More Options When Editing Layouts A typical application is a layout with several cameras and one audio path cam era This camera is attached to a MOBOTIX CamlO module which relays the camera s audio output to a PA system Ifthe audio path has been set to the audio path camerafor all other cameras in the layout this camera will always be used to make the announcement regardless if a camera has been selected or not If only someof the cameras in a layout are using the audio path property you need to select at least one camera to make an announcement If you have activated both buttons you can talk back and forth between the
131. the ceiling and is monitoring the entire entrance area the operators of the security system can run a Post Video Motion search on the camera By placing a video motion window on the area where the computer used to be they can quickly find the person that stole the computer 3 5 2 Search Playback in a Live Display Window When accessing a normal layout with live cameras the display windows show the live video streams of the cameras By switching a display window to Player mode you can quickly search through the recorded video data Switching a Live Display Window to Player Mode To switch a window to Player mode first click on the live image of a specific camera to select it yellow frame Next click on the Activate Player mode button or right click on the camera s display window and select Recording gt Player mode from the context menu Ifthe selected camera has recorded events the Player panel opens in the sidebar Next MxControlCenter activates the playback buttons they are grayed out otherwise and the display window shows the last recorded event indicated by the recording icon in the top right corner see red arrow in figure MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 30 09 11 09 02 12 05 50 54 OIN OADE 072245 WwW no one DED 110 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 0 5x speed 2x speed 4x speed 8x speed Max speed above
132. the current layout to Player mode provided there is at least one recorded event per video source If this button is pressed the playback buttons execute the correspond ing functions simultaneously for all Player windows Click again on this button to return all windows to their original state as defined in the layout The Player mode for all video sources button will only stay pressed if MxControlCenter finds at least one recording for each of the live windows Section 3 5 4 Synchronized Search Playback of Several Cameras provides more infor mation on how to play back the recordings in time synchronized fashion i e like playing back all recordings according to a timeline 3 5 3 Search Playback in Layouts with Display Windows in Player Mode Since the layouts can be created very flexibly you may have layouts that contain both player and live windows While this may sound like a good idea in theory layouts should contain either only live windows or only player windows to avoid confusing live and recorded images One layout with live images could be called Overview Live while the same layout with player windows would be called Overview Player You can thus switch layouts to see either only Live or only Player windows Note that the Player windows always show the last recorded event provided that the corresponding video sources have recorded at least one event To see the recorded video footage of one video source clic
133. the folder of the installation file e Quit MxControlCenter if the application is running MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 5 4 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration e Launch the LangPack MxCC _V2 5 3 lt language country gt exe instal lation file e Follow the instructions of the installation wizard Make sure that you are installing the language package into the same program folder as MxControlCenter if you changed the target folder you may have to delete the extra Mxcc appended by the installation wizard e The installation wizard copies the language files to the Languages subfolder and the print template file PrintTemplates lt language country gt ts to the Templates subfolder of the MxControlCenter program folder When starting MxControlCenter the application shows the user interface of the language you installed To switch to a different language while the application is running open Tools gt Language in the menu and click on the desired language and restart MxControlCenter 4 1 4 Installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG DirectShow Codec In order to play back native MxPEG recordings mxq files in Windows Media Player for example MOBOTIX is providing the MxPEG DirectShow codec You can download the installation file for this codec from the MOBOTIX website Support gt Software Downloads gt MxPEG DirectShow The installation file is
134. the layout buttons at the bottom of the applica tion activate the Show toolbar at bottom checkbox MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 181 396 e Click on OK to close the dialog How can I maximize the number of layout buttons in the toolbar e Choose a wide computer monitor e Maximize the MxControlCenter application e Use short layout names Setting the Start Layout MxControlCenter automatically shows the start layout if Tools gt General gt On Startup gt Load start has been set to Start layout To define a start layout proceed as described in Setting a Start Layout in Section 4 2 5 More Options When Editing Layouts 4 3 3 Configuring Sequencers The MxControlCenter sequencers provide different mechanisms for automatically switching the displayed video streams If you want to prevent an operator from using the layout and camera sequencers you need to deactivate the Live gt Sequencer right see Section 4 7 2 Editing Group Rights Note that the sequencer windowis not assigned to any specific right it is part of a layout definition Configuring the Camera and Layout Sequencers The camera sequencer shows only one camera at a time on the entire display area and automatically cycles through all cameras in the current layout Note that you can set the number of seconds to show each camera see be
135. the left and out of the current group either up or down to change the hierarchy level Using Layout Buttons in Layouts These buttons represent a convenient way for the operators to switch from one background layout to a different background or grid layout To define the buttons proceed as described in Other Elements in Section 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts Using Layout Buttons in the Toolbar Layout buttons in the toolbar allow switching between layouts but are part of the applica tion window rather than a layout such as layout buttons The layout buttons can be shown either at the top of the application as in the figure below or at the bottom You can use these buttons to access the layouts without having to permanently show the sidebar MxControlCenter Overview Outside File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Help H4 Overview Outside H Main Entrance FA West gate HE Parking This toolbar replaces the existing toolbar The layout buttons follow the order of the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel from top to bottom To activate the layout buttons e Select Tools gt Options from the menu e Open the View tab e n the Layouts section activate the Layout buttons in toolbar checkbox e Enter the number of layouts to show in the toolbar counted from the top of the layout list as shown in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel e if you want to show the toolbar with
136. this feature with caution The data generated this way is most likely too much to process in a practical manner Adding Selected Video Sequences to the Export List e Using the functions of the Player sidebar panel Find the start of the interesting scene usin p vE 9 om lt 3 ca a the playback buttons the slider or set a fix fa fa ee te i date and time and click on the Go to Date w Time button Activate the Marker Mode button to set the start of the clip Use the playback buttons or the slider to position the current image on the end of the sequence you want to add to the export list Click on the Add to Export List button the Export List dialog opens Repeat for all other sequences you want to add to the export list e Using the Video Search dialog Y i Select an event in the Events list find the start of the interesting scene using the playback buttons the slider or set a search time and click on the Search button Right click on the slider and select Set begin marker Use the playback buttons or the slider to EN position the current image on the end of K K gt ti El Dy the sequence you want to add to the export list MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Saving Printing and Exporting 14 3 96 Right click on the slider and select Set end marker MxControlCenter highlights the sele
137. three levels e The Layout Sequencer switches between all layouts that have been defined in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel e The Camera Sequencerswitches between the specified cameras within a grid layout not available for background layout and displays the images they capture at their maximum size in the display area The other cameras of the current layout are not visible any more e A Sequencer window inside a layout cycles through specific cameras of the layout See Section 4 3 3 Configuring Sequencers on how to add such a display element to a layout and how to configure the element To activate one of the sequencers click on the dropdown arrow of the Activate Layout or Camera Sequencers button and select the sequencer you want to use To stop the sequencer simply deactivate the button and MxControlCenter displays the last layout camera sequencer or the current layout layout sequencen Since MxControlCenter remembers the last sequencer you used you can simply activate the button to start the same sequencer again If the users should be able to configure the camera sequencer themselves you can add a Configure Sequencer button to the background layout see Ofher Elements in Section 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com sF Layout Sequencer Camera Sequencer 18 396 Mx
138. to do with them While the exact procedure will most likely be different in your installation this section describes a standard operating procedure for the operator of such a security system Before we go into detail however we need to take a look at the basics mem Alarm management T e Speaker N j Py ma Microphone Notification ta Recording A MOBOTIX camera not only provides high resolution images and the camera s audio channel for live viewing It is a complex system that combines sensors alerting features and recording to fulfill specific tasks in a security system for example e Internal and external sensors Video motion detectors temperature changes noises external light barriers magnetic contacts etc create events e The events can trigger camera actions such as shown in the figure above E Mail The camera sends one or more e mails concurrently or one by one to the recipients Notification by alarm network messages The camera can send TCP network messages to MxControlCenter or other systems that react to these messages Visual notification The camera shows a red frame around the image in case it detects an alarm Recording The camera starts recording the video stream for a predefined period of time Microphone After calling the recipient the camera can transmit the sound from its integrated or an external microphone to the computer or mobile device of the recip
139. user interface into own Yes Translation package available for languages MOBOTIX partners worldwide on www mobotix com Integration in other programs Yes Via HTTP API for remote control of the most important functions live image display reproduction of recordings activation of layouts MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX AG e Technical information subject to change without notice 50 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation 2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND INITIAL OPERATION This chapter covers the system requirements for running MxControlCenter You will also learn how to connect and power up the cameras and how to install MxControlCenter For information on howto set up an entire video surveillance system based on MxControlCenter see Appendix A Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline 2 1 Setting Up MxControlCenter Overview In this section we will describe the most important steps for a basic installation These steps are the same for all scenarios For thorough instructions regarding camera mounting see the nsfallation section in the corresponding Camera Manual For more detailed information on the power supply and connecting cameras to the network see the Network and Power Connection section in the corresponding Camera Manual Mounting and Connecting the Cameras e Install the came
140. video sequence when more than 16 images per second are produced FTP Abbreviation of File Transfer Protocol one of the standard protocols used to transfer large files over the Internet MOBOTIX cameras are using FTP to update webcam images on web servers for example Gigabit Ethernet Ethernet connections with speeds of up to 1000 Mbit s MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 373 396 Grid Layout Layouttype in MxControlCenter which shows cameras in a table with rows and columns e g the classic Quad view with four cameras in a two by two grid In contrast to a Background Layout you can only place the cameras in one of the grid s display windows MxControlCenter comes with a set of predefined grids and also allows creating custom grids The Auto Grid is a special type of grid layout which automatically adjusts the size of the display windows accroding to the display area and the numbers of cameras GSM 2G Abbreviation of Global System for Mobile Communication Second generation of wireless telephone technology H 264 A standard for video compression also called AVC video or MPEG 4 Part 10 H 264 is com monly used in HDTV video broadcasting and SIP Video applications HDTV Abbreviation of High Definition TV Describes a TV and video broadcasting standard with a Resolution of 1980x1080 that commonly uses H 264 as compression method to reduce requir
141. video source e Recording Path Adds the path of an external file server that is used by a MOBOTIX camera to store its recordings The videos or snapshots recorded at that location can be played back using the Player Video Search or Event Search features of MxControlCenter A recording path is helpful when examining the recordings stored on an external storage medium for example Editing the List of Video Sources To edit items in the Add Video Sources dialog right click on an item in the list and select one of the following options e Select all Selects all video sources e Deselect all Deselects all video sources e Remove Removes the selected video sources from the list e Remove all Removes all video sources from the list e Configure network Opens the Configure Selected Cameras dialog which allows configuring the camera s network connection so it works properly on your computer s network e User amp password Allows you to define a different user and password in MxControlCenter for accessing the camera This is typically required when the camera uses a different password other than the default user admin password meinsm 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter You are now ready to add the MOBOTIX cameras to MxControlCenter In the Add Video Sources dialog select the cameras you would like to add e Press CTRL A to select all cameras e Use CTRL click to select deselect single cameras MOB
142. video stream of one camera which is integrated via narrow band connection GSM UMTS Video clips images Camera sequencer for example full Image Yes practically unlimited Yes MxPEG clips and JPEG can be inserted in own windows e g for demonstration pur poses or to display emergency numbers Shows all cameras of a layout for the set duration in succession Symbol display Yes practically unlimited Especially helpful on overview plans clicking an icon displays the video stream in the focus window automatic display of the most recent alarm in the alarm window Image processing Automatic correction of image distortion wide angle lenses Yes in live image and in recordings Storage of the original ensures that data are suitable for admission to a court of law vPTZ control Yes in live image and in recordings Software PTZ enables digital zooming panning tilting in the live image and in recordings PTZ control Yes a dart various rotor heads including Pelco D protocol and cameras from third party manufacturers e g Bosch Siemens Image optimization Yes in live image and in recordings Correction of brightness saturation contrast and sharpness always printed with the original image usable in a court of a Event detection Image analysis Yes decentralized Movement detection within definable areas directly in the cameras exclusion
143. www mobotix com sales mobotix com Mounting and Initial Operation 3 5 9 3 Q 6 A 10 Mounting and Initial Operation When on site it is suggested to proceed as outlined in the following e Check the infrastructure Are the test protocols of the network cabling OK Are the cable outlets at the locations as defined by the planner Is the gateway for Internet access running and configured properly e Mount the components Mount the switches and the file servers NAS Mount all cameras as labeled e Install and configure the MxControlCenter workstations Setup the hardware of the MxControlCenter workstations establish the network connections and power them up Copy the exported installation from the network share or storage medium you cre ated in Exporting and Distributing MxContro lCenter above to the MxControlCenter workstations e Power up all remaining components Power up alll file servers NAS Power up all cameras A 11_ Adjusting Individual Cameras Since all cameras are running you should now adjust those camera settings which can only be adjusted at their final mounting positions such as exposure and video motion windows etc Depending on the parameter you need to adjust you can either use MxControlCenter or the individual camera s browser interface The following table shows some of the parameters you can adjust and where you can do this Parameter Tool Where Camera Co
144. zoom level of a camera view Click the corresponding button for three seconds to s save a specified camera view Click the corresponding button briefly to access a saved 3 Go position Gs Positions can be defined and then accessed in the following cases e Live PTZ in MOBOTIX cameras e Pan tilt heads that can be controlled via MOBOTIX cameras Resetting the Image You can click on the 1x Zoom button to reset the visible image to the unzoomed camera image If you click on the Center button MxControlCenter moves the center of the zoomed image to the center of the original camera image Automatically Moving the Visible Image The buttons in the Auto Move panel control the automatic camera movements Hemispheric cameras in particular offer a number of automatic movement features e Pan Left Click on this button to slowly move the visible image to the left The visible image will keep on moving until you click one of the other buttons e Pan Right Same as above but moves the visible image to the right MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 92 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter e Views 1 15 Click on this button to cycle through all stored views from 1 to 15 e Jump N E S W When watching aaa a Hemispheric camera mounted to the ceiling the camera can create images of four virtual cameras from one 180 degree image In this Surround mode each virtua
145. 0 8 104 216 M24 i Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour ODSUES Irs 10 8 104 217 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour E mx10 8 104 2 10 8 104 218 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour OGRIES IS 10 8 105 145 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour S mx 10 8 105 10 8 105 146 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour mx 10 8 105 14 10 8 105 147 M2 Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour mx 10 8 10 8 105 148 MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour Different subnet 48 video sources found 24 selected Video sources Automatic search Add manually Preview image Legend MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Launching MxControlCenter for the First Time 5 7 3 9 6 A video source is any source offering video content that can be displayed in MxControlCenter The term not only refers to MOBOTIX cameras but also to third party IP cameras recordings stored on file servers file server paths and other devices e g Snap Server NAS systems MxPEG clips and analog cameras connected via MxServer e g an analog Dome Camera The application automatically finds all MOBOTIX cameras and other devices e g Snap Servers on the same physical network see below A Physical Network refers to a system of computers and networked devices that are connected by network cables Switch wireless devices or other suitable hardware Physical networks may include one or more Logical Networks also called su
146. 127 0 0 1 to verify that the web server is running 2 Install the MxRemotePreview CGI module Copy the MxRemotePreview cgi exe file to the Apache program folder C Program Files Apache cgi bin 3 Configure the Apache web server Copy the configuration file httpd conf to the Apache program folder C Program Files Apache conf MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Open httpd conf and edit the following lines DocumentRoot lt camera recordings folder gt ScriptAlias cgi bin lt apache program folder gt cgi bin Action mxremotepreview cgi bin MxRemotePreview cgi exe lt Directory lt camera recordings folder gt gt lt FilesMatch MEAPC 0 9 jpg gt SetHandler mxremotepreview lt FilesMatch gt lt Directory gt Add desired MxRemotePreview settings Frame rate default 1 frame per second SetEnv MXRECODER_FRAMERATE 1 Image size aspect ration will be kept automatically correlates to the resolution setting in MxControlCenter SetEnv MXRECODER WIDTH 320 SetEnv MXRECODER HEIGHT 240 JPEG quality 1 100 SetEnv MXRECODER QUALITY 40 Audio output 1 to enable 0 to disable SetEnv MXRECODER AUDIO 1 4 Configure or edit other Apache settings as necessary optional see httpd apache org docs 2 2 5 Restart the Apache service 6 Test the web browser an
147. 2 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation If you do nofcreate a new layout in this step and no layouts have been defined in MxControlCenter so far the selected cameras will only be shown in the VIDEO SOURCES subsection of the Navigator sidebar panel In this case you need to manu ally create a layout as described in Section 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts and add the eae nila cameras as required 2 4 3 Initial Installation of Hemispheric and 180 Cameras Hemispheric models or 180 dual lens models with panorama views such as D14D 180 should be set up at this point Initial installation involves selecting the mounting position wall ceiling floor and preferred viewing direction for the hemispheric cameras The images of the two 90 image sensors in 180 dual lens cameras are positioned in such a way that they fit together seamlessly These settings are not usually changed following initial installation Performing Initial Installation Select a camera to be set up Open the PTZ Controls sidebar panel click on View gt Sidebar gt Show in the menu if this is not visible Zoom in on the PTZ Controls panel until another area Hemispheric Installation Configuration of Panorama View opens below the PTZ Views section Proceed as outlined below in the Hemispheric Cameras and 180 Dual Lens Cameras sections Initial Installation of Hemispheric Cameras Select the mounting p
148. 6 Temporarily sets the specified resolution 768x576 800x600 on the camera 1024x768 1280x960 2048x1536 customize Temporarily sets the specified JPEG RLEY 10 20 ang 20 quality on the camera Temporarily sets the specified image brightness 10 9 0 10 brightness on the camera camera right left both auto ye perined iens sharpen 0 1 10 Temporarily sets the specified sharp ness value on the camera Make sure that any application that is trying to remote control MxControlCenter is using the port specified in Tools gt Options gt Remote Control or else the remote control features will not work MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 04 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 1 6 The Monitoring Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options General Connection Defauts View _ Aam Handing Remote Control Mentoring Action Log Waming Sounds On connection loss No sound amp System sound File Eror Display On connection loss No display 2 Eror message Graphic Vertical image coverage 100 On latency timeout No display Error message Graphic Vertical image coverage 100 Maximum latency time 200 ms Maximum overdue time 1000 ms Automatic stream recovery V Dead Man s Switch Activate after 20 Minutes of inactivity Logout user Send e m
149. 8 4 8 6 Configuring and Monitoring the Action Log 231 4 8 7 Monitoring Camera Connections 232 4 8 8 Configuring the Dead Man s Switch 233 4 9 Working with MxControlCenter Configurations 234 4 9 1 Automatically Loading Program Settings 234 4 9 2 Saving Program Settings and Exporting Installations 234 4 9 3 Using Different MxControlCenter Configurations 236 5 Enhanced Features 238 5 1 Update Assistant Software Updates and More 238 5 1 1 Elements of the Update Assistant Dialog 239 5 1 2 Update Assistant Toolbar Buttons 240 5 1 3 Getting Started with Update Assistant 240 5 1 4 Checking the Camera Connection Status 243 5 1 5 Updating the Software of MOBOTIX Cameras 244 5 1 6 Installing MOBOTIX Application Software 247 5 1 7 Saving and Uploading Settings of One or More Cameras 247 5 1 8 Backing Up and Restoring the Entire System 250 5 1 9 Changing the Configuration of Many Cameras at Once 250 5 1 10 Using Update Assistant as a Stand Alone Application 251 5 2 Using Snap Server NAS Systems 253 5 2 1 Adding Overland Storage Snap Servers 253 5 2 2 Configuring and Editing Snap Server Settings 254 5 3 Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS 255 5 4 Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks 261 5 4 1 Using MOBOTIX Cameras with Pan Tilt Heads 261 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras 264 5 4 3 Integrating Analog Third Party PTZ Cameras 267 5 5 MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras 271 5 5 1 Introduction to MxServer 271 5 5 2
150. 92 MxControlCenter 64 MxRemotePreview servers 285 Pan tilt heads overview 261 Saved views 96 Sequencers 77 Switching features of a camera 80 Third Party cameras overview 261 Two man rule 150 Video sources 59 Video wall 78 Virtual PTZ on Live images 82 Video Displaying content in layouts 71 Exporting 35 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Index 391 396 Video analysis Configuring 211 Video monitoring Setting up 177 Video motion detection Controlling 216 Scheduled 216 Time tables 216 Video Motion detection glossary 377 Video Motion window glossary 377 Video Player 20 Video recordings Signing 228 Video Search 129 Video SIP glossary 377 Video sources Access using MxRemotePreview 285 Adding manually 59 Configuring 56 Editing list 59 Finding 56 Properties dialog 307 Status of discovered 58 Using 59 VIDEO SOURCES Navigator sidebar panel 70 Video sources glossary 377 Video surveillance 71 Video surveillance system Adjusting individual cameras 359 Adjusting sets of cameras 352 Collecting information about the sys tem 337 Configuring MxControlCenter 355 Configuring the camera network set tings 340 Configuring the storage systems 339 Creating and distributing a camera master configuration 342 Final lab test of all components 358 Final tests 360 Finishing the lab configuration of the cameras 355 Hand off and us
151. 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features 5 ENHANCED FEATURES The previous chapter has shown you how to set up the MOBOTIX video surveillance sys tem for the end users This chapter covers special tasks that go beyond the initial setup e Using the Update Assistant e Using Snap Server NAS systems to store recordings e Connecting to cameras via DynDNS e Using Pan Tilt heads third party cameras and joysticks e Setting up MxServer to integrate analog third party cameras e Installing and configuring MxRemotePreview to access remote recordings in low bandwidth scenarios e Reading SD cards with recordings of MOBOTIX cameras 5 1 Update Assistant Software Updates and More MOBOTIX cameras are always delivered with the latest version of the software firmware to guarantee that your cameras are working properly Nevertheless it may be necessary to update the camera software from time to time as this not only corrects software bugs but also adds new features to the camera In MxControlCenter two mechanisms are available to update and maintain the software for all MOBOTIX components of an MxControlCenter installation e Software Downloads This component provides a quick overview over new software that is available on the update server by default this is update mobotix con Select Tools gt Software Downloads from the MxControlCenter menu to open this component e Update Assistant You can either open this component as a di
152. AAEE Factory Reset In order to obtain a valid configuration it is recommended to reset the camer configuration to its factory defaults Dismiss current configuration and continue with factory defaults Note the settings for users and their passwords will not be changed Modify the current configuration e Domain Name Service DNS If this list is empty enter the IP addresses of the DNS server s e Store Configuration Check the settings then click on Store Configuration and reboot Admin Menu gt General Tasks gt Reboot A 5 3 Setting the Admin Menu Options Click on the Admin Menu button to open the Administration Overview page Creating the User Groups The video surveillance system requires users with certain rights for accessing the cameras e Click on Security gt Group Access Control Lists e Click on the More button e Create the user groups as in the figure below MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration 345 396 Disable all Open Users and Passwords to manage users and to assign groups y Set factory Restore X Close e Replace the guests group name by remote Activate the Live and Multiview checkbox for this group e Replace the users group name by mxcc Activate the Admin checkbox e Click on Set Creating the Users e Click on Security
153. Access Login User admin successfully logged in 4 12 119 29 AM admin Access Update Assistant Update Assistant opened 4 12 11 11 02 AM admin General Shutdown Shutting down MxControlCenter 4 12 11 11 02AM Thilo General Start Launching MxControlCenter Note The Action Log refreshes automatically even when opened and therefore will always contain the last logged action MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 232 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 8 7 Monitoring Camera Connections Regardless of how many cameras your system contains you will want to let the users know if a camera has stopped working for technical reasons such as a network failure or because a cable has been cut for example To configure such a warning select Tools gt Options from the menu and click on the Monitoring tab The options in the first two group boxes on this tab are controlling how MxControlCenter reacts when loosing the connection to one of the cameras Setting a Warning Sound In the Warning Sounds group box you can choose to suppress the sound No sound to have MxControlCenter play back the system sound or to play back a specific wav sound file Displaying a Visual Warning The Error Display group box contains options for displaying an error message or a graphic in the image in case one of the following happens e Onconnection loss If MxControlCen
154. Analog Falcon 2 0 lt BOSCH Autodome Analog Falcon 2 1 216 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Using an Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter To use this camera in MxControlCenter enter the IP address and port of the MxServer computer as described in Step 3 Add the Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter as an MxServer Channel of Section 5 4 3 Integrating Analog Third Party PTZ Cameras 5 5 4 Connecting a Third Party IP Camera to MxServer In this scenario MxServer is only used to store the M JPEG images from a third party IP camera in a file server structure figure in Section 5 5 1 Introduction to MxServer Note that connecting third party IP cameras to MxServer works without any additional hardware components To connecting a third party IP camera to MxServer e Click on File gt Configuration in the menu to open the configuration page in a browser e Inthe New Channels section select the camera type to add e Fill in the camera configuration login data and set the image parameters as required e Enter a Channel name that describes the camera s purpose or location Using a Third Party IP Camera in MxControlCenter To use this camera in MxControlCenter enter the IP address of the camera as described in Step 1 Add the IP PTZ Dome Camera to MxControlCenter of Section 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras Some third party IP cameras can only deliver one video stream e g Axis M7001
155. CC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 2 5 Using a Video Wall to Display Cameras Video walls provide an ideal setup for monitoring many cameras at once Think of a traf fic control unit for example The operators of the video wall need to be able to switch from one camera to the next with some or all monitors cycling through specific cameras MxCC Workstation jor Parking 1 w2 Parking x Clien Client 3 Clien eer oel rere 192 168 1 203 jez ice 08 Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 When operating a video wall as shown in the scenario above the workstation computer shows an overview layout with the monitors and a number of layout buttons In this scenario you can select a layout by clicking on the button below the monitor you want to use to configure such a system see Section 4 3 6 Configuring MxControlCenter Remote Control and a Video Wally MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 79 396 3 2 6 Using the Audio Features of a Camera Besides video streams most MOBOTIX cameras except Web and Basic models can also transmit and record audio streams In order to use these features the MxControlCenter computer needs sound support i e a microphone and speakers Play camera audio If the video stream includes audio data this button plays the audio channel from the active camera yellow frame on the computer If
156. Camera MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 66 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Overview Outside H Main Entrance H west gate B Parking B Garage Entrance 4 aj Overview Inside IDEO SOURCES 4 Cameras pa Fina VENT SEARCHES P Search 3 1 1 MxControlCenter User Interface Elements The title bar shows the name of the current fayout and the selected video source The menu barallows switching between views opening additional dialog boxes and executing all the features assigned to the various toolbar buttons described below The toolbar contains buttons for the most important features To see what a particular button does simply place your mouse pointer over it and read the tooltip that appears The toolbar can also be shown at the bottom of the main window For more information see Section 3 1 2 MxControlCenter Toolbar Buttons and Section 4 4 2 Configuring the Toolbar The status bar shows information for all video sources in the layout nothing selected e g combined frame rate and required bandwidth or of the selected video source e g individual frame rate and required bandwidth The display area of the application window displays the current layout or an event search see below The selected video source e g a camera in a grid layout has a yellow frame and is the active video source Its time and date
157. ControlCenter that listens to incoming remote control commands The sender can use all available commands see List of Remofte Control Commands in this section e Port Enter the port for receiving remote control commands If this field is empty the remote control feature will not work e Allowed IP addresses Enter IP addresses that are permitted to send remote control commands to MxControlCenter You can enter either single IP addresses or computer names or use wildcards e g 172 16 When entering several addresses separate the different addresses by commas as in the example beneath the field Leave the default value in this field if you want to allow all addresses e Sound Use this option to specify the sound that is to be played back over the com puter speakers when receiving a remote control command Network Message Log 2 This box logs all remote control commands received from other MxControlCenter computers or third party applications as well as the alarm messages received from MOBOTIX cameras MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 O 2 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference Syntax of Network Messages Sent to MxControlCenter Syntax http lt ip_address gt lt port gt lt parameter 1 gt lt value 1 gt amp lt parameter 2 gt lt value 2 gt amp lt parameter n gt lt value n gt Examples http 192 168 1 182 8001 fullscreen 0 mini
158. Dialog 3 09 3 96 e Display strategy The following options can be used to improve the display of the video stream shown in display windows Minimum MxControlCenter minimizes the latency in order to show the images as quickly as possible even if this could cause some jittering Smooth display MxControlCenter focuses on displaying the images without any jitter even if this increases the latency e Audio path Allows selecting a different camera to output the audio from the com puter Using this option you can attach one camera to an announcement system and select this camera in all others as the audio path The audio path of the camera attached to the announcement system remains set to Se f default setting For more information on this topic see Section 3 2 6 Using the Audio Features of a Camera 6 2 4 The PTZ Rotor Tab This tab contains the following parameters Access Data Information Display PTZ Rotor Type No pan tilt head Sensitivity Normal M Fast Patch Joystick control Invert horizontal direction Invert vertical direction e Type The following pan tilt heads are supported in MxControlCenter For third party products Videotronic SN 15AH E ior insta Provitek tion and configuration VPT 42 VPT501 Provitek PT 2 3 4 Pelco D MxProtocol This protocol is used for controlling analog pan tilt cameras that are connected to a computer running MxServer Wh
159. EG glossary 375 MxRemotePreview Installing on Microsoft IIS 7 283 Installing with Apache Web Server 281 Testing the web server 284 Using to access remote recordings 279 Using to access video sources 285 MxServer Automatically starting on computer 277 Connecting analog PTZ cameras 275 Connecting third party IP camera 276 Installing 272 Integrating third party cameras 271 Introduction 271 System requirements 272 MxStatus Status monitoring for multiple MxControlCenter computers 155 NAS glossary 375 NAS systems Using Snap Server 253 NAS Systems Adding Overland Storage Snap Servers 253 Navigator 20 Sidebar panel 70 Navigator sidebar panels EVENT SEARCHES 70 LAYOUTS 70 LOCAL ARCHIVE 70 VIDEO SOURCES 70 Network connection Directly connected to a computer 51 PoE Switch 52 Power supply 51 MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Index 387 396 Network glossary 375 Network Messages Camera Configuration tab 329 Network security 222 NTP glossary 375 O Operation Installing and initial operation 50 Options Action Log tab 306 Alarm Handling tab 298 Connection Defaults tab 294 Editing layouts 173 General tab 291 Monitoring tab 304 MxControlCenter dialog 290 Remote Control tab 301 View tab 296 Overview Camera Configuration tab 312 Video surveillance system 50 P Panorama view Correct 180 cameras 62 Pan tilt heads Usin
160. Files MOBOTIX MxCC e Working folder c MxCC GateGuards this folder contains the MxControlCenter configuration for the gate guards Proceed as follows e Log in as Windows administrator or as user with administrative privileges e Create a dedicated user without administrative rights e g Gate Guard e Run MxControlCenter and export the configuration to the working folder File gt Export configuration in the menu using the Configuration and resources option e Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the working folder e SetRead only privileges for the working folder for the Gate Guard user right click gt Properties gt Security tab e Create a shortcut to MxCC exe in the MxControlCenter program folder e Set the shortcut properties right click on the shortcut select Properties from the context menu Add the MxNoSave parameter to the MxControlCenter launch command in the Target field to prevent inadvertent changes to the configuration C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe MxNoSave Enter the location of the working folder in the Start in text box so MxControlCenter loads the configuration from this folder Set Shortcut gt Run to Maximized to launch MxControlCenter as a maximized window Click on OK to close the dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Security Considerations 225 396 e Copy the shortcut to the
161. IX AG is known as the leading pioneer in network camera technology since its founding in 1999 and its decentralized concept has made high resolution video systems cost efficient MOBOTIX has been producing megapixel cameras exclusively for many years now and is regarded as the global market leader for high resolution video systems Why High Resolution Systems The higher the resolution the more accurate the detail of the image With analog technology a recorded image generally has no more than 0 1 megapixels CIF Yet one MOBOTIX camera with 3 1 megapixels records around 30 times more detail This means that greater image areas including 360 panoramas are possible while still reducing the number of cameras and thereby enormously reducing the costs as well For example four lanes of a gas station may be recorded with a single MOBOTIX camera instead of the four standard cameras normally necessary for such a task Disadvantages of the Old Centralized Solution Usually cameras only supply images while processing and recording take place later on with a central PC using more expensive video management software This traditional centralized structure has many limitations since it requires high network bandwidth and the PC processing power is insufficient when using several cameras An HDTV MPEG4 film already places a heavy load on a single PC so how can it be expected to keep up with a dozen high resolution live cameras Due to the h
162. If this checkbox is deactivated the error message or graphic will be shown until you switch the selected video source online again To do so right click in the display window and select Remove Stream Lock from the context menu When using the latency time options make sure that the system time of the camera and the system time of the MxControlCenter computer are precisely synchronized Dead Man s Switch amp This option is primarily used to ensure that the staff of a monitoring workstation are well and fulfilling their task If MxControlCenter does not detect any activity within the specified period of time the application shows a prompt to remind the user that this alarm is about to be triggered Ifthe prompt remains unconfirmed MxControlCenter plays an alarm sound and optionally sends an e mail to the specified address e Activate after Activates an alert that triggers after the specified number of minutes without detecting any monitoring activity e Send e mail message to Sends an e mail to the specified address entered in the Mail Settings dialog Mail settings Opens the Mail Settings dialog to define the SMTP Settings and the Message header address etc Preview Activates the preview pane and shows the generated e mail Edit Template Shows the XSL file that formats the e mail output in a web browser You can use a text editor to modify the XSL file recommended for experts only Send Test Mail
163. List dialog click on the Settings E Epor Format Settings ar button to open the Export Format Settings Encoder _Subtte Fie Size Umitaton dialog If you have selected one of the pre Fixed resolution defined export profiles above your choices Use recording resolution see Pen V Start new dip when resolution changes may be limited according to the specifics a of that profile The tabs allow changing the following parameters i ES A Minimum interval between frames 60 gt seconds v e Encoder Allows adjusting the reso Container Alitiant z lution frame rate and performance Saum Prefer Quality Performance settings when encoding the video ox ances When selecting the export profile Time lapse the two control boxes Fixed frame rate and Time lapse are automatically aktive To better recognize objects it is recommended to set a low frame rate Activating the Only use event images checkbox will speed up the export However the images in the time lapse export may not correspond exactly to the previously set interval but may be slightly off With the minimum interval between frames you set the interval in which the images are selected for export Audio Controls if the finished video contains an audio track of the camera provided audio recording had been activated for the camera at the time of recording File Size Limitation If MxControlCenter reaches the limit set on this tab it will cre
164. Loading a Configuration File C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe MxNoSave C MxCC Configurations Gate Guards ini C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe C MxCC Configurations Gate Guards ini MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 3 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline A VIDEO SURVEILLANCE IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINE Setting up a MxControlCenter based video surveillance system VSS can be a complex task if many cameras are involved This part of the manual provides an overview of the tasks you need to accomplish in order to set up the system efficiently There are many ways to accomplish the specific tasks but in order to save time and costs this chapter presents a collection of best practice approaches for setting up a VSS Generally speaking you need to complete the following steps e Collect information about the system A 1 e Configure the system in the lab as much as possible A 2 Configure the storage systems A 3 Configure the camera network settings A 4 Create and distribute a camera master configuration A 5 Adjust sets of cameras with specific settings A 6 Finish the lab configuration of the cameras A 7 Configure MxControlCenter A 8 e Test all components in the lab A 9 e Mount components and bring system into service A 10 e Adjust individual cameras A 11 e Run
165. MOBOTIX cameras to be displayed in other applications including Internet Explorer To date MxPEG remains the only protocol specifically designed for security applications NAS Abbreviation of Network Attached Storage A storage system connected via an Ethernet cable All network devices cameras in a Physical Network have access to this storage system Network Group of computers that are connected via various cables and switches or hubs and share access to data and devices such as printers and network cameras NTP Abbreviation of Network Time Protocol This protocol is designed to synchronize the clocks of network devices from a time server that supports this protocol Go to to find public NTP time servers PIR Abbreviation of Passive Infrared Sensor This sensor is Used to detect movements based on the infrared light emitted by moving persons PoE Abbreviation of Power over Ethernet A technology for supplying network ready devices such as network cameras with power via the Ethernet data cable Physical Network A system of computers and networked devices that are connected by network cables Swifches Hubs wireless devices or other suitable hardware Physical networks may include one or more Logical Networks or be part of a logical network The most simple network is a network cable running from one computer s Ethernet port to the Ethernet port of a second computer or a MOBOTIX camera for example MOBOTIX AG Sec
166. Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS 255 396 5 3 Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS MxControlCenter cannot find cameras that are outside of the local physical network These cameras need to be added manually to the camera list The simplest case is a camera that can be reached using a fixed IP address In many cases however the cameras are connected to the Internet using a broadband connection with dynamic IP addresses that change every day This kind of Internet con nection requires using DynDNS dynamic domain name resolution The dynamic DNS process allows using a given name registered with a free DynDNS service provider e g www dyndns org instead of a fixed IP address e g 213 117 53 215 The inte grated DynDNS client of your broadband router automatically updates the IP address of the DynDNS service if the IP address changes This service thus allows adding the camera using its DynDNS name and the corresponding port e g mycamera dyndns org 8001 The IP addresses of cameras routers the ports and the DynDNS name mycamera dyndns org are only examples Make sure that you are not using the same names and ports but rather assign your own names and ports for accessing your cameras via DynDNS It is highly recommended to only use flat rate tariffs for the Internet connection of the cameras or the router Using a different tariff may produce cost
167. MxServer System Requirements and Installation 272 5 5 3 Connecting an Analog PTZ Camera to MxServer 275 5 5 4 Connecting a Third Party IP Camera to MxServer 276 5 5 5 Setting Up Recording in MxServer 276 5 5 6 Automatically Starting MxServer on the Computer 277 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 5 6 4 5 6 5 5 7 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 1 4 6 1 5 6 1 6 6 1 7 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 4 A A l A 2 A 2 1 Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings MxRemotePreview System Requirements and Installation Installing MxRemotePreview on Windows with Apache Web Server Installing MxRemotePreview on Microsoft Internet Information Server 7 Testing the Web Server with MxRemotePreview Using MxRemotePreview Servers to Access Video Sources Using MxControlCenter to Read SD Cards Reference The Options Dialog The General Tab The Connection Defaults Tab The View Tab The Alarm Handling Tab The Remote Control Tab The Monitoring Tab The Action Log Tab The Properties of Dialog The Access Data Tab The Information Tab The Display Tab The PTZ Rotor Tab The Camera Configuration Dialog The Overview Tab The Image Settings Tab The Exposure Tab The
168. Note If your Admin password matches this task changes the host name on selected cameras stores their configuration to flash and reboots those cameras Change Cancel e Change the names of the cameras according to the list provided by the planner and click on Change e After the camera has finished changing the names check the results in the Manage Other Cameras dialog Working with Sets of Cameras As shown in Section A 5 6 Distributing the Master Configuration you can use the Update Assistant to distribute configurations from one camera to many others Since you MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Adjusting Sets of Cameras 353 396 can also use the Update Assistant to distribute parts sections of a configuration you can use this mechanism to apply specific settings to sets of cameras as in the examples below e Seta specific storage target for a set of cameras when using several file servers NAS e Apply specific image settings e g the Panorama display mode to all Hemispheric cameras that have been mounted to a wall Distributing a Specific Storage Target to a Set of Cameras In order to distribute only the File Server section using the Update Assistant set the fol lowing options in the Admin Menu of one camera Use different file servers NAS for one group if available redundancy Change storage target Stora
169. OBOTIX cameras It is therefore highly recommended to add Mxcc exe to the list of exceptions of your anti virus program Please consult the documentation of your anti virus program or your system administrator if you do not know how to do this MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com a 56 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation 2 4 Launching MxControlCenter for the First Time Once you have installed MxControlCenter see Section 2 3 Installing MxControlCenter you can start the application Double click on the shortcut on your desktop in Start gt Programs or on the MxCC exe file in the program folder When launching MxControlCenter for the first time the Windows Firewall shows a message asking you whether or not to block the application Make sure that you click on Unblock so that MxControlCenter can function properly By default MxControlCenter is a single user application where the user that started the application has full control of the entire system By adding groups and users however you can configure the application as a multi user system see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights MxControlCenter supports different languages To switch to a different language while the application is running select Tools gt Language in the menu click on one of the available languages and restart MxControlCenter To insta
170. OTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Automatic search Insert manually Camera MXPEG dip Recording path Select all Deselect all Remove Remove all User amp password 60 396 MxCC User Manual System Installation and Initial Operation Ore e Use SHIFT click to select a range of cameras If one or more of the selected cameras are not directly accessible i e on a different logical network MxControlCenter automatically offers to reconfigure these cameras see Reconfiguring Cameras on Different Logical Networks below Reconfiguring Cameras on Different Logical Networks If one or more of the selected MOBOTIX cameras E Mxcontroicenter have the status Different subnet e g cameras with factory IP addresses MxControlCenter automatically offers to reconfigure the network settings of these cameras In this case the application will display the dialog shown at the right Click on Yes to reconfigure the cameras for the subnet of your computer One or more of the selected cameras are in a different subnet Would you like to reconfigure them now In most networks a DHCP server automatically assigns the IP addresses for network devices so you can apply the default settings in the Configure Selected Cameras dialog box Get IP address automatically If the IP addresses for devices on the network are manually assigne
171. PTZ camera and how to configure the video server Since MxControlCenter only supports the M JPEG video streaming format please configure the video server accordingly MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 70 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Insert Recording path Step 2 Set Up Recording of the Analog PTZ Camera in MxServer Set up recording of the analog PTZ camera in MxServer as described in Section 5 5 5 Setting Up Recording in MxServer Step 3 Add the Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter as a Video Server Channel e Select Video Source gt Add from the menu to open the Add Video Sources dialog e Click on the Camera button to open the Add Camera dialog e Select the name of the video server channel e g Axis Server Channel as the cam era Type R x Add Camera Il Please select the camera type and specify the connection details Merit Li Lin IP camera User name Toshiba IP camera Axis Server channel Panasonic IP camera Password Sony IP camera e Select a channel number for the video stream Add Camera Please select the camera type and specify the connection details Type Axis Server channel X Channel fl lz 1 Address Port 2 User name e Enter the IP address or DNS name port number and login data user name and password of the video server for the camera and ac
172. Port field for this example we will be using 31667 Avoid the Well Known Ports When assigning a port for the remote control func tions of MxControlCenter make sure that you do not use any of the ports used by other TCP IP services For more information refer to the List of TCP and UDP port numbers topic on en wikipedia org e Optionally enter the IP addresses of devices that are allowed to access this port of the computer from the outside in the Allowed IP addresses field for this example we will be using 192 168 1 234 e Set the Sound options as desired or select a sound file to play if MxControlCenter receives a remote control command The Remote Control group of the Options dialog should now look like this Remote Control J Activate fisten for TCP IP messages Port 31667 Allowed IP addresses 192 168 1 234 Sound No sound System sound File e Click on OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 186 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 1 Filter Allowed IP Addresses As a security measure make sure that you allow only the IP addresses of devices that actually use the remote control functions 2 Configure Windows Firewall After setting up the ports the Windows Firewall normally asks whether it should continue to block the MxControlCenter appli cation Click on Do not block so that the
173. S section Select New search from the context menu Enter a name that describes the search you may want to add Post VM or something similar at the end of the search e Click on the Search mode button in the properties bar e Select the Offline search for motion Post VM option The properties bar now looks like this Sources From 3 Daysago v 6 00AM 5 Go to Sort By Date Time v Reload Automatically v a x Search mode Until Now X Go to Order Ascendng v Search e Select one video source Click on the Sources button and select one camera Click on OK to close the dialog e Set the time range for searching Click on the From dropdown and set the start time of the search Click on the Until dropdown and set the end time of the search e Set the sort order in which the recordings are to be displayed in the Order drop down Depending on the sort order MxControlCenter sets the current position of the player as follows Ascending Sets the current position to the first available recording Descending Sets the current position to the last available recording e Create a video motion window in the Player panel Click with the mouse keep the mouse key pressed and pull in any direction to draw a frame see adjacent figure Repeat to draw as many frames as required that exactly cover the area s you are interested in e g a door and a window Note that you can move an entire f
174. S3 A210 Camera List og Bme O O O Admin Menu Source Date from Date to Sequences Images Usage Mbytes Limits Setup Menu D Internal Recorder 2011 09 06 13 04 00 2011 09 06 13 10 00 7 63 53 of 64 Arm amp Record P Cam1 B10 F2 S3 A210 2011 09 06 01 46 00 2011 09 06 13 10 00 685 6680 2942 of 3000 Audioon P fi mx10 2 1 43 2011 09 06 13 09 54 2011 09 06 13 10 32 4 of 1024 MxPEG on P gy mx10 2 24 80 2011 09 06 13 04 00 2011 09 06 13 10 00 23 of 1024 MxPEG off i 5 A mx 10 3 205 236 2011 09 06 03 41 23 2011 09 06 11 26 59 1021 of 1024 2011 09 06 11 45 02 2011 09 06 13 10 01 22 of 1024 2011 09 06 13 03 46 2011 09 06 13 10 00 37 of 1024 2011 09 06 12 05 51 2011 09 06 12 06 09 3 of 1024 Total Usage 4052 of 9144 Free Space on File Server 1899679 e Backup the system Create a camera backup using the Update Assistant see Section 5 1 8 Backing Up and Restoring the Entire System Create an MxControlCenter backup using File gt Export configuration and select the Complete package option e Complete the user documentation Which layouts show which cameras How can the users access the recordings List adjustments to the user interface special buttons in background layout for example List alerting procedures e g does the user need to acknowledge new alarms List emergency procedures List other specific adjustments MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in
175. SSL connections or it has not been rebooted after setting up SSL 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data MxControlCenter can only check the data integrity of recordings if the cameras have signed their recordings at the time of recording the video data To do this the cameras can sign the recordings using their digital certificate s private key as shown below MOBOTIX camera Audio video recording MxControlCenter Private Public e w Signs Verifies MxControlCenter can later check the integrity of the recordings using the digital certificate s public key in these cases When explicitly checking data integrity as described in Section 3 5 12 Checking the Data Integrity of Recordings MxControlCenter automatically obtains the camera s public key to check its recordings While exporting MxControlCenter automatically obtains the camera s public key to check its recordings see How fo Export a Video from Camera Recordings in Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Security Considerations 2 2 9 3 9 6 e After exporting as file server structure together with MxControlCenter activate the Copy application files checkbox as described in Step 4 Export the Video Optionally Check Data Integrity of Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage When setting up digital signing of the recordi
176. TIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 315 396 Saturation Brightness Backlight and Sharpness 2 e Saturation Adjusts the color saturation of the image defaultis0o gt e Brightness Adjusts the image brightness default is 0 e Backlight Improves images that contain bright and or overex posed areas default is 4 e Sharpness This parameter can almost fully compensate reduced image contrast due to dirty lenses and optical phenomena attrib uted to aging lenses default is 4 Format e Video codec Selects the MxPEG or M JPEG codec for encoding video e Resolution Sets the current size of the camera image e JPEG Quality Sets the JPEG quality of the camera image e Camera frame rate Sets the maximum frame rate of the video stream delivered by the camera e Image quality Sets the desired image quality with regards to the frame rate Quality Delivers the best quality at lower frame rates but uses more bandwidth Normal default Represents the best compromise for a good frame rate and quality Speed Delivers higher frame rates using less bandwidth but shows some loss in quality Image Settings O e Night improvement Enables amplification for dark images but can increase image noise e White balance Sets a color profile to use for white balance control default is Automatic WB e Nois
177. These parameters influence the application s startup sequence and can perform additional func tions The start parameters are entered in the shortcuts Adding Start Parameters to a Shortcut If this has not been done already cre ate a shortcut to MxCC exe in the MxControlCenter program folder and save it to your desktop A MxCC GateGuards South Gate Properties ____ Securty Detais Previous Versions General Shortcut Compatibility FN MxCC GateGuards South Gate Set the shortcut properties right click on the shortcut and select Properties from the shortcut menu Add parameters to the start com mand in the Target field see the List of MxControlCenter Start Parameters table Run Normal window X Syntax lt program call gt lt parameter block gt lt configuration file gt Examples C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe NoWatchDog 0 MxNoSave C GateGuards MxCC ini C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe NoWatchDog 0 MxMulti instances MxNoSave C GateGuards MxCC2 ini List of MxControlCenter Start Parameters Start Parameter Meaning NoWatchDog 0 Prevents the Watchdog application that monitors MxControlCenter from starting automatically Suppresses the note when launching the second third etc instance BARE Cre ne aNcs of MxControlCenter MxOnlyDemoPlayer LaunchesMxControlCenter in demo Player mode MxNoLoad Laun
178. When playing back events only see buttons in table above MxControlCenter shows both the actual event images and the pseudo events You can thus use the event playback buttons to play back continuous recordings in accelerated fashion MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 112 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter be gt 06 09 11 11 27 09 Using the Slider for Navigating Recordings In addition to the playback buttons the Player sidebar contains a slider control for quickly navigating the recordings Drag the red position indicator to the right and left to set the date time you are looking for Let go of the position indicator to show the recording that is closest to the selected date time Current date time First pet image Last p image 06 09 11 Pa 06 09 11 03 41 23 i E 11 27 09 a t Position indicator The date time fields at the top show the date and time of the first recorded image the current image and the last recorded image respectively The clip start end markers are only visible if you have activated the Marker Mode button They are used to select time ranges for exporting later on Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage Using the Date Time Control for Searching Another method forfindingevents fizjeyjic 00 00 00 Goto Search date time is to search for recordings that T5 November 2010 gt o
179. Win exe v Xx 5 1 7 Saving and Uploading Settings of One or More Cameras Update Assistant allows creating backup of configuration files based on the cameras shown in the camera list To create a backup file for all cameras in the camera list you can also use the system backup function described in Section 5 1 8 Backing Up and Restoring the Entire System Creating a Backup Configuration File for One or More Cameras 1 Select one or more cameras in the camera list 2 Select Camera gt Save Settings from the menu press CTRL ALT S or click on the Save Settings button This opens a Save Configuration File dialog that saves differ ent files depending on the number of cameras you selected One camera selected Creates a backup configuration file cfg of the selected camera Syntax lt camera name gt year month day cfg Example mx10 8 195 72 2014 04 29 cfg More than one camera selected Creates a zipped backup archive zip for the selected cameras Syntax MxConfig year month day zip Example MxConfig 2014 04 29 zip 3 If required select a different target folder 4 Click on OK to save the file MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 248 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features pl Upload Settings pe 1 MxConfig 2011 07 06 2ip 2 MxConfig Backup 2011 06 30 2ip 3 20n 1 2011 06 30 cfg Contents of a Zipped Backup Ar
180. Windows Startup folder of the Gate Guard user this will automatically launch the application when the gate guards are logging in e ifthe gate guards are allowed to shut down and re open MxControlCenter also copy the shortcut to the Desktop of the Gate Guard user e Log out of the computer e Login again as Gate Guard user and test the configuration Make sure that you properly document the configuration and that you instruct the staff on how to use the system 4 8 4 Using Encrypted Connections to Access Cameras Encryption is a method to ensure that the data sent back and forth between the cameras and the computer are protected from interception by unauthorized persons To encrypt the transferred data and at the same time verify its authenticity the camera uses digital certificate private public key pair that is either self signed by the camera generated using data you have entered or which has been issued by a certificate authority CA in short MxControlCenter uses the public key of the same certificate to decrypt the data sent from the camera To establish an encrypted connection both parties use the SSL protocol see secure sockets layer on en wikipedia org MOBOTIX camera MxControlCenter amp Network connection e using SSL HTTPS lt gt r Private Public How MxControlCenter Uses SSL e MxControlCenter connects to a camera requesting a secure connection e The camera sends back the public key
181. X AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 175 396 Special Features of Display Elements The display elements of both grid and background layouts have a number of special features that are described in the following Note that activated features are indicated by the following buttons icons e Background layouts The corresponding toolbar and title bar buttons of the display windows will be active title bar icons are yellow e Grid Layouts The corresponding toolbar buttons of MxControlCenter will be active f Preferred Alarm Layout MxControlCenter can automatically open a camera s preferred alarm layout when it receives a E a network message from the corresponding camera even if it is notin the current layout In addition the user can select a camera and click on the Show camera s preferred layout button on the toolbar or on the corresponding icon in the title bar display window in background layouts only Another method to show the preferred layout is to right click on a camera and to select Load Preferred Layout from the context menu To set the preferred alarm layout e Open the camera s Properties of dialog doing one of the following Right click on a camera in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select Properties from the context menu Right click on a camera in any layout and select Propert
182. a Configuration dialog box See Section 6 3 8 The Time Server Tab for additional information and troubleshooting on configuring a time server 4 1 6 MxStatus Status Monitoring for Multiple MxControlCenter Computers MxStatus is a stand alone program that collects and distributes information about the monitoring status of MOBOTIX cameras Using MxStatus you can implement the Background layout example of a soccer stadium scenario described in Section 3 2 1 Displaying Video Content in Layouts f required see Note box below you can execute this program on one computer in the network Note that the program is installed in the same folder as MxControlCenter Running MxStatus is only required if you want to see whether specific or all MOBOTIX cameras are actually monitored on more than one MxControlCenter workstation MxStatus is not required if you are using only one MxControlCenter workstation MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 5 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Starting MxStatus Since MxStatus is part of the MxControlCenter installation no additional setup is required Do the following to manually start MxStatus e Open a command prompt On the Windows desktop click on Start gt Run Enter cmd and click on OK e Navigate to the MxControlCenter program folder usually C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC e Enter
183. a MOBOTIX Live DW camera or a camera from a third party manu facturer This element is basically a live video on a demand window that is normally hidden Live icon IC When the camera detects an alarm it auto matically shows the live stream Shows the live video stream of a camera but with reduced frame rate and optimized resolution to save bandwidth These windows Preview DW are typically used for video sources that are attached via low bandwidth network con nections This element is used to play back recordings Player DW from one video source using the buttons of the Player sidebar panel i This element plays back a specific file server Fi ial DW structure as recorded by a MOBOTIX camera p an MxServer or exported by MxControlCenter Shows the location viewing direction and whether or not the MOBOTIX camera is cur Status icon IC rently displayed on a monitor When clicking on an icon a different window can show the camera s live video stream for example DW Display window IC Icon BT Button BG Background layout X Multiple elements per layout 1 One element per layout O Not available MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 74 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Element Type Explanation Availability Config Shows the saved alarms from any camera that you click on in the alarm list The saved alarms are not displa
184. a web browser 2 Enter 127 0 0 1 in the address bar and press ENTER the web browser should now list the folders of the file server 3 Keep clicking on folder links until you see jpg files 4 Click on an 00001 jpg file 5 Add 2previewsize 320x240 amp quality 20 to the address in the address bar and press ENTER If the image changes accordingly the CGI module is working properly Using Different CGI Parameters in the Browser To test the CGI module in a web browser you need to specify recording parameters in the URL Syntax http lt URL gt lt folder path gt lt image file gt lt parameter gt amp lt parameter gt amp lt parameter gt amp Parameters can be single parameters or parameter value pairs Example http lt server gt lt camera folder gt lt event folders gt E00001 jpg previewsize 320x240 amp framerate 1 0 amp quality 20 amp noaudio Make sure that a camera has created atleast one recording Then copy the URL command example above into the address bar of the web browser as a whole without blanks or spaces between the parameters replace lt server gt by the corresponding server name MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings 2 amp 5 3 9 6 lt camera folder gt by an existing folder name of a camera and lt event folders gt by the folder structure The following rules
185. a width of 160 pixels Cna patana each Width 3 Columns 160 pixels 490 pixeis The total width of the definition can be based on the available screen resolution for example 1920 2560 pixel width The total width of the grid definition is determined and displayed according to the specified number of columns layout width in pixels x columns times 160 pixels The width is always a whole number and a multiple of 160 pixels ds s ds l S S S S 3 Enter the grid window definition in the text box see also the Grid Windows table ds u u ds u u below The preview window shows the resulting layout structure as you type MxControlCenter will initially place an element in the row to the right whenever pos sible provided that enough space is available in the layout If this is not the case MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 170 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration the element will be placed in the next row with sufficient space This means that large elements may be placed in a new row at times while small elements are added to any unused areas at the top of the layout The grid definition strings can be separated by spaces commas or line breaks 4 Make sure the resulting layout meets your specifications and save it by clicking on the Save button The new layout is now available in the Grids sidebar panel
186. a with one lens Motion Detection Action of sensing a movement within a particular area MOBOTIX cameras use algorithmic methods to detect changes from image to image in predefined areas while taking into account preset conditions If a camera detects a movement it signals an event and triggers an alarm M JPEG Abbreviation of Motion JPEG Video compression method where each individual image is compressed separately as a JPEG image Unlike MPEG the quality of M JPEG recordings is not dependent on movement within the image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 375 396 MPEG Motion Pictures Expert Group Standard for compressing and saving image and video data resulting in quality loss Originally created for playing entertainment content on PCs MPEG concentrates on displaying still image material and compromises the quality of moving image material in order to increase the transmission speed MPEG 4 Part 10 A standard for video compression same as H 264 MxControlCenter MOBOTIX video management software for professional control of mid sized and large camera networks MxEasy MOBOTIX video management software for small and compact camera networks of up to 16 cameras MxPEG MOBOTIX developed protocol for compression and storage of image and video data with minimal network load and high image quality The MxPEG ActiveX control allows video and audio data from
187. ab contains the following sections E3 Camera Configuration aoe x E RVE S O amp Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audio Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytics Name aq Microphone J axis 1 amp Audio input On v main gate B S p E north gate j Sensitivity High sensitivity eastgate aker Parking 1 ss 2 mx10 9 42 99 n ai Audio output on at Volume o xl Lo cance MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 3 2 5 3 9 6 This tab of the Camera Configuration allows selecting several video sources Microphone e Audio input Controls the camera microphone On Off e Sensitivity Controls the sensitivity of the camera microphone Low Medium High Speaker 2 e Audio output Controls the camera speaker On OM e Volume Controls the volume of the camera speaker 6 3 6 The Events Tab Video motion detection is a software feature of the MOBOTIX cameras that recognizes movements between two consecutive images of the live video stream The camera uses intelligent algorithms and the values of the pertinent parameters to decide when to trigger the VM Video Motion event You can define the video motion VM windows and set related options on this tab The MOBOTIX cameras support two sets of video motion windows Video Motion 1 and 2 where ea
188. ackup file and starts uploading the software MX V3 4 5 18 a ene GN Li0n 1 Bae gt MX V3 5 2 23 r3 W Reading part 10f8 MXx v3 5 2 23 r3 part mx10 2 1 43 gt MXK V3 5 2 23 r3 satsin MX V3 5 2 23 r3 EN mx10 3 94 200 gt MXV3 5 2 23 r3 W Reading part 1of8 e Finally the Update Assistant reboots the cameras and shows the status behind the software version Move the mouse over one of the status icons to get more information 110n 1 Be MX V3 5 2 23 13 CY mx10 2 1 43 MX V3 5 2 23 3 Eih MX V3 5 2 23 13 mx10 3 94 200 MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 246 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Camera Status and the Update Log MX V3 5 2 23 r3 Q During the update process the Update Log tab of the Camera Information panel shows the MX V3 5 2 23 r3 amp messages that are returned by the camera Since these are rather technical Update Assistant shows the status of the software update behind the camera version vov3 s 2 23d O g Update OK The software upload has been successfully applied and the camera has rebooted properly P Update failed An error occurred while uploading or installing the software If this happens the application shows the Update Problem dialog with the contents of the update log to inform you about the problem Make sure that you are uploading the proper version for this camera and try to update the camera aga
189. age MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 212 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Setting the Basic Configuration Once you have activated MxAnalytics in the Basic Configuration sub tab enter further settings according to your requirements You can check the effect of the settings made by visualizing the motion detection in the camera s live image via the Visual Configuration sub tab The sub tab is structured into the following sections General Settings Arming The Activate option must be selected in order to run the video motion analysis Configure MxAnalytics storage We recommend setting up MxAnalytics after activation and then configuring storage of the data generated See Setting Up Storage for information on how to configure this Time table profile If the video motion analysis is only be used during specific times for example Monday to Friday 4 p m to 7 p m it is possible to set the camera to use an appropriate time table There are several predefined time tables available Switch to the browser to create a new time table Minimum luminous intensity Image analysis is disabled if the current illumina tion falls below the set value Detection Settings Installation height Installation height of the camera to the floor in centimeters It is important to set the value accurately to correctly detect the moving objects The height should
190. ail message to Mail settings Event Cache V Enable fast event search requires event cache Network cache size 64 MB Clear Cache en Warning Sounds e On connection loss Plays back a system sound or a sound file over the computer speakers if MxControlCenter loses the connection to one of the cameras listed in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar Error Display 2 e On connection loss Shows an error message or a graphics file instead of the camera image if MxControlCenter loses the connection to one of the cameras listed in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar e On latency timeout Shows an error message or graphics file if the following is true for the latency time between capturing the image by the camera and displaying it on the monitor Ifthe latency exceeds the Maximum latency time MxControlCenter starts mea suring the time span during which this is the case If this time span surpasses the value specified in Maximum overdue time MxControlCenter executes the latency error display specified in this group box MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 305 396 e Automatic stream recovery If this checkbox is activated MxControlCenter automati cally tries to recover after the occurrence of a latency timeout and resumes showing the video stream from the video source
191. allows applying different settings for different video sources Once you have defined the desired settings you can click on the Image post processing bal button to activate or deactivate post processing for the selected video source in a layout ED yellow frame Post processing does notchange the actual video data delivered by the video source live or recorded it only changes the way MxControlCenter displays the video Automatic Image Distortion Correction MxControlCenter automatically applies distortion correction in newer camera models to fix the distorted view caused by wide angle lenses Newer cameras include information on the lens type in the video stream so MxControlCenter can automatically determine the proper correction setting If this does not work the camera is too old and you need to manually set the lens type to ensure proper correction Manual Lens Selection for Distortion Correction below A perfect example of where this distortion correction feature is used is in a ceiling mounted Q22M camera whose 180 lens captures hemispherical images Manual Lens Selection for Distortion Correction In addition to the options described in Section 3 2 9 Using the Virtual PTZ Functions on f gf Live Images for correcting the distortion of currently displayed images in the PTZ Control Ebe B i sidebar panel the Image Processing dialog box can also be used to manually set the Settings lens typ
192. alog from the MxControlCenter menu Tools gt Update Assistant or start it as a stand alone application from Start gt Programs gt MOBOTIX gt MxControlCenter in Windows The table below gives an overview over the differences between the two components Software Update Downloads Assistant List the camera and application software on the update x x server Download and install MOBOTIX application software X X Download the camera software and retrieve the correspond x x ing release notes Provide access to the download options proxy server automatically checking for updates upon launching X X MxControlCenter Launch Update Assistant for automatic installation of cam x era software MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Update Assistant Software Updates and More 2 3 9 3 96 Software Update Downloads Assistant Automatically download and install software to one or more x cameras Back up the configuration of one or more cameras X Restore the configuration of one or more cameras from 7 x previous backups Using the backup restore mechanism apply the configura E x tion of one camera to many others as a whole or in parts Maintain camera lists that are independent of specific MxControlCenter installations to accomplish all of the above S x tasks Section 5 1 10 Using Update Assistant as a Stand Alone Application 5
193. amera e g Bosch AutoDome Siemens Speed Dome connected to the frame grabber card and a serial interface of the computer Analog camera connected to the frame grabber card MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras 2 73 3 9 6 e When using analog cameras Installed and configured IDS Falcon QuattroPro frame grabber card Installed IDS Falcon QuattroPro drivers Installed Video for Windows driver automatically installed with MxServer e MxControlCenter on a client computer with proper configuration for the relevant analog IP camera for controlling the pan tilt and zoom features Section 5 4 3 integrating Analog Third Party PTZ Cameras and Section 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras respectively The Falcon QuattroPro frame grabber card has four inputs channels but you should only connect at most two analog cameras When using two cameras with the same frame grabber card the frame rate is limited to 12 5 frames per second for each camera You can also install more than one frame grabber card in a computer However we advise against this as only low frame rates would be possible We recommend using multiple computers with one Falcon QuattroPro card each and at most two connected analog cameras each for large installations If a high frame rate is required more than 12 5 fps each analog camera
194. amera from the context menu The settings for Instruction File Preferred Layout and Reference Image are per camera settings Setting an Audio Path By default MxControlCenter sends sound i e announcements to the selected camera which plays back the sound on its own speaker Setting the audio pathto a different camera uses the external speaker of that camera instead of the selected one When setting the audio path to a different camera MxControlCenter always uses this audio path camera to output the audio sent by the MxControlCenter computer As a consequence the users of the system do not need to know which camera to select in order to make an announcement The following scenarios are possible e Groups of cameras in a layout have the same audio path camera Clicking on any camera in a group yellow frame will use the assigned audio path camera for the announcement e All cameras in the layout have the same audio path camera including the audio path camera itself Regardless of whether or not you have selected a camera in the layout any audio announcement will be output using the assigned audio path camera To set an audio path for a camera do the following e Right click on the camera and select Properties from the context menu e Click on the Display tab e Select the camera to use as audio path camera in the Audio path dropdown MxControlCenter will now use the audio path camera to play back the sound sent from
195. amera windows with each layout name having a Live postfix e Create the same layouts with player windows with each layout name having a Player postfix Grouping Cameras in Layouts If the system uses more cameras you should first try to create groups of cameras that are at the same location or that are fulfilling the same fasks Note that the following list contains only examples that are supposed to pique your imagination e Grouping by location All cameras at the West gate of the factory go in one group all cameras at the East gate go in another group All cameras overlooking the parking lot go in one group MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 7 g 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration All cameras that are monitoring the foyer and the elevators go in one group All cameras in the West wing of the building go in one group e Grouping by task All cameras that are controlling doors from the outside go in one group All indoor cameras go in one group All cameras that have specials tasks e g server room access machine monitor ing go in one group Again these are only examples and you may have to combine the ways of grouping the cameras or you need to find a totally different way of grouping the cameras Once you have identified the groups you can start creating the layouts by putting one group
196. amic Host Configuration Protocol Allows a server to automatically assign devices in the network with the appropriate configuration including the IP address DNS server and gateway as opposed s fixed IP addresses on the individual network devices DNS Abbreviation of Domain Name Service Allows the domain names of servers on the Internet e g www mobotix com to be linked resolved to their corresponding IP addresses e g Dome Camera Most often refers to cameras with a round and compact design The lens can be freely positioned and is protected by a transparent dome shaped plastic housing DSL Abbreviation of Digital Subscriber Line Denotes a fast Internet connection capable of providing bandwidth of up to 16 Mbps for a typical household DualDome Dome camera with two lenses and image sensors such as the MOBOTIX D12D These lenses can deliver wide angle and telephoto images independently of one another DVR Abbreviation of Digital Video Recorder Commonly describes a dedicated computer with at least one harddisk that is used to store the video and audio data generated by analog or digital cameras MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 72 396 M xCc User Manual MOBOTIX Glossary DynDNS Abbreviation of Dynamic DNS or DDNS Dynamic Domain Name Service Similar to DNS this links domain names e g with IP addresses whereby the IP addresses may change at
197. an analog camera into MxServer do the following e Make sure that MxServer is running e Click on File gt Configure in the menu to show the configuration interface in the web browser e Select an available Falcon Channel from the list e Activate this channel and adjust the camera configuration as required Configure channel BOSCH Autodome IDS analog FalconQuattro Activate this channel YES NO Image quality 70 7 Video standard PAL NTSC SECAM Image size VGA 640x480 X Clip Scale scale v Channel IP address 0 0 0 0 Channel name BOSCH Autodome e The default Channel IP address 0 0 0 0 listens to all IP addresses of all network interface cards NICs of this computer Only change this setting if you have several NICs installed on this computer and you want MxServer to listen only on a specific NIC e Write down the assigned port number e g 1132 red frame in figure e Enter a Channel name that describes the camera s purpose or location To access the camera in the web browser you need to know the IP address of the MxServer computer and the port that connects to this channel In this example the correct address for accessing the camera in the browser would be http lt IP address of MxServer gt 1132 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Channels System state iene channels Analog Falcon 1 0 KOCOM Analog Falcon i 1 2
198. an be defined very flexibly the searches of your system are most likely different from the examples above Make sure that you have access to the documentation of your system so you know how to use the predefined searches Creating an Ad Hoc Event Search Apart from the predefined event searches mentioned in the last section there is one additional event search named Search This is an empty search without any criteria so when you click on this search for the first time you will only see a blank search results panel If the properties bar see figure below is not visible click on the separator at the top of the search results area and drag it downward Sources From 3 Daysago v 6 00AM Sort By Date Time v Reload Automatically v Search mode Until Now X Order Ascending A Reload now gt a Selecting the Video Sources e Click on the Sources button e Select one or more cameras Setting the Time Range for Searching e Click on the From dropdown and set the start time of the search e Click on the Until dropdown and set the end time of the search MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 123 396 Filtering the Event Search Results When MxControlCenter finds many events you may be interested in only specific types of events For instance you could limit your search to video motion VM events only e C
199. ant illumination Select this option if there will be no changes in illu mination in the environment to be analyzed for example in a windowless hall This option also allows you to follow objects that do not move for several seconds It has a positive effect on the frame rate as it generates a very low computing load Slow change in illumination This option is suitable for rooms with few win dows Changes in illumination occur gradually and are not distinct Quick change in illumination This option is particularly well suited for rooms prone to sharp illumination changes such as is the case in large windows The computing load is highest here which has a negative effect on the frame rate Shadow Link the illumination situation selected with a shadow detection method It is helpful to activate the first shadow detection method for unevenly structured or dark backgrounds Use the second shadow detection method for bright or finely structured backgrounds This can be set with one of three sensitivity levels The more sensitive the detection the more the image is cleansed of shadows However the likelihood that the object will be clas sified as a shadow increases Show detection areas Choose whether you would like to display the detection areas in the camera image Object Display Bounding boxes Specify the color for the bounding box surrounding the detected objects Track color Specify the color for object tracking
200. ant to open an extra window always shows the live video stream of this camera regardless of the display element type live player etc Select Open extra window if you want to show an extra window of the display element that has the same type as the original live player etc 4 3 6 Configuring MxControlCenter Remote Control and a Video Wall MxControlCenter offers remote control features for other applications devices using network messages TCP IP These messages are sent to a specific port on a computer running MxControlCenter MxControlCenter Remote Control Scenarios You can use the remote control features of MxControlCenter in the following scenarios e MxControlCenter computer remotely controls other MxControlCenter computers e g video wall e Third party systems remotely control MxControlCenter to show specific layouts or cameras e g a video wall in a traffic control center e Camera remotely controls MxControlCenter e g to add an alarm image to the alarm list even though the camera is not part of the current layout see Section 4 5 Configuring Alarms and Recordings Network messages are also used to trigger alarms in MxControlCenter For more information on this topic see Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras You only need to activate remote control if you want to remote control MxControlCenter from a different application or another instance of MxControlCenter running on a different
201. anual Index Getting started Update Assistant 240 Getting Started 152 Gigabit Ethernet glossary 372 Graphical user interface 65 Grid layout glossary 373 Grid layouts 24 Defining 167 Grids Sidebar panel Layout Manager mode 70 Group rights Editing 219 Groups 38 Creating 218 Editing 218 Users and group rights 218 GSM 2G glossary 373 GUI 65 H 264 AVC 10 H 264 glossary 373 HDTV glossary 373 Hemispheric cameras Selecting mounting position 62 Hidden MxControlCenter Configuring 194 HiRes glossary 373 Hub glossary 373 Icons Layout elements 73 Image compression glossary 373 Image post processing 80 Image post processing glossary 373 Images Printing 35 Image Settings Camera Configuration tab 314 Implementing Two man rule 220 Information Properties tab 308 Installations Exporting 234 Installing MOBOTIX application software 247 MOBOTIX MxPEG DirectShow Codec 154 MxControlCenter automatically 55 MxControlCenter Language Packages 153 MxRemotePreview on Microsoft IIS 7 283 MxRemotePreview with Apache Web Server 281 MxServer 272 System and initial operation 50 Integrating Third party analog PTZ cameras 267 Third party cameras using MxServer 271 Third party IP PTZ dome cameras 264 Introduction Display modes 83 MxServer 271 IP Network glossary 373 IP phone glossary 373 Issues Solutions 364 Joysticks Using overview 261 MOBOTIX AG e Security Visi
202. ard Press the HASH KEY to reset the zoom settings e File names Double click the MxcontrolCenter Setup exe file to install it e Cross references For more information on this topic see Section 3 1 Elements of the Application Window Note that you can click on such a cross reference in the PDF file to jump to the corresponding location in the text e Glossary entries Monitor with a Resolution of at least 1280x960 pixels Note that you can click on such a refererence in the PDF file to jump to the corresponding glossary entry e Web links For additional information see our website www mobotix com e Examples http 192 168 1 182 8001 fullscreen 1 minimizes MxControlCenter to the task bar Explanation of Boxes Safety Notices The safety notices in this manual are highlighted with the following boxes The box headings indicate the severity of the warning Make sure that you thoroughly read the information contained in this box and follow the instructions Failing to do so will result in damages Make sure that you thoroughly read the information contained in this box and follow the instructions Failing to do so may result in damages The text in this box is for your information MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 9 396 10 396 MxCC User Manual Hints and Explanations The text in this box provides helpful in
203. are indicated in the status bar at the bottom right hand corner Besides the standard display windows which contain the live images of a specific camera you can use other types of dis play elements in a layout e g player windows for displaying the recorded images of one or more cameras The alarm list shows the alarm images of all MOBOTIX cameras that are sending alarms to MxControlCenter You can also use this list to acknowledge new alarms For more information see Section 3 4 1 Visual Alarm Features and Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions The Navigator sidebar panel contains several sections which can be shown and hidden again by clicking on the show hide controls in the tree structure LAYOUTS Contains a hierarchical list of all existing layouts of an MxControlCenter installation Click on a layout to see its contents i e video sources see below on the display area of MxControlCenter The tree structure allows for grouping the layouts For more information see Section 3 2 2 Switching Layouts and Section 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts VIDEO SOURCES Shows all video sources cameras clips and storage devices that are known to this MxControlCenter installation Double click on a camera to open an extra floating window When configuring layouts you can pull the video sources directly onto the layouts For more information see Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sour
204. areas can be defined for interfering influences Movement analysis Yes Analysis of visitor flows including detection of direction of movement ene of direction and departing from sketched out paths Use of internal camera sensors Yes All camera sensors can trigger events number function dependent on camera model Logical combination of events Yes Event detection can be made dependent on preconditions Event Filter Yes Frequency of events per time period can lead to alarm or prevent alarm alarm only when a specific number is exceeded Activation of external systems sensors Yes Integration of e g alarm reporting systems smoke detectors light barriers possible via cameras MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX AG e Technical information subject to change without notice 1396 MxCC Performance Details 48 2 MxControlCenter Functions Alarming Visual alarm Yes Entry in alarm list immediate access to recording prioritizable alarms Acoustic alarm Yes ee sound or any sound files WAV format can be used including automatic repetition until alarm is acknowledged Remote activation Yes For example to alarm center police with direct activation via network message e mail with alarm image phone call Alarm acknowledgment Yes Including display of the point in time and
205. as Available video sources MOBOTIX and third party cameras e File server path This display window can be used to show the recordings of a video source on d file server or other storage medium This happens without requiring access to the video source that stored the recording allowing you to examine record ings stored on a NAS system of your customer for example You can play back the recordings of this element using the controls of the Player sidebar panel In addition you can set the size of the display window Available video sources File server paths In the Navigator in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Storage Devices gt Recording Folders section When added to a layout using drag amp drop recording folders are automatically added as file server paths e Status icon You can use this icon background layouts only to create overview layouts in which the icons indicate the viewing direction and image angles of the cameras This element also indicates the surveillance status of the camera using different colors i e whether an MxControlCenter computer is displaying the live image of the assigned video source MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 163 396 J Image sensor 1 Image sensor 2 Viewing drectiox 0 j Viewing drection 120 Focallength 32 n Focallengh 22 Apex ange 90 ft Apex angle 90 Name Nosthwest Tookip Nodhwest comer Diam
206. as used last and will use this view after a restart MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Display Modes of the Application Window 97 396 Using a View This procedure opens the selected view and applies its user interface configuration e Select View gt Saved Views from the menu e Click on the view you would like to use 3 3 3 Functions When the Application Window Is Minimized If you have reduced the application to the taskbar by clicking on the Minimize button of a ss Saar senate Ska the application window for example MxControlCenter will wake up if it receives an alarm At the same time the application requests an alarm image from the alerting camera that is added to the Alarm List If you need this feature and it does not work either MxControlCenter has not been set up to receive network messages or the cameras do not send network mes sages to the MxControlCenter computer or both see Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 98 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 4 How the Alarm Features Work Since MxControlCenter is most likely used in some kind of security context the alarm features are among the application s most important ones This means that you have to know how alarms are signaled and what
207. ature on Live image windows e Bitmap BMP images are usually larger than JPEG images the image informa tion in JPEGs is compressed As an example a QXGA image with 2048x1536 pixels uses 12 MB when saved as a BMP at 32 bit color depth but the same image as JPEG uses approx 240 kB without any visible loss in detail You should thus use JPEG images whenever possible MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com T c E vV Automatic Ritman RAAD 136 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Print to PDF 3 6 2 Printing Single Images Just like saving single images of recorded video footage as bitmap BMP or JPEG JPG file Section 3 6 1 Saving Single Images you can also print images directly from MxControlCenter If you have zoomed into an image to examine a particular section of the image more closely or you have used other post processing functions of MxControlCenter printing a single image will always print two images the modified image and the original image as stored by the MOBOTIX camera To print an image e Select the camera you want to use yellow frame e Ifyou want to print an image from a recording Make sure that the camera is in Player mode it shows a red recording icon in the top right corner Navigate to the image you want to export using the controls in the Player section of the sidebar
208. ave been found highlight them and add them to the system without creating a new layout When adding Snap Servers you can edit the properties in the same way as when adding MOBOTIX cameras see Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources e Create user names and passwords to access the Snap Servers e Configure the network settings Once the Snap Servers have been added to MxControlCenter they appear in the Navigator sidebar panel under VIDEO SOURCES gt Storage Devices MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 254 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features a Quick Setup xt cp Expert Setup 52 gt Browser 5 2 2 Configuring and Editing Snap Server Settings To modify the settings of a Snap Server open the Navigator sidebar panel and the Video Source gt Storage Devices section Then do the following 1 Right click on a Snap Server and select Configure from the context menu This opens the Configure Snap Server dialog 2 Seta Snap Server Mode by selecting one of these configuration methods Quick Setup This is the fastest Gamaagaw Ax method for configuring a Snap Server so that MOBOTIX cameras can use it as a storage location You only need to enter two pass words MxControlCenter will con figure the remaining settings automatically Open the tabs of the Expert Setup to see the settings preset by MxCon
209. avigator sidebar panel e Click on the Open extra window button This opens an additional live window of the active video source in a layout as indicated by the yellow frame Once MxControlCenter shows the window you can move it to any location on your com puter s desktop even to a second monitor When resizing the images of the displayed video source are scaled automatically regard less of the actual image size To return to the original size of the displayed video source right click into the extra window and select the Restore original image size command from the context menu To close the extra window simply click on the window s Close button or press the ESC key when the window is active MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 77 396 Double clicking on a camera window by default always opens an extra five window of the video source you clicked on Note that double clicking on a video source can also be set to other options see the Options gt View gt Mouse gt On double click dropdown If your MxControlCenter installation behaves differently please ask your system administrator for assistance 3 2 4 Using Sequencers to Automatically Switch Cameras or Layouts The MxControlCenter sequencers are used to automatically switch between cameras or layouts at specified intervals The MxControlCenter sequencers work on
210. b to change this setting MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog Column Provides Access to Remark Change Same options as on O arming Arming status of a video source Recording tab po l Same options as on Recording status of a video source Recording tob po Audio recording status of a video Same checkbox as on source Recording tab Status of individual event triggers of Mode Recording mode of a video source Alea ok po Recording Target Recording tab Information only Codec for live stream and recording MxPEG M JPEG 3 Same options as on All available resolutions image Settings tab Ea a l Same options as on Quality JPEG quality image Settings tob o Same options as on Activation status of video source s Same options as on Activation status of video source s Same options as on microphone Audio tab Activation status of the Microphone MI event D In video source s Properties of dialog O Can be changed in Overview tab T Use tab to change this setting MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 4 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 3 2 The Image Settings Tab This tab contains the following sections Camera Configuration loes E QRDE S O amp Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audio Events Netw
211. biaband e Sensitivity Video tronic e Select Video Source gt Properties from rast Patche Provitek the menu Joystick controk Provitek PT2 Provitek PT3 e e Provitek PT4 e In the Properties of dialog click on Pelco D the PTZ Rotor tab e Select the appropriate protocol from the Type dropdown Control over the Pan Tilt Zoom functions in MOBOTIX cameras is identical whether the user controls the PTZ functions using a joystick or the PTZ Control panel in the sidebar No further configuration is necessary MOBOTIX cameras are using the mechanical pan tilt actions of the heads i e right left and up down respectively but the zoom actions are carried out by the camera using the various software zoom functions Setting the Pan Tilt Head Sensitivity The sensitivity settings are provided for AsessData information osplsy PTZRotor Videotronic Provitek and VPT 42 pan itilt Type vPTa2 z heads Sensitivity Noma x Fast Patch pau The settings in this dropdown change the 0ystick controt Syponensal Ultra short behavior and the speed of a pan tilt head in relation to the movements of the mouse or the joystick The joystick model and the skills of each individual user can have an influence on the ideal sensitivity Therefore we recommend conducting a field test to determine the best setting Using Fast Patch The Fast Patch setting lets pan tilt heads move faster and more precisely f
212. bilities for playing back the recorded audio video data This section presents the different mechanisms you can use fo find relevant video clips to examine their contents and to check the data integrity Before we start examining the different ways to play back recordings however let us take a brief look at the types of recording offered by the MOBOTIX cameras Snapshot Recording Event Recording Continuous Recording MOBOTIX cameras basically provide three modes for recording video data e Snapshot Recording When the camera detects one of the activated events it creates an alarm and records the alarm images as individual j pg images without audio The images are stored as an image series based on pre alarm images the alarm image itself showing the event that triggered the alarm and post alarm images e Event Recording This recording mode is also based on the camera s event triggers to start recording but records MxPEG clips mxg files that can include the audio channel of the camera microphone provided the camera microphone has been activated This is the default recording mode e Continuous Recording Stores continuous video and audio data as MxPEG clips Recording usually uses reduced frame rates e g 2 fps and the camera can auto matically increase the frame rate when the camera detects an event Continuous recording is only available if you have sufficient storage capacity on an SD CF card or file server For mor
213. bnets or be part of a logical network Example lf you connect a MOBOTIX camera with factory defaults to the same switch as your computer both network devices are running on the same physical network However the two devices are most likely using different logical networks or subnets e Computer IP address 192 168 1 31 e Camera IP address 10 9 123 45 This means that they cannot talk directly to each other MxControlCenter however can find the cameras and can reconfigure them for the same logical network as your computer see Section 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter If the MOBOTIX cameras are properly connected see Section 2 2 Power Supply and Network Connection of Cameras they should appear together with the existing video sources in the Add Video Sources dialog lf MxControlCenter does not find any cameras i e the list of video sources remains empty you should check the settings of the Windows Firewall on your computer if the firewall is blocking MxControlCenter you need to allow connections to and from the application In case you are not allowed to change these settings on your computer please contact your system administrator Make sure that the cameras have been set up according to the camera s user manual and are running properly MxControlCenter automatically finds MOBOTIX cameras and Snap Servers Other video sources need to be added manually using the Add button MOBOTIX
214. browser should prompt you for access data user name and password Test all other cameras that are to accessed remotely using the appropriate ports see above Deactivate the remote configuration of your router if you had activated this feature before MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS 2 5 9 3 96 Adding a Remote Camera in MxControlCenter To add a remote camera using DynDNS proceed as described in Manually Adding Video Sources To The List of Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources Instead of an IP address enter the DynDNS name of the router and the corresponding port of the camera Descriptive name of the camera DynDNS name of the router Address mycamera dyndns drg F Secure connection SSL Camera port on the router bypass Proxy Username remote user User name and pass word for accessing the camera Password eeesecee Storage location Via camera Sa Name Descriptive name for easy identification of the camera Back door in this example Address mycamera dyndns org Port 8001 User name User name for accessing the camera remote user in this example Password Password for the user name If everything has been configured properly the status icon changes to green B and MxControlCenter shows a preview image for th
215. button in the Player sidebar the button turns yellow once all video sources are in Player mode Then activate the Syne checkbox to enable synchronized playback The entire playback now follows these rules e The timeline starts at the first available recording and ends at the last available recording e MxControlCenter shows the first available recording of any camera in the layout e ifthe Player sidebar panel is visible MxControlCenter moves the current position indicator to the first available recording e Clicking on one of the playback buttons starts playing back the timeline i e every Player win dow starts playing back its contents when the current time matches the start of the recording e Time gaps in the virtual timeline are skipped 10 11 2010 06 02 40 044 if they are longer than 10 seconds with date il j time boxes indicating the start and the end of the gap see figure to the right Kontoservite g10 11 2010 06 01 48 278 Cal The Player mode for all video sources button will only stay pressed if MxControlCenter finds at least one recording for each of the live windows To export some or all of the video data you can use the export functions Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 5 3 96 Example Let s expand on
216. cal archive can be played back just like the event searches Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches To play back clips from the Local Archive e In the Navigator sidebar panel open the LOCAL ARCHIVE section e Click on one of the clips in any one of the folders MxControlCenter loads the clip in the display area and opens the Player sidebar panel You can now use the player controls to find the images you are looking for Editing the Folder Structure Folders in the LOCAL ARCHIVE section of the Navigator wera sidebar panel help finding clips later on You can therefore i sE create new folders move folders up and down or onto other Live Recordings folders to create subfolders In addition you can rename 4 Suspicious and delete folders with the exception of the Live Recordings bs March 23 folder which only stores the recordings when clicking on the corresponding button MxControlCenter shows the stored clips in the display area when you click on one of the folders MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 132 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 5 12 Checking the Data Integrity of Recordings If you intend to use recorded video content in a court of law you need to make sure that the recordings of the cameras have not been manipulated MOBOTIX cameras can digitally sign the video sequences at the time of recording using public key cryptography s
217. can trigger the corresponding alarms Traditional alarm systems can be armed using a key switch or by entering a code on a keyboard MOBOTIX cameras can be armed using a software switch a key switch other systems e g an alarm system or automatically using weekly schedules AVC Video Abbreviation of Advanced Video Coding AVC Video is a standard for video compression same as H 264 Auto Grid Automatically generated Layout used for displaying the live images from all cameras Background Layout Layouttype in MxControlCenter which shows cameras and camera icons on a background image e g the floor plan of a building In contrast to a Grid Layout you can place cameras and icons at any position on the background image Bandwidth Describes the capacity of a network connection Bandwidth is commonly measured in kilobits per second short kbit s also kbps for slower connections modem ISDN GSM 2G in megabits per second short Mbit s also Mbps for fast UMTS 3G Fast Ethernef and in gigabits per second short Gbit s also Gbps for superfast connections Gigabit Ethernef Bonjour French for hello is a technology developed by Apple based on the Zeroconf protocol Bonjour is a method for network devices to automatically advertise and detect services on IP networks For example you can find a printer or a network camera on the local network without knowing the exact IP address of the device you are lookin
218. ccurred near a specific date or sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri time Sat Available recordings Enter a search date in the left field and a search time in the right field If you click on the down arrow of 2 29 30 the left field you can selecta date from the calendar that pops up see figure Today Clicking on Go to starts searching for the recording that is closest to the date time you specified Playing Back Events Now that you have found the events you have been looking for you can use the playback buttons Navigating the Recordings in this section to play back the recorded video of the selected video source While playing back the Current date time field in the Player sidebar panel serves as global playback time When you stop the recording at any given time to switch to the next camera MxControlCenter automatically sets the current position of the next camera MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 113 396 to the playback position of the previous camera If there is no recording available at exactly this date time MxControlCenter selects the event that is closest to the selected date time The Current date time field then assumes the date time of the current event Switching All Windows to Player Mode The Player mode for all video sources button in the Player sidebar switches all live video sources of
219. ces Section 3 2 3 Using Extra Windows to Display Video Sources and Section 4 3 5 Configuring Extra Windows EVENT SEARCHES Contains all predefined event searches by default this section only contains one Search Click on one search select video sources and set the MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Elements of the Application Window 67 3 96 time frame to find the events Event searches also include Post VM searches which allow searching movements in the recordings of one video source For more information see Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches and Section 3 5 9 Using Post Video Motion Detection in Recordings LOCAL ARCHIVE This section serves two purposes First you can drag amp drop 4 LOCAL ARCHIVI results from event searches see above into your own folder structure within the ji e local archive Second the local archive stores the video stream from the current tenes camera when you using the live recording feature In both cases MxControlCenter stores the recordings in a local folder i e not in any storage location that is controlled by a camera and thus prevents deletions by the camera For more information see Storing Entire Events in the Local Archive in Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches Section 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature and Section 4 3 4 Configuring Live Recording and the Local Archive e
220. ch set can contain several video motion windows This tab contains the following sections E Camera Configuration olo eS Np E fa E HQE S O amp Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audo Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytics Name Video Motion 1 Video Motion 2 disabled asi Image Sensors main gate J Enable VM Event 1 ay Fr Detect video motion on both sensors east gate Display VM veindows in current live mage sec south gate When armed Hide Show Disable detection if fumination drops Parking 1 During an event Hide Highlight below the selected level mx10 9 42 99 J Display window IDs Left Sensor Off Right Sensor zj man entrance Downtown office O back door MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 2 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference This tab of the Camera Configuration allows selecting several video sources Note that the right sensor is always the default image sensor this is true for all dual cameras except the D14D 180 which always shows both image sensors Some of the settings shown in the dialog in the Image Sensors section and the Sensor Control section are only available for Dual camera models with exeption of the D14D 180 model Video Motion 1 2 ay Enable VM Event 1 2 Activates the corresponding set of video motion windows Show Frames These options c
221. ches MxControlCenter without parameters MxNoSave Does not show a dialog box to save changes upon closing the application MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxControlCenter Start Parameters 335 396 General Rules for Using Start Parameters One or more start parameters can be used as a comma separated parameter block The following rules apply Since version 2 5 1 it is not necessary to observe the sequence in the List of MxControlCenter Start Parameters table from top to bottom lf there are several parameters separate them using commas Spaces are notallowed Enter the comma between the parameter block and configuration file without a space The configuration file cannot be read if the comma is missing The parameters in the List of MxControlCenter Start Parameters table are case sensitive You must observe case sensitivity otherwise the parameters will not be recognized If a specific configuration file is to be used for this shortcut enter a command and the file name afferthe start parameter block see example in section Adding Start Parameters to a Shortcut If no start parameters are to be used enter a blank and the name of the configura tion file after the program call The parameters on the List of MxControlCenter Start Parameters table must not be used as file name of a configuration file Examples for Automatically
222. chive The zipped archive consists of the Mx Configuration folder that contains a camera list and individual camera configuration files based on the camera name Contents of the Mx Configuration folder CameraList mxu camera list mx10 8 82 206 2014 04 29 cfg camera configuration file mx10 3 94 200 2014 04 29 cfg camera configuration file mx10 8 195 72 2014 04 29 cfg camera configuration file Restoring Camera Configuration Settings from a Backup File Select one or more cameras in the camera list 2 Select a backup configuration file cfg or backup archive zip Select Camera gt Upload Settings from the menu press CTRL ALT U or click on the Upload Settings button Select the configuration file you want to upload in the Open Configuration File dialog Click on the down arrow of the Upload Settings button and select the configura tion file you want to upload In the Upload Camera Settings dialog select the configuration sections you would like to upload to the cameras Upload Camera Settings Upload configuration files to 2 cameras Please select the sections of the configuration that should be updated Sections for Updating v Security Network vV Transfer Profiles IP address and host name V Time Tasks V File Server 7 Time Tables v Logos V Audio V Page language softbuttons V Image Control V Event Control er even tere rere LE V Video Motion windows T Selec
223. chive of the entire folder structure which can be password protected This file format is ideally suited when transfer ring the video by e mail or FTP See Step 3 Set the Video Format and the Export Options below for information on how to set the corresponding options for this export format Format for Windows Media Player Users If you want to create a video that requires very little adjustment on the target computer you can create an MxPEG video To view the MxPEG mxc file in Windows Media Player you only need to install the codec on the target computer Section 4 1 4 Installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG DirectShow Codec When using MxPEG in Windows Media Player you cannot check the data integrity How to Export a Video from Camera Recordings The entire process of creating a video from camera recordings involves the following steps 1 Find the events that contain the video sequences you want to export 2 Add entire events or parts thereof to the Export List dialog Note that you can add the video sequences of different cameras and export the entire contents of the export list as one video later on 3 Set the format for exporting depends on the operating system of the target computer and the intended use of the video 4 Export the contents of the Export List dialog optionally checks the data integrity Step 1 Find the Events for Exporting If you want to find video sequences you want to include in the exported vide
224. click on OK or Apply in this dialog The information entered in this dialog is only used by MxControlCenter to accessthe camera or its recordings and to set other camera specific details Changing items in this dialog will not change anything on the camera 6 2 1 The Access Data Tab This tab contains the following parameters Properties of Main gate Name Main gate AA MOBOTIX Access Data Information Display PTZ Rotor Address 10 9 42 99 Port 80 Secure connection SSL User name admin Password eessesece Access recordings Via camera e Address Contains the IP address of the camera e Port Contains the port number of the camera default is 80 e Secure connection SSL Activate this checkbox if the camera uses Secure Socket Layer default port is 443 e User name Enter the user name required for accessing the camera e Password Enter the password required for accessing the camera MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 O 8 3 9 amp MxCC User Manual Reference e Access recordings By default MxControlCenter retrieves the stored video sequences via the MOBOTIX camera Click on the Change button to use a different storage location as shown in Section 4 5 4 Configuring Where to Record 6 2 2 The Information Tab This tab contains the following information boxes Access Data Information Display PTZ Roto
225. computer MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 84 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Example Application Remote Controlled Video Wall In this example we will use an MxControlCenter workstation to remotely control other MxControlCenter instances running on client computers with one monitor each The work station uses command buttons on a background layout to switch the layouts that have been defined on the client computers see figure below MxCC workstation Client 1 Client 2 Client 3 Client 4 192 168 1 201 192 168 1 202 192 168 1 203 192 168 1 204 Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 185 396 Configuring the Remote Control Functions of MxControlCenter Setting up the remote control functions of MxControlCenter involves the following steps 1 Activate and configure the remote control port in MxControlCenter 2 Read the list of remote control commands 3 Test the remote control 4 Configure the application device to send a remote command Step 1 Activate and Configure the Remote Control Port in MxControlCenter e Select Tools gt Options from the MxControlCenter menu e Click on the Remote Control tab e Inthe Remote Control box activate the Activate checkbox e Enter a port in the
226. computer and the camera Intercom mode Audio features are only available for cameras that support audio and on which the microphone and speaker have been activated If one or both of these buttons are gray the corresponding commands have not been activated If you need these commands you should ask your system admin istrator for assistance MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 80 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Playing Back Sounds on the Camera In addition to hearing and playing live audio streams the MOBOTIX cameras can play back sound files over the camera s built in speaker or the audio path To do so simply press the Play Sound button in the Softbuttons panel of the sidebar The camera plays back the preset sound file 3 2 7 Using the Camera to Switch Lights and Open Doors If a camera has been set up to switch lights or open doors you can use the buttons described in this section e Switch lights via camera on off Click on this button to activate the lights that are operated by the selected camera e Open door via camera Click on this button to open the door that is controlled by the selected camera If one or both of these buttons are gray the corresponding commands have not been activated If you need these commands you should ask your system admin istrator for assistance If the Switch lights via camera on off
227. count depends on the similarity of the sizes and shapes of the persons or objects in the image and how effectively they can be visually distinguished from one another and from the underlying surface or background For this reason it is not possible to count groups forming at entrances or cashiers using MxAnalytics Controlling Motion Detection Time Tables If the video motion analysis is only be used during specific times for example Monday to Friday 4 p m to 7 p m it is possible to set the camera to use a corresponding time table This provides an advantage by freeing up the full processing power of the camera in the remaining time for other security functions such as event controlled recording and makes more efficient use of the storage space available on the SD card MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxAnalytics 147 396 The movement data collected and saved with MxAnalytics based on the defined settings can be used in MxControlCenter for statistical analysis using special MxAnalytics evalua tions Evaluations for both counting lines and heat maps are available here Evaluating movement data is explained in the following section The necessary activation and set up of MxAnalytics on a Q24M camera and the creation of predefined MxAnalytics evaluations in MxControlCenter are outlined in Section 4 6 Configuring MxAnalytics 3 7 2 Calling Up Evaluat
228. ct Edit from the context menu and then set the new Element type e Todelete a display element right click on an element select Delete from the context menu and confirm the prompt Teels orang Hele SBoG HO lS sAeBelaseolaq s alo Drag amp drop video sources MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 173 396 Configuring Display Elements in Background Layouts You can configure a display element in the Edit Display Element dialog right click a display element and select Edit or Insert in the context menu Depending on the selected element type MxControlCenter shows different configuration options Edit Display Element Ea Remember last settings Cancel For more information about the different types of display elements for layouts see Section 4 2 2 Element Types Used in Layouts 4 2 5 More Options When Editing Layouts Setting a Start Layout 4 LAYOUTS 4 Overview Outside B Main Entrance You can use one layout of the MxControlCenter installation as start layout i e MxControlCenter automatically shows this layout when the program is launched In the LAYOUTS B west gate section of the Navigator sidebar panel the start layout is set H Parking in bold print see red frame in figure B Garage Entrance 4 aj Overview Inside To set the start layout B Reception B Elevators e Right click on a layo
229. cted part of the recording Click on the Add to Export List button the Export List dialog opens Er Repeat for all other sequences you want to add to the export list Ge Modifying the Start and Stop Positions of a Sequence in the Export List To adjust the beginning or end of a sequence that has already been added to the Export List proceed as follows e Select an item in the Export List dialog MxControlCenter highlights the item e Doone of the following Click in the date time fields in the Start Stop columns and change the figures Move the start stop indicators of the slider to the desired positions Changing the Order of the Video Sequences in the Export List The video sequences are always added at the end of the Export List dialog If you want to change the order of the sequences simply drag one or more sequences to a new position Use CTRL click or SHIFT click to select more than one item Drop the selected sequences at the position indicated by a thin horizontal line To sort according to one of the columns simply click on the column header Click again on the header to reverse the sort order Step 3 Set the Video Format and the Export Options You now are ready for setting the format of the video and some other export options provided the Export List dialog contains at least one scene The format of the exported video depends on the operating system of the target computer and the intended use of the video tab
230. cted record ings can still be corrected later using MxCC PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom Live and in the Recording The cameras can be moved by remote control and the images zoomed both via the virtual joystick integrated in the software and via a real connected joystick In MOBOTIX cameras this is always done using digital technology without moving components which makes the system particularly low maintenance i Hee Eoo Q Ha 9 90 as 0 Rs o Prensa q tJ ciji WA RI et an RD he ai gi p i a 4 z a D Q HG 960 as 0feRsoo om f f HE o00 Hi E frit 2 SS eg h CETAN T T E TEE EL So 4s WOLA Recorded video sequences can also be analyzed later using PTZ MxCC offers an intuitive virtual joystick for pan tilt zoom MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com High resolution images can be zoomed digitally entirely without a motor 38 396 Secure Handling of Sensitive Data A reduced display of MxCC is sufficient for many users large images and few control elements When an advantageous modern video monitoring solution is used which is to some extent even legally required special care must be shown in the use of the recorded data MOBOTIX has therefore integrated several important security functions in MxCC which ease the daily work of all users
231. d ask your network administrator for an IP address range start and end addresses a subnet mask and a default gateway Once you have obtained this information do the following e Activate the Use the following IP neomp scaer aa feeca address range option e IP address start Enter the first This computer accesses the following subnet s 10 0 0 0 192 168 0 32 address of the range Get IP address automatically DHCP e IP address end Enter the last Se ee anga address of the range this field is P adien start only active if you had selected more Sete than one camera in the Add Video Sources dialog ae e Subnet mask Enter the subnet sia atk mask V Store configuration in camera e Default gateway Enter the IP Co cancel address of the default gateway Now wait until MxControlCenter modifies the network settings of the cameras and restarts them The status of the reconfigured cameras changes from Different subnet yellow dot to OK green dot MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Launching MxControlCenter for the First Time 6 3 9 6 You can open the Configure Selected Cameras dialog box again for any video source Simply right click the video source you want to configure in the Add Video Sources dialog box and select Configure network from the context menu Generating a Layout MxControlCenter now shows the Create New Layout
232. d 11 mm focal length on the other hand deliver images just like a regular PTZ camera Setting up the display mode of a Hemispheric camera is a process that involves several steps It is also possible to set up the display mode in an S14D camera for both image sensors separately To do so select the view of the corresponding sensor with ALT click and enter the desired setting When mounted to the ceiling Hemispheric cameras actu ally deliver full 180 images of the area beneath this mode is called Full Image see right hand image below f Ceiling 4 Floor Ceiling mounted Q22M Full Image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 86 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Although the entire room is covered the resulting full image from the camera is not really suited for live viewing For this purpose the camera takes a section of the full image and zooms in to show an Image Area see right hand image below Camera or MxControlCenter FAnn Full Image Image Area slightly distorted As you can easily see from the right hand image above the blue line is bent i e the displayed image is slightly distorted when looking at an Image Area This is where automatic distortion correction takes over and produces a corrected image section this mode is called Area Corrected the blue line in the right hand image below 2 Camera or MxContro
233. d additional options 2 4 4 Saving the Initial Configuration Make sure that you save the initial configuration by clicking on the Save configuration button If you do not save the configuration manually MxControlCenter asks you before quitting the application MxControlCenter automatically saves the initial configuration file Mxcc ini inthe hidden Windows user folder e Windows Vista 7 C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming MOBOTIX MxControlCenter e Windows XP C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data MOBOTIX MxControlCenter MxControlCenter configuration files should not be edited manually When starting the next time MxControlCenter automatically uses the last configuration file For more information on the configuration files of MxControlCenter see Section 4 9 Working with MxControlCenter Configurations MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 64 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 USING MXCONTROLCENTER The previous chapter has shown how to install and set up MxControlCenter In this chapter you will learn how to work with MxControlCenter on a day to day basis You will get to know the application s user interface learn how to work with live cameras how the alerting features work how to search for events and alarms how to store print and export recorded videos and still images and how to use MxContr
234. d the CGI see Section 5 6 4 Testing the Web Server with MxRemotePreview MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings 2 8 3 3 Q 6 5 6 3 Installing MxRemotePreview on Microsoft Internet Information Server 7 1 Install the Microsoft Internet Information Server IIS on the Windows computer Open Server Manager and select Add Roles Select Web Server IIS Continue to press Next until reaching Role Services Under Application Development select CGI Make sure that IIS Management Console is selected this is not enabled on Windows 7 but on Windows Server 2008 Continue to press Next until installation is completed Open a web browser and enter http 127 0 0 1 to verify that the web server is running 2 Install the MxRemotePreview CGI module Create a folder named cgi bininC inetpub Copy the MxRemotePreview cgi exe file to this folder C inetpub cgi bin 3 Configure the Internet Information Server Open Control Panel gt Administrative Tools and double click on Internet Information Services IIS Manager In the Connections pane select the Default Web Site entry Click on Advanced Settings in the right pane opens the Advanced Settings dialog Change the Physical Path to the shared folder where the cameras are storing their recordings and click on OK
235. d time zone Select NTP RFC 1305 set time server Activate checkbox LED Setup LED Main Switch Set as required Add custom days holidays vaca Time lables Custom Days tions etc as required Profiles amp Options Add adjust time tables as required Change reboot time to uncritical Time Tasks Reboot camera time of day SOADUNONE pa Remove all unwanted softbutton definitions AI Items marked by an X can also be set using the Quick Installation wizard see below MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 344 396 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline A 5 2 Using the Quick Installation Wizard You can also use the Quick Installation wizard to complete some of the configuration tasks listed in the table above marked by an X in the QI column of the table above Start the Quick Installation from the cam era s browser interface Admin Menu gt Network Setup gt Quick Installation Do not change the suggested settings except on the following pages e Language Select the language for the browser interface e Factory Reset Activate Modify the current configuration e Public Access Settings Activate Deny public access e Country Settings Set the proper time zone MOBOTIX Q24 mx10 8 85 61 Live ime ag 25 fps Display Mode 4 Panorama Setup Menu Arm amp Record eM
236. dditional Rules for Assigning Video Sources to Grid Layouts Video sources already placed in the layout can be moved to another display window using drag amp drop When moving a video source to a display window that is already used the two video sources swap positions as soon as you release the mouse button as indicated by the swap mouse cursor and the green frame of the target window Dragging a video source from the Navigator sidebar panel to a display window that is already used replaces the original source with the dragged one You can drag amp drop multiple video sources to an empty layout keep the CTRL or SHIFT key pressed and click with the mouse to select multiple video sources MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 6 R 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration When dragging more video sources onto a fixed grid layout than the grid can actually hold MxControlCenter ignores the superfluous video sources This does notapply to auto grids since they automatically adjust to the number of dragged or appended video sources e By default the video sources in a grid layout are displayed with an aspect ratio of 4 3 The video sources can also be displayed with an aspect ratio of 16 9 However this is only recommended for single width grid elements u s m 1 h Otherwise parts of the image at the left and right of the image are grayed out
237. de in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 192 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 4 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Views The MxControlCenter Views called workspacesin some applications provide a convenient way to store different user interface configurations and to switch between them later on Note that you can store any combination of window display and scaling options in such a view What s in a View A view basically contains the current settings of the E save View As commands accessible from MxControlCenter s View menu When saving a view you can select what Name Gate Guard Please enter a name to create anew to include by activating deactivating the following a rele s existing options Include V Display Area Options Sequencer states scaling and grid e Display options Sequencer scaling and grid options VJ Application Window Areas options Title bar tool bar menu bar status bar e Window areas Show options menu title bar ee eee p Sa C etc sidebar and toolbar options Cana Example for Using Views In this example two views are used on one MxControlCenter installation a simple view for live monitoring only and the view of the store detective see example in Section 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature e Live monitoring only Reduced bare bones view with grid layouts that can be selected using the layout buttons in the toolbar as briefly descr
238. ded in camera address Remove protocol e g http from camera address Camera is running but does not show images Manageable PoE switch is supplying power but data connection on the port is deactivated Activate the data connection on the port Camera display window shows disconnected message Power supply of camera failed Check power supply of cam era Connection to switch failed Check camera and computer connection to switch Power supply of switch or switch itself failed Check power supply of switch and switch itself Browser does not show camera image but camera responds to PING Proxy blocks video stream Add camera IP address to proxy exceptions in browser Remote access to camera does not work Default gateway in camera not or incorrectly set Set proper default gateway in camera Port forwarding in router not or incorrectly set Correct port forwarding set tings of router DynDNS login of router failed Establish DynDNS functionality in router Update Assistant does not find any cameras Zeroconfig of cameras not enabled Update Assistant started as stand alone application for the first time Activate Zeroconfig on cameras Admin Menu gt Ethernet Start Update Assistant from MxCC or camera search in Update Assistant MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com
239. display of the alarm images from all cameras a double click opens the search that can be used to view and export any recorded alarm MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com A site plan is directly to four video windows h Practical Camera Layouts The highest priority of the MOBOTIX software developer is to make the daily work of people in the security industry as simple and effective as possible with the video management system and the cameras This involves above all an immediate and reliable recognition of unwanted situations and rapid reaction to all necessary measures for counteracting the danger MxCC therefore offers various possibilities for displaying the individual cameras and their images and videos in a particularly clear manner and adapted to the application The display possibilities can be prepared rapidly and easily with MxCC using the Layout Manager Background Layouts Building Plans with Integrated Cameras Images from real building plans individual floors in the building underground garage plans street maps or other maps with camera locations sales premises branch offices etc can be inserted in the display panel of the MxCC Layout Manager Pecorting Teels Help Glasealo FO0 The corresponding cameras from the video sources list are then positioned in the building plan as a video window or camera symbol This eliminates laborious and t
240. dium with all cameras as status icons see Element Types Used in Layouts below This officer constantly checks if all cameras are monitored MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 73 3 96 Element Types Used in Layouts Now that we know the basics of the different layout types we need to take a look at the different element types that can be used in layouts e Display windows are used to show live or recorded video streams of various sources Display windows are used in grid layouts see figure at the right background layouts and in extra floating windows e consare used to monitor the status of cameras for overview and security purposes to show the video streams on demand double clicking on an icon opens an extra window or to automatically show the camera image in case of an alarm Icons are only available in background layouts Status icon Live icon e Buttons can execute specific commands e g close all extra windows switch to different layouts or send remote control commands to other MxControlCenter com puters Buttons are only available in background layouts West gate The following table shows the individual layout elements grouped according to the type of video source they can display and their availability on grid background layouts Element Type Explanation Availability Config Shows the live video stream of
241. dows Firewall on the MxControlCenter Computer The remote control and alarm handling features of MxControlCenter rely on network messages IP packets that are sent from the cameras to the MxControlCenter computer A built in or third party firewall product can block incoming IP packets on the MxControlCenter computer and thus prevent the proper functioning of these features V Windows Firewall is helping to protect your computer Windows Firewall is on Inbound connections that do not have an exception are blocked Display a notification when a program is blocked Yes Network location Private network What are network location Proceed as follows to instruct the Windows firewall to allow inbound IP network packets through port 31754 according to the example in Section 4 5 Configuring Alarms and Recordings Note that you need administration rights in order to accomplish this task Windows XP e Open the Windows Control Panel Start gt Settings gt Control Panel e Double click on the Windows Firewall icon e Inthe Windows Firewall dialog click on the Exceptions tab and then on the Port button e Inthe Add a Port dialog enter a descriptive name e g MxCC Alarm Handling Port and the port number 31754 as in the example e Make sure that the TCP option is activated and click on OK e Close all open Firewall related dialogs and the Control Panel MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix
242. ds dialog E3 Wrong unavailable update server A wrong update server has been set in the Software Download section by default this is http update mobotix com Proxy required The proxy for accessing the update server has not been set up properly in the Software Download section The Camera Information Panel The Camera Information panel shows additional information about the last cam era you selected in the camera list Camera Information Gx Status Connected Model MOBOTIX Q24M Secure Note that this panel has two more tabs the sri 10 8 85 61 Update Log and the Preview tab Alt IP Host name main entrance e Update Log Shows the messages Software version MX V4 0 6 9 from the camera while uploading Resolution Custom Size 1024x384 software or settings Encryption Progress e Preview Shows a preview image of the last camera you selected in the camera list Update Log Preview Camera Information MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Update Assistant Software Updates and More You can detach the individual tabs of this panel by dragging the title bar of any outside of the application window To attach the tab again drag the title bar of the tab onto the panel again until the entire panel turns dark and then let go 5 1 4 Checking the Camera Connection Status Ifa camera is listed with the status Connection refused Pa
243. e MOBOTIX file server structure e Section 5 4 3 integrating Analog Third Party PTZ Cameras This scenario describes connecting live video streams from analog cameras to MxServer or an alterna tive application such as Axis Video Servers This includes setting up MxServer for continuous M JPEG streaming and recording in the MOBOTIX file server structure For additional information on digitalizing and storing video streams of analog cameras see Section 5 5 3 Connecting an Analog PTZ Camera to MxServer Some third party IP cameras can only deliver one video stream e g Axis M7001 If this is the case you need to decide if you want to either display the live video stream in MxControlCenter or just record it using MxServer Devices with such a limitation should be replaced as soon as possible by MOBOTIX cameras since they can handle multiple video streams and store their recordings autonomously 5 4 1 Using MOBOTIX Cameras with Pan Tilt Heads Pan Tilt Heads Supported by MOBOTIX e Provitek Provitek PT2 Provitek PT3 Provitek PT4 e PelcoD e Videotronic SN 15AH e VPT 42 RS232 RS485 configuration with VT protocol MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 262 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features An overview of the necessary steps for configuring a MOBOTIX camera in conjunction with a motorized pan tilt head is provided below More detailed informati
244. e Quick Installation wizard see below MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration 343 396 DiTel fore mAXe e Storage on External File Server Flash Device Available Storage Targets Storage Options Select storage target Set storage options as required E Mail Profiles Global Options Profiles amp Options Set global options as required Create e mail profile with adminis trator address for system storage failure another e mail profile for alarm notification if required Storage Failure Detection E Mail Select e mail profile with adminis trator address to notify in case of storage failure Error Notification E Mail Select e mail profile with adminis trator address to notify in case of critical error and after rebooting Speaker and Microphone Audio input Activate microphone and set sensitivity if not prohibited by law company regulations Audio output Activate speaker set volume test setting Announce network data Disable if this is a security risk SIP Client Settings Create SIP accounts as required Outgoing Calls Settings Phone Profiles Create phone profiles for outgoing calls as required Time and Date Time Zone Time Server Adjust automatically Select continent an
245. e Unlimited number of users and cameras no license fees bidirectional via IP e Individual user interface adaptable to each individual user analog and digia e Simplest installation and complete use on any standard PC AA e Convenient layout editor for integrating real building plans AEA e Integration of conventional network and analog cameras y with automatic switching of floor plans Exports recordings as AVI or Quicktime video with sound 60 172_EN_V2_04 2014 Third party Cameras Integration of analog amp digital PTZ domes Innovations Made in Germany yy The German company MOBOTIX AG is known as the leading pioneer in network camera technology and its Synchronized realtime viewing of several cameras decentralized concept has made high resolution video systems cost efficient MxCC MxEasy MOBOTIX AG D 67722 Langmeil e Phone 49 6302 9816 103 Fax 49 6302 9816 190 sales mobotix com Licence free Video Management Software www mobotix com e oe Jao o je es SB a o o o e ea o w o o o o o o kai a o o a o o o oe e Bs o a o ea w es o o o o o o o o o o o o o oe a e E e a o o o
246. e and allows setting a dif ferent location Besides folders on local or mapped network drives you can also use a UNC path e g myfileserver Logs MxCC MxControlCenter mx1 e User name If access to the path of the action log is protected enter the user name in this field e Password Enter the corresponding password in this field if required Archive Action Log amp e Every day MxControlCenter creates a new action log every day e Every week MxControlCenter creates a new action log every week e Every month MxControlCenter creates a new action log every month e When exceeding If the action log gets larger than the size specified here MxControlCenter creates a new action log and archives the old one MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Properties of Dialog 3 0O7 3 96 6 2 The Properties of Dialog The Properties of lt video source gt dialog displays information on how this video source is integrated into MxControlCenter To open this dialog select a video source in a layout yellow frame or in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel then right click and select Properties from the context menu or select Video Source gt Properties from the menu The Name field is available above the tabs You can use this field to set a different name such aS Main gate in the figure below This name will be used once you
247. e and more than 400 kilometers of shielded Cat 6 copper cable were installed This network simultane ously constitutes the perfect basis for an IP based high resolution video surveillance solution To fulfill the expectations for elite status UEFA requires a permanent video surveillance system both within and outside of the stadium The cameras must have a still image function and be connected to color monitors housed in the control room High Demands on the Video System The specifications for the Ukrainian MOBOTIX partner UNITOP responsible for the planning and installation of the video system contained the following minimum requirements e The recorded video material must permit identification of each individual visitor e Recording of high detail and thus high resolution images evidence in case of adverse incidents in the surveillance areas e Camera coverage of all entrances exits spectator stands access paths and wait ing areas elevators restaurants shops parking areas offices the museum and the server and equipment rooms MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 45 396 Complete Solution Using 528 MOBOTIX Cameras and MxCC After an intensive comparison with other providers the decision was clearly made in favor of a complete MOBOTIX high resolution decentralized and weatherproof camera system with the free MxCC video management software featuring integrated s
248. e corresponding password To do this activate the checkbox and select either the automatically created encryption password recommended or create your own password 4 6 2 Controlling Motion Detection Time Tables Optional As mentioned in the previous section video motion analysis can be permanently enabled or managed by a time table if for example you only want video motion analysis to be active during the opening hours of a store you must create a time table with the opening hours Then proceed to activate video motion analysis and select the time table with these opening hours Hint Limiting the analysis using a time table increases the accuracy of the results as objects outside the analysis time frame are not captured or evaluated You can set up a suitable time table in the browser 1 Select the camera in a layout and click Open camera in browser in MxCC 2 Open the Time Tables dialog in Admin gt Camera Administration in the browser interface of the camera Define a suitable time table 3 Next select this time table in MxCC in the MxAnalytics gt Basic Configuration tab to activate arming MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring MxAnalytics 217 396 4 6 3 Customizing the Report Profiles Used for Analysis Optional You can call up the movement and heat map evaluations as daily heat map reports or as weekly and monthly counting line r
249. e dialog are green If no other time server is available you can use one camera as a time server for all other devices See the camera s online help on how to do this Setting Up the Camera LEDs If you want to deactivate the camera LEDs or use special blinking patterns for all cameras you should do this now If you only need to deactivate the LEDs for some cameras you should do this when applying individual settings For further information see Section A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras Click on General Administration gt LED Setup and set LED Main Switch to Disabled or apply the settings as required Configuring the Time Tables Enter the custom days and set the profiles and options as required see the camera help for more information Configuring the Time Tasks Change the time for the Reboot camera time task to an uncritical time of day see the camera help for more information or disable it MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration 349 396 Deleting Unwanted Softbuttons If browser access to the cameras will be allowed for users later on you can delete any unwanted softbuttons in Admin Menu gt Page Administration gt Softbuttons It is recom mended to keep only the following softbuttons Admin Menu Setup Menu Multiwatcher UC Event Admin Menu Admin Menu Setup Menu Setup Menu Ar
250. e event search can be limited to the last 30 minutes and only for specific cameras Dual Control Prevents Uncontrolled Data Transfer By permitting a supervisor MxCC prevents unexamined data disclosure to third parties In this respect a supervisor e g company data protection officer must first activate the data export function by password entry and directly on the PC of the house detective User Logs Against Data Abuse In order to see which persons have used functions of MxCC at a specific time an authorized person can bring up the complete action logs of all registered users This makes it possible to see at a glance who has for example exported stored video data from the system Possible attempts of abuse can already be detected in advance Dead Man s Switch in the MxCC Toolbar Provides Staff Protection To be sure that a security control center is occupied and that the staff is not in danger an alarm is sent on request by email or phone call in case the deadman switch was not operated for an extended period MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Access rights can be provided especially simply and rapidly with a few clicks of the mouse The intelligent seemed unimagir Simple MOBOTIX Installation Automatic Installation You do not have to be a software specialist to set up MxCC An installation assistant guides you step by step All cameras in
251. e found in the emergency plans Positioning Video Sources in Background Layouts 1 Activate the Layout Manager see Activating evigater mir 4 LAYOUTS a F the Layout Manager in Section 4 2 Creating 2 TB Overview Outside and Editing Layouts H main Entrance B west gate 2 Select the layout you want to edit for example B Parking B Garage Entrance z Overview Outside or create a new back 4 ib Overview inside ground layout see Section 4 2 1 Creating B ee evators Layouts B Back Entrance 3 Select a background image jpg bmp R ee a gif in the bottom panel of the Layout vioro sources Cameras Manager for example Parking lot view Click Clips on Add Image to insert additional image files in senses the Background Images sidebar panel esii Background Images s 4 Confirm the system prompt The display area f hd tsa of MxControlCenter now uses the selected en background image mfa E RERE 5 Create a display window for a video source j E er ay using one of these methods eS a op Drag amp drop a camera or other video source a FA from the sidebar onto the display area by iina science default these video sources are shown in AddImage live display windows Right click on an existing display window select Insert from the context menu select an Element type and select a Video source See the Additional Rules for Editing Background Layouts
252. e information on how to set up the individual recording modes Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions 3 5 1 Example Scenarios One of the key features of a MOBOTIX video surveillance system is its high degree of flex ibility To illustrate some of the aspects of working with such a system we will be using the scenarios described in this section Live Monitoring with Simultaneous Recording In this scenario MxControlCenter is used in a soccer stadium The background layout shown below uses the plan of the stadium and its surroundings to show the location of four cameras using icons and four live display windows cameras positioned near the entrances On other layouts numerous live cameras are monitoring the spectators while the match is going on Before during and after a match the MOBOTIX cameras are providing live video streams and are also recording continuously MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 107 396 2 O G selasoulad sar F EFALTEIRE a o a N eee Live display windows Camera status icons Live display windows Two operators of the surveillance system are monitoring the entrances as people enter and leave the stadium The first operator is only monitoring the live cameras while the second one is monitoring the live cameras and can switch to the recordings of specific cameras or of a
253. e location of the analog PTZ camera in MxControlCenter These steps are described in more detail in the following Step 1 Connect the Analog PTZ Camera to MxServer To integrate and connect a third party analog camera into MxControlCenter requires you to have a configured and running MxServer environment with a Falcon QuattroPro frame grabber card Section 5 5 3 Connecting an Analog PTZ Camera to MxServer Step 2 Set Up Recording of the Analog PTZ Camera in MxServer Set up recording of the analog PTZ camera in MxServer as described in Section 5 5 5 Setting Up Recording in MxServer Step 3 Add the Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter as an MxServer Channel To add an analog PTZ camera as an MxServer channel e Select Video Source gt Add from the menu to open the Add Video Sources dialog e Click on the Camera button to open the Add Camera dialog e Select MxServer channel as the camera Type Merit Li Lin IP camera Toshiba IP camera Axis Server channel Panasonic IP camera gt Sony IP camera MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks 269 396 e Enter the IP address or DNS name port number and login data user name and password of MxServer for the camera and activate SSL if necessary e Click on OK to close the dialog This adds the MxServer channel to the Add Video Sources list
254. e so MxControlCenter can properly apply distortion correction MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 118 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Manually setting the lens type for distortion correction is only necessary if you are working with older cameras that do not include information on the lens type in the video stream To open the Post Processing dialog click on the down arrow fo the right of the Image post processing button On older cameras you can set the installed lens 7 and the mounting position in the Image Processing Lens type dialog box The results of distortion correction are Camera mount Autc immediately visible as it straightens any skewed i e distorted lines 3 5 7 Using the Virtual PTZ Features When Playing Back Recordings As explained in Section 3 2 9 Using the Virtual P Controls PTZ Functions on Live Images MxControlCenter Camera Display Mode PTZ In Camera provides enhanced virtual PTZ features or short E y A W vPTZ features for zooming panning and tilting m SNN the video data delivered by MOBOTIX cameras CC Diseiay Mode i O S One of the truly remarkable features of the Comected zj D MOBOTIX system is the fact that it can apply the PTZ Views In Camera same mechanisms no only to live but also to ix200m centr OOOO recorded images This offers an entirely new per 7 m a a a
255. e spread codecs used nowadays In addition MOBOTIX has developed the free of charge MxPEG DirectShow codec which allows playing back MOBOTIX recordings in MxPEG format in Windows Media Player for example see Section 4 1 4 Installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG DirectShow Codec Availability of conversion tools If you need files in AVC H 264 format you can use third party applications for converting AVI MPEG4 and MOV MPEG4 files the video formats exported by MxControlCenter into this format The following table contains some examples of commercial as well as open source and freeware applications that are suitable for this purpose MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Contents Operating System Application Website Expression Encoder Commercial www microsoft com Windows H 264 Encoder Freeware www h264encoder com Handbrake Open source www handbrake fr ffmpegX Freeware www fimpegx com Mac OS X Handbrake Open source www handbrake fr Quicktime Pro Commercial www apple com Handbrake Open source www handbrake fr Linux MEncoder Open source www mplayerhg hu VLC Open source www videolan org This table is by no means complete since there are many applications that can convert video files into AVC H 264 format When you search for AVI to H 264 converter or MOV to H 264 converter on the Web you will find hundreds of applications for t
256. e suppression Sets the level of noise suppression default is Low e Automatic contrast Sets the strategy for improving image contrast Off No contrast enhancement Automatic default Applies uniform contrast enhancement Extended Applies non uniform contrast enhancement Aggressive Applies increased non uniform contrast enhancement can result in unnaturally looking images MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Move mouse pointer over sliders to see the controls names 3 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference Image Program 5 The Image Program setting allows selecting from preset configurations that combine various camera settings to provide the best quality image for a given application scenario e Fast This image program prepares the camera for delivering live images as fast as possible e Security Application This is the preferred image program for security applications It uses Normal image quality e Quality This image program constitutes a good compromise between high quality and fast images even if the illumination decreases It uses Normal image quality e High Quality This image program puts higher priority on high image quality even when illumination decreases It uses Quality image quality e Webcam Image quality is the key factor for webcam applications This image program hence uses Quality image quality and the M JPEG video
257. e the mouse to drag the area to the desired position Drag the corner of the area using your mouse to increase or decrease its size Use the mouse to draw a new area You can define as many areas as needed at any one time MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring MxAnalytics 215 396 Object Size Specify the minimum object size for detection This way you can make sure that the camera only analyzes objects that are relevant for you Select the Object size option A predefined object size red square opens e Proceed as follows to adjust this square Use the mouse to drag the square to the desired position Drag the corner of the square using your mouse to increase or decrease its size Use your mouse to draw a new square Counting Lines Define the counting lines here Select the Counting lines option e Use the mouse to draw the counting lines in the desired positions and in the desired directions Fields for editing the counting lines open at the lower edge of the window Start and end coordinates Useful for precise synchronization of the counting lines Counting line ID Assigned automatically Name east title and west title Name of the counting line and name of the counting direction e To delete a counting line select the counting line and hit the DELETE key on the keyboard or select the Delete command in the shortcu
258. e transmission path to the camera For instance a camera image is displayed every ten seconds under alarm conditions the system can automatically switch to a higher image repetition rate As a consequence the load on the network is effectively relieved and the bandwidth dependent transmission costs are considerably reduced Cost savings resulting from reduced band width requirements MxCC lets you prepare individual grids from grid elements of varying size from 80x80 to 320x240 up to a maximum of 2560x960 pixels with little effort The available space will be divided up according to the width of the display panel E t h o MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 26 396 _ Cost Efficient Monitor Wall Solution Plan Monitor Walls Efficiently and Economically Monitor walls can be found in many professional control centers They are generally made up of a large number of screens in which the live images from one or more cameras are displayed simultaneously on each monitor The display and distribution of the cameras to the individual monitors is controlled by a central computer However depending on the size of the monitor wall and the number of integrated cameras this usually requires very high computing power which can no longer be provided by standard hardware With MxCC and the client patent pending concep
259. e you start configuring your video surveillance system you may need to perform some additional steps to prepare your cameras and the MxControlCenter workstation for the task My 4 1 1 Installing MxControlCenter Manually a e Obtain the MxControlCenter V2 5 3 zip file for manual installation Download the zip file from the MOBOTIX website and save the file on your com puter for example on the Desktop If you have received installation media CD DVD USB stick find the folder of the zip file MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Getting Started 153 396 e Unpack the MxControlCenter V2 5 3 zip file into a suitable folder e g Cc Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC 2 5 3 e Create a shortcut right click on MxCC exe and select Create shortcut from the context menu e Copy the shortcut to the desktop or another suitable folder 4 1 2 Updating an Older Version of MxControlCenter If an older version of MxControlCenter is installed on the computer do not overwrite the existing installation Rather proceed as follows e Install MxControlCenter see Section 2 3 2 Automatic Installation of MxControlCenter and Section 4 1 1 Installing MxControlCenter Manually into a different folder than the existing installation e Copythe configuration files and all other necessary files background images print templates etc from the existing installatio
260. ection of EERTE the Navigator sidebar panel and select i Properties from the context menu User name admin Password eeeseece In the Properties of dialog click on the Storage location Via camera Change button see figure Set the options in the Access Recordings of dialog as required if a default file server has been set in Options gt Connection Defaults you can use it here MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 210 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Changing MxControlCenter s Access to the Recordings of Many Cameras If you want to reconfigure MxControlCenter s access to the recordings for many cameras at once you can use the Access Recordings dialog Access Recordings I Select how MxControlCenter should access the recordings of main gate north gate Via camera Default file server path factory IP address will be appended Specific file server path factory IP will be appended Specific File Server Use preview data for playback and Video Search x cae To do so select one or more cameras using CTRL SHIFT click in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section of the Navigator sidebar panel Then right click on one of the highlighted cameras and select Access recordings from the context menu Set the options in the Access Recordings dialog as required if a default file server has been set in Options gt
261. ects of all sizes for years even with 1 000 cameras and more e g Donbass Arena University of Singapore No Storage Limit Unlimited Number of Users l MxCC supports MxCC runs without third party software needs no licenses supports any number of Pitordable NAS users cameras and recording devices and is completely cost neutral at the same time mass storage Individual User Interface All functions can be managed centralized in the system by the administrator a group or an individual user Simple Installation and Configuration MxCC runs on any standard PC finds cameras and storage in the network automatically and configures all cameras at the push of a button Layout Editor for Real Building Plans All MxCC functions were developed from real practical requirements in the most varied projects possible Integration of Varied Camera Types In addition to MOBOTIX network cameras and door stations analog and motor controlled cameras can be integrated in MxCC Download MxControlCenter for free from www mobotix com MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 16 396 The Decentralized MOBOTIX Concept j p RAA 1536 lines Original image MOBOTIX camera Size comparison of standard CIF versus MOBOTIX HiRes A standard sys tem requires an extra PC including software for evalu ation and storage Innovator and Technology Leader The German company MOBOT
262. ecurity Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 318 396 MxCC User Manual Reference Exposure Mode amp These options let you select the appropriate image area that the camera uses as a basis to optimize the exposure area e Recording Corresponds to the full image area of the sensor and is recommended for recording In this mode you can define and apply exposure windows e Virtual PTZ Corresponds to the currently visible image area and is recommended when using the virtual pan tilt zoom feature In this mode you cannot define or apply any exposure windows In addition the options of the Exposure Windows Weights and Frame Details sections are not available Exposure Windows O This section allows using exposure windows to control the exposure for the images gener ated by the camera Besides the Custom setting which allows drawing individual expo sure windows you can select one of the predefined exposure window sets Full Image Quarter Center etc e Toadda window Use the mouse to draw a green frame within the camera s image area e To change the size of a window Click on an exposure window to select it Next move the mouse over the frame of the window and drag the border as indicated by the cursor e Tomove a window Click on an exposure window to select it Next drag the window to any position within the image area e To delete a window Click on the small x in the top
263. ed depending on the camera model Once you have activated the virtual PTZ on a recording you can use the PTZ controls as described in Section 3 2 9 Using the Virtual PTZ Functions on Live Images 3 5 8 Using Event Searches Predefined event searches provide an excellent method for quickly finding the events recorded by the MOBOTIX cameras This type of search also allows fulfilling specific sur veillance requirements similar to these examples A shop owner wants to see if a person who entered the shop in the last 30 minutes had been carrying any items when he she entered The security staff of a hotel wants to check if a specific car entered or left the hotel parking lot in the last hour The manager of a gas station wants to know if the cameras detected any events that happened the last night MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 120 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Activating the Event Cache The following only applies to a new MxControlCenter installation When clicking for the first time on Search in the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar of a new MxControlCenter installation the following dialog appears Fast Event Search Disabled of The fast event search is disabled If you want to use it the event cache has to be oQ enabled first If you enable it all events of all recordings will be cached on your local hard disk
264. ed before you can choose which part PTZ Controls of the image post processing should take place in Se en ie oe the camera or in MxControlCenter a x e MxControlCenter Display Modes y 1P e Unchanged All vPTZ actions are performed V Ls by the active camera Note that this changes Sa WenE In Camera the live image of the camera and thus any xx z00m center ICDS recordings that are taking place Autto Move PanLeft Pan Right f9 10 f41 22 e All other settings All vPTZ actions are per views 1 15 Jump N 5 w BOS formed by MxControlCenter This does not change the live image of the camera or any recordings MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 89 396 Display Modes Availability Explanation Mode Lens Full Image Image as generated by the camera Zoomed Zoomed image without distortion correction Image section with straight lines Fixed Quad view in four directions Corrected Surround Panorama Horizontal 180 degree view Panorama Focus As above two additional windows below As above one additional Panorama window Double Panorama below Unchanged Image as generated by the camera Zoomed Zoomed image Corrected Image section with straight lines Only if camera is set to Full Image Horizontal 180 degree view Panorama Panorama Focus As above two additional windows below Using
265. ed in which something occurred only at the door at a speci fied time frame The high performance computer in the camera allows this post VM evaluation to be done extremely rapidly Fine Adjustment for More Meaningful Images Not only detail and enlargement but also contrast saturation and brightness can be finely adjusted with MxCC in both live and recorded images videos for an optimal evaluation or data export The unprocessed image data of the original camera recording are preserved and are always included in storage Despite later fine adjustment or change of image size the original image is always ieo preserved as well scoring Toole aS o ar Heo a MAAA a w DONA o o A Deeply Mode PTT in Meee Ia Carera A W Raimage ve O Inegs Ae bd Vv PTI Views In MOC ax zoom center 3 mano Move 7 Pan Left Pan Right fT ens 1 15 umo NESW 5 ENEDES i ME 2e kae 1283 1443 48 Mon 20 09 10 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 37 396 Automatic Distortion Correction Live and in the Recording The correction of wide angle lenses at up to 180 fisheye is integrated as a standard feature in both the live display and playback When a correction takes place in the camera hardly any load is placed on neither the network nor the control center computer while the image is already transferred after correction Uncorre
266. ee en wikipedia org The digital signature allows verifying the publisher of the files i e a MOBOTIX camera and that the recorded content has not been manipulated later on In order to sign the recordings the camera uses a private public key pair also called a digital certificate that is either self signed generated or has been issued by a certificate authority CA in short MxControlCenter can later check the signatures of the recordings against the public key of the certificate MOBOTIX camera Audio video recording MxControlCenter Q Signs R Verifies Private Public You cannot check the integrity of unsigned recordings If you intend to use this feature make sure that all cameras are signing their recordings For more information on how to do this Section 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data How MxControlCenter Gets the Public Key for Checking the Data Integrity e MxControlCenter automatically loads the public key from the cameras that are present in the VIDEO SOURCES section of the Navigator sidebar panel e If only the recordings have been added as file server paths MxControlCenter checks the root of the recording folder to find the cert pem file that contains the public key Cameras with software versions MX V4 0 6 x and higher can automatically store the cert pem file that contains the public key in the root of the recording folder Section 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data
267. ements HiRes Abbreviation of High Resolution Refers to high resolution images more than 1 megapixel Hub Legacy hardware used to connect multiple network devices computers cameras printers etc within a network As opposed to a Swiftch a hub splits the bandwidth among the con nected devices which may lead to drastic bandwidth limitations Because of this drawback hubs are rarely used nowadays Image Compression Reduces the file size of an image by reducing the amount of redundant image information This is particularly important when transferring and saving files since it lowers the required Bandwidth Image Post Processing Digital image processing The goal is to correct errors made during image generation caused by overexposure underexposure blurring weak contrast image noise etc in order to create a better image IP Network Data Network based on the Internet protocol TCP IP IP Phone Hardware phone which uses IP packets to establish phone connections via a network see VoIP JPEG Abbreviation of Joint Photographic Experts Group This group is responsible for the development of the JPEG standard method for image compression JPEG is the most common lossy image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 74 396 MxCc User Manual MOBOTIX Glossary format for photos on the Internet Loss in image quality is barely noticeable at compr
268. en selecting Pelco Din the Type dropdown MxControlCenter shows two additional options at the bottom of the dialog e Mechanical zoom Sends the zoom commands to the PTZ dome instead of the camera e PTZ head address Only change this setting if it is requested in the PTZ head s installation instructions MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 O 3 9g 6 MxCC User Manual Reference e Sensitivity Use the values of this dropdown to change the behavior and the speed of a pan tilt head in relation to the movement with a mouse or a joystick This option is only available for specific pan tilt heads The joystick model and the skills of each individual user have an influence on the ideal sensitivity Therefore it is recommend to test the settings to determine the best one Normal Linear Exponential Short Ultra short e Fast patch Use this option to control the pan tilt head faster and more precisely This option is only available for specific pan tilt heads The Fast patch option requires a camera software version that has been modi fied by a patch from MOBOTIX Do not activate the Fast patch option unless this patch has been installed on the corresponding MOBOTIX camera The MxControlCenter controls for a pan tilt head do notwork with the normal unmodified camera software if the Fast patch option has been activated Additional information on this feature is
269. enter also runs on operating systems with 32 Bit However when using large camera installations we recommend using an operating system with 64 Bit Especially so when event searches are used The maximum number of live camera streams that can be shown concurrently will decrease if the MxControlCenter computer needs to accomplish additional tasks image correction display scaling etc In Appendix A Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline you find further infor mation and helpful hints for setting up a MxControlCenter based video surveillance system Network When setting up a system with many cameras the network infrastructure needs provide sufficient bandwidth Make sure that the switches support 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps User Accounts When testing MxControlCenter you should have administrative rights on the computer you are using When installing MxControlCenter in a multi user environment for produc tion purposes however it is highly recommended to create at least one dedicated user with limited rights Time Synchronization Make sure that the MxControlCenter workstation is set up for automatic time synchroniza tion By default Windows systems use time windows com and synchronize once a week Go to Microsoft s web site and search for Windows Time Service to find more information about using NTP Network Time Protocol on Windows computers To find a list of publicly accessible time servers go to www p
270. eports To do this select heat map counting line report profiles There are several predefined profiles available which you can adapt to your requirements You can adapt the profiles in the browser 1 Select the camera in a layout and click Open camera in browser in MxCC 2 Open the Counting line report profiles dialog under Setup Menu gt MxAnalytics Control Customize the report profile to your requirements The Explanation column contains descriptions of the individual fields Open the Heat map report profile dialog under Setup Menu gt MxAnalytics Control to customize the heat map report profile 4 6 4 Generating Reports and Sending Automatically Via E Mail The counting line and heat map evaluations can be called up in the event search or generated regularly and automatically sent via e mail To do this first create an e mail profile and define a scheduled time task You can do this in the browser 1 Select the camera in a layout and click Open camera in browser in MxCC 2 Open the E Mail Profile dialog under Admin Menu gt Transfer profiles Set up a profile according to your needs For counting line reports select Counting line report in the E Mail Attachment field and select the desired counting line report profile in the selection field below For heat map lines reports select Heat map report in the E Mail Attachment field and select the desired heat map report profile in the selection field below 3 Next select the corres
271. er North East South and West This display mode does not support zooming e Panorama Delivers one horizontal 180 degree view mostly used for door cameras e Panorama Focus Delivers one horizontal 180 degree view on top and two additional windows below with vPTZ functionality mostly used for door cameras e Double Panorama Delivers one horizontal 180 degree view on top and one 180 degree view pointing downwards mostly used for door cameras If you select the Surround Panorama Focus or Double Panorama view for a hemispheric dual model such as the S14D the corresponding partial views can be edited individually To do this select the desired partial view using ALT Cclick The display modes provide an efficient way of distributing the load between the MxControlCenter computer and the cameras e Many cameras in one layout Set the cameras to the desired display mode e g Panorama the cameras handle the load of creating the desired display mode Set MxControlCenter to Unchanged This approach requires less bandwidth per camera since you can use smaller image sizes e g CIF instead of VGA for the individual cameras e Few cameras in one layout Set the cameras to Full Image Set MxControlCenter to Panorama MxControlCenter handles the load of creating the desired display mode This approach requires more bandwidth per camera since MxControlCenter needs larger image sizes e g MEGA or QXGA for the i
272. er archives the log files MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 291 396 6 1 1 The General Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options General Connection Defauts View Alan Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log On Startup O Load start Last layout zj Retum to Start Layout after seconds Registered cameras Nothing gt Always choose configuration file V Store changed image settings in camera Never Loci Pacrer ate Sequencer time 5 seconds Playback sync mode High perfomance zj Bidirectional Audio Reduce frame rate CPU usage 10 When minimized Pause Sequential mode Disconnect streams during Video Search Disable Post VM ability in Live Recordings Local Archive O User folder Custom folder No configuration loaded On Startup a e Load start Controls the startup behavior of MxControlCenter For example MxControlCenter can automatically launch with the specified start layout or the lay out opened at the time the program was last closed e Return to Start Layout after Allows automatically returning to the start layout after the specified period of time You can use this option if the users frequently switch between different layouts and you would like MxControlCenter to
273. er training 361 Lab installation of components 337 Mounting and initial operation 359 Overview 50 Video wall 26 Configuring 183 Using 78 Video wall glossary 378 View Options tab 296 Views Configuring 192 Virtual PTZ For Live images 82 Functions 82 When playing back recordings 118 Visual alarm features 99 VM glossary 378 VoIP glossary 378 vPTZ For Live images 82 Functions 82 WwW Wi Fi glossary 378 Windows Configuring extra windows 183 Wireless devices glossary 378 Wizard glossary 378 WLAN glossary 378 Working With MxControlCenter Configurations 234 Zeroconf glossary 378 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxCC User Manual Notes MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Notes MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxCC User Manual Notes MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Manufacturer 3 95 396 Security Vision Systems AAN MOBOTIX To demonstrate our confidence in the quality of our
274. es Si Available if microphone has Play camera audio been enabled in Camera Configuration Available if speaker has been enabled in Camera Configuration Activate announcement to camera Switches on the light if the selected video source has an attached light source Switch on light via cam era Opens the door if the selected Open door via camera video source has an attached door opener Applies to all video sources in layout use dropdown for selected video source only Activate camera connec tions Allows changing the configura tion of one or more cameras in Camera Configuration P l Shows the camera s browser js Show camera information Shows comprehensive informa in browser tion about the camera status Use this button to log on as On Logout requires restart a different user MxCC restart as required Open camera configu ration 1 Available only when camera is selected 2 Drop down button MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 10 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 1 3 MxControlCenter Sidebar Panels The MxControlCenter sidebar contains several panels that can be shown or hidden by clicking on the corresponding heading Section 3 1 Elements of the Application Window Sidebar Panel Explanation See Navigator Collection of sections listed in the following LAYOUTS Tree view used f
275. es MxControlCenter and starts play ing back the exported video MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 138 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Deciding on a Target Video Format Before we actually start compiling a list of interesting scenes for exporting we need to take a moment to decide upon the format of the exported video Since this depends on the operating system of the target computer and the intended use of the video you should select the format according to the table below Operating System Format Applications Video playback with integrity check File Server Structure MxControlCenter MxEasy MxControlCenter MxEasy Few video files for Aue ecg Windows Media Player playback AVI MPEG4 avi ee een Player Video playbackt File Server Structure Few cs files for MxPEG mxq playback MOV MPEG4 mov Quicktime VLC others Video playbackt File Server Structure Few video files for MxPEG mxg playback AVI MPEG4 avi MPlayer xine VLC others Remarks Codec to be installed separately see Section 4 1 4 Installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG Directshow Codec t Integrity check not available MxControlCenter does notinclude support for exporting AVC H 264 videos For an explanation please read Why MxControlCenter Does Not Support AVC H 264 at the beginning of this manual This section also provides a list of application
276. escribed in Creating an Ad Hoc Event Search above Opening the Event in the Player Panel Once MxControlCenter is displaying events in the search results panel you can use one of the methods listed below to show individual events in the Player panel e Double click on an event in the search results panel e Right click on an event and select Open in Player You can now use the buttons of the Player sidebar panel to play back the event as described in the Playing Back the Event section below To resize the Player panel and the size of the playback window simply move the separa tor at the top of the panel up or down To close the panel double click on the separator Playing Back the Event Use the controls in the Player sidebar panel to play fo ne back the events The Player controls work just as Ooo oc described in Section 3 5 2 Search Playback in a Live Display Window MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 125 396 The event you open in the Player panel serves as a starting point when browsing the event images When playing back an event the Player will automatically move to the next event in the direction of the playback provided there is such an event Once the end of the last event or when playing backwards the beginning of the first has been reached playback will stop automatically Expor
277. ession rates between 99 and 60 LAN Abbreviation of Local Area Network Represents a computer network that is usually covering a small physical area e g a home office school building or manufacturing site Latency Interval between capturing the image of a camera and displaying the same image on a monitor also called scene to screen time Layout Describes how video sources cameras MxPEG clips etc are displayed by MxControlCenter When displaying the images from network cameras the layout determines the positions and resolutions of the images displayed on the monitor In addition to the actual video images you can also incorporate graphic elements such as the location of the cameras etc see Background Layout Grid Layout Auto Grid LED Abbreviation of Light Emitting Diode An electronic semiconductor component built in to MOBOTIX cameras and add on modules which emits light when current flows through the component in the correct direction Linux Free and open source operating system based on the work of Linus Torvalds Serves as the operating system for all MOBOTIX cameras Logical Network A system of computers and networked devices that appear as a single network to the user even if it runs on one or more Physical Networks Megapixel One million pixels Larger formats of images can be displayed as a multiple of this for example 3 megapixels is equal to 3 million pixels MonoDome Dome camer
278. etc create the configuration for one camera of a set and distribute this configuration to the remaining cameras of a set using the Update Assistant see Section A 5 6 Distributing the Master Configuration Changing the Camera Names Before you can start defining sets of cameras however you need to assign the camera names according to the List of components and locations see the table in Section A 1 Collecting Information About the System The Manage Other Cameras dialog of the browser interface provides the most efficient method for assigning the camera names e Click on Admin Menu gt Configuration gt Manage on the master camera e Select all cameras choose Change the host names of the selected cameras from the dropdown at the bottom of the dialog and click on OK i MOBOTIX Q24 Cam1 B10 F2 S3 A210 Manage Other Cameras Screens Cameras New Screen Camera Information Name IP mx10 2 1 43 10 2 1 43 Image Change host name Cam1 B10 F2 S3 A210 mx10 2 17 175 10 2 17 175 Image Change host name Cam2 B10 F2 S3 A210 mx10 2 24 80 10 2 24 80 Image Change host name mx10 2 24 80 mx10 3 11 47 10 3 11 47 Image Change host name mx10 3 11 47 mx10 3 30 151 10 3 30 151 Image Change host name mx10 3 30 151 mx10 3 94 200 10 3 94 200 Image Change host name mx10 3 94 200 mx10 8 195 72 10 8 195 7 Image Change host name mx10 8 195 72 mx10 8 52 239 10 8 52 239 Image Change host name mx10 8 52 239
279. eter 20 Camera OK Camera OK No connection to monitored not monitored camera When you click on a status icon in the layout the live image of a camera or video source will automatically be displayed in the focus window see the Focus window element above When setting up an installation with several MxControlCenter computers you can use MxStatusto remotely monitor the status of all cameras connected to MxControlCenter computers For more information about installing and configuring MxStatus see Section 4 1 6 MxStatus Status Monitoring for Multiple MxControlCenter Computers MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 64 3 9g 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Elements with Variable Video Sources Alarm Player window This display window shows the saved alarms from any cam era that you click on in the alarm list for more information on how to work with this display element see Section 3 5 5 Playback in Layouts with Alarm Player Windows The saved alarms are not displayed in a list but rather as a video from a video recorder You can therefore fast forward or rewind through the alarms and the recorded image sequences of each alarm You can only define one alarm player window in each layout Alarm player windows in background layouts have a gray title bar Live Alarm window This display window automatically shows the live image of the camera
280. etting a default time during which MxControlCenter shows the cameras or layouts when the application runs in sequencer mode see Section 3 2 4 Using Sequencers to Automatically Switch Cameras or Layouts Playback sync mode Controls how synchronized playback in the Player sidebar panel works Real time focuses on getting the recorded images of all selected cameras in real time even if this means dropping single frames in between because they are not received quickly enough High performance focuses on getting all images without dropping any frames even if this means that the recordings cannot be shown in real time Bidirectional Audio Activates bidirectional audio for audio connections to MOBOTIX cameras which support this e g the MOBOTIX T24M Save Bandwidth Reduce frame rate CPU usage When using many live cameras in one layout MxControlCenter can automatically monitor the CPU usage on the computer If the CPU usage passes the limit set in this dropdown MxControlCenter automatically reduces the frame rate that is requested of the displayed cameras When minimized Controls the behavior of MxControlCenter if the application has been minimized to the task bar MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 2 9 3 3 9 6 Stop all Stops retrieving the video streams from all cameras while the application is minimized Once t
281. ferred layout to manually switch to the preferred layout of the active camera yellow frame On background layouts the yellow Preferred Layout icon in the title bar of a display window also indicates that such a layout is available for the selected video source Click on this icon or right click on the window and select Load preferred layout to manually switch to the preferred layout of the active camera yellow frame Showing the Reference Image of a Video Source If a Reference Image has been set you can compare it to the current image of a cam era The main purpose of such an image is to provide an unchanged original view of the camera You can thus see if the camera has been tilted sideways for example If a reference image has been set for the active camera yellow frame this button is active in the toolbar Click on this button to show the reference image or right click on the window and select Show reference image On background layouts the yellow Reference Image icon in the title bar of a display window also indicates that such a file is available for the selected video source Click on this icon to show the reference image or right click on the window and select Show reference image MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com f 106 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 5 Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings MxControlCenter offers numerous possi
282. fferent file server NAS system the MxRemotePreview server should have a high bandwidth connection to that file server NAS system e Make sure that you are using the web server on the computer only for recoding purposes and not for anything else e You can use this computer also as a file server for the camera recordings However if the computer displays performance problems you should consider using a different computer as file server MxRemotePreview Installation Overview e Install and configure the web server e Install the MxRemotePreview CGI module e Configure the web server Specify the file types that are to be recoded by MxRemotePreview Set the camera recordings folder Set default recording parameters optional e Test the web server installation e Test the MxRemotePreview CGI module Please make sure that you observe the following security recommendations e Protect the web server computer and shared folder by assigning special user names and passwords for the cameras to access the recordings full access required Other users should not be able to access these folders at all e Protect your web server installation and the recordings by assigning a user name and password to the corresponding folders You should even consider encrypting the entire traffic to and from the web server using SSL For more information on this and other settings please refer to the Apache documen tation on the web htt
283. ffering video content that can be displayed in MxControlCenter These are usu ally MOBOTIX cameras but also third party IP cameras recordings stored on file servers MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 78 396 M xCc User Manual MOBOTIX Glossary file server paths and on Snap Server NAS systems MxPEG clips and analog cameras connected via MxServer e g an analog Dome Camera Video Wall Wall with a set of usually large monitors used e g in security applications to provide overview VM Abbreviation for Video Motion Detection VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol Telephony using computer networks Wi Fi Trademark of the Wi Fi Alliance see that manufacturers of electronic equipment can use to brand certified products belonging to a class of wireless LAN devices based on the IEEE 802 1 standards Wireless Devices Electronic devices that use electromagnetic waves to establish voice or data connections rather than using some kind of wire connection Wireless devices typically use GSM 2G UMTS 3G Wi Fi among other less common technologies Wizard Refers to a software component that helps the user install or set up a particular program and that guides the user through the configuration process by means of simple questions WLAN Abbreviation of Wireless Local Area Network Used to provide network and thus also Internet connections wit
284. figuring the Scaling and Display Functions Configuring the Toolbar Configuring MxControlCenter Views Configuring Functions for a Minimized or Hidden MxControlCenter Configuring Alarms and Recordings Configuring Alarms on the Cameras Configuring What to Record Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions Configuring Where to Record Configuring MxAnalytics Activating Setting Process Parameters and Setting Up Storage Controlling Motion Detection Time Tables Optional Customizing the Report Profiles Used for Analysis Optional Generating Reports and Sending Automatically Via E Mail Creating and Storing Suitable Evaluations in MxControlCenter Users Groups and Group Rights Creating and Editing Groups and Users Editing Group Rights Implementing a Two Man Rule Requiring Users to Enter a Reason for an Action MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 152 152 152 153 153 154 154 155 158 159 161 167 170 173 177 177 179 181 182 183 183 190 190 190 192 194 196 198 200 201 207 21 211 216 217 217 217 218 218 219 220 222 5 396 6 396 MxCC User Manual 4 8 Security Considerations 222 4 8 1 General Thoughts on Network Security 222 4 8 2 Restricting Public Access to the Cameras 222 4 8 3 Securing the MxControlCenter Workstation 224 4 8 4 Using Encrypted Connections to Access Cameras 225 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data 22
285. final test of all components A 12 e Execute Hand off and user training A 13 The focus of this part of the manual is on setting up and configuring the system It does not cover any planning or design of the system If you are interested in the quoting and planning aspects it is recommended to enroll in one of the MOBOTIX Sales Planning amp Installation Workshops see www mobotix com gt Partners gt Seminars Since implementing a video surveillance system is a complex process it is highly recommended to have recently completed the MOBOTIX Basic Seminar MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Collecting Information About the System 337 396 A 1 Collecting Information About the System The following table contains the information you need to have before actually starting the configuration Information Hardware List of components and locations Storage requirements of cameras Customer Requirements Purpose of the VSS Remark List of cameras switches file servers NAS computers monitors UPS Columns for model names network names locations IP addresses Which cameras are recording How many days are the recordings to be stored See Storage Requirements Planner on www mobotix com Floor plans site maps as required using scanned emergency building escape Live surveillance only Types of video searches Signed recordi
286. fixed grid sizes Quarter PDA PDA CIF VGA Mega used otherwise This re scaling can be achieved using different interpolation methods To set these methods activate the Layout Manager and select the desired method from the context menu for each display window Beginning with the first method each subsequent method listed below delivers higher quality while also requiring more computing power i e creates higher CPU load on the computer running MxControlCenter e Default Delivers the lowest quality and creates the lowest CPU load Since the quality is rather low this setting will not be offered when using free scaling e Linear This setting is a good compromise between the achieved image quality and the required computing time This is usually sufficient for most of the application scenarios If no other interpolation method than Default has been set for individual display windows activating free scaling will automatically switch to this method This is the default setting e Lanczos This method delivers images with higher sharpness than Linear but does not perform any anti aliasing e Super Sampling This method delivers the best results when scaling down images but it also creates the highest CPU loads This method should only be used for special single display windows When scaling up this setting will automatically apply the Lanczos method The interpolation method setting is a per display window setting MOBOTI
287. formation This box highlights information that improves your understanding of the current subject Why MxControlCenter Does Not Support AVC H 264 Although we have considered integrating AVC H 264 video export in MxControlCenter we have decided not to do so The following reasons have moved us to make this decision Costs for licensing the AVC H 264 codec We would need to pay licensing fees for every application with AVC H 264 support that we give away free of charge without knowing whether or not the codec would actually be used We feel that rather than paying licensing fees for something that is of little use to our customers it is wiser to invest these funds in the research and development of exciting new products Legal aspects Since MPEG LA has displayed inconsistent behavior in its application of licensing fees as documented in Nero s antitrust suit against MPEG LA in 2010 we feel that integrating AVC H 264 into MxControlCenter is not an option Examples of other companies In order to avoid the licensing fees associated with the AVC H 264 codec Google has introduced its own WebM standard for royalty free high quality open source audio video compression of web content We concur and we are also convinced that AVC H 264 will not play a major role in the near future Easy playback of existing export formats MxControlCenter has built in support for creating AVI MPEG4 and MOV MPEG4 video files which are among the most wid
288. from the Camera to MxControlCenter in Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras Activating the Alarm List e Select Tools gt Options from the MxControlCenter menu e Click on the Alarm Handling tab e Configure the Alarm List group box as shown below Alarm List J Activate List size 16 MB v Add live stream events V Alam List file V C Users i AppData Roaming Mobotic MC Open on new alam V Auto acknowledge alams after Explanation of Options e Add live stream events Detects alarms in the live video streams of the cameras that belong to the current layout and automatically adds these alarms to the alarm list MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 O 2 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Alarm List file Stores the alarms in a separate file rather than in the computer s memory When restarting MxControlCenter opens the alarm list file and automati cally appends new alarms Auto acknowledge alarms after Automatically acknowledges new alarm list entries after the time span set for this option Configuring the Reception of Alarm Messages Alarm messages instruct MxControlCenter to add alarms to the alarm list even if the alerting camera does not belong to the current layout Select Tools gt Options from the MxControlCenter menu Click on the Alarm Handling tab Configure the Alarm Messages group box as shown be
289. g overview 261 Using with MOBOTIX cameras 261 Pan Tilt Zoom 37 Physical network glossary 375 PIR glossary 375 Planning Layout structure 177 Player 20 Sidebar panel 70 Playing back In a Live display window 109 In Layouts with display windows in Player mode 113 Recordings 106 Several cameras in synchronized mode 114 PoE glossary 375 PoE switch Network connection 52 Power supply 52 Post processing Images 80 Recorded images 116 Post Video Motion detection 36 Using in recordings 126 Power supply Cameras 5 Directly connected to computer 51 Network connection 51 PoE Switch 52 Preferred layout glossary 376 Printing 135 Images 35 Single images 136 Program settings Saving 234 Program views Configuring 190 Properties Access Data tab 307 Dialog 307 Display tab 308 Information tab 308 PTZ Rotor tab 309 Video sources 307 PTZ 37 PTZ cameras Connecting to MxServer 275 PTZ Controls 20 Sidebar panel 70 PTZ glossary 376 PTZ Rotor Properties tab 309 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 8 amp 3 96 MxCC User Manual Index Public access Restricting to cameras 222 Q Quad display glossary 376 Reacting to alarms 103 Reactions of MxControlCenter Configuring 201 Recorded video data Signing 228 Recording 29 Camera Configuration tab 320 Configuring 182 Configuring what to record 200 Example sce
290. g Layouts To create a new layout proceed as follows e Do one of the following Select Layout gt New in the menu Right click in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select New layout to create a new empty layout that is inserted on the same level as the current layout New sub layout to create a new empty layout that is inserted as a sub layout to the current layout MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 60 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration e Select the type of layout you want to create B hew tayo e B hew Layout EA Gee Layne Geast i i HHE i set noe C ee Background Layout for site plans floor plans etc Grid Layout display windows only e Select an image jpg or bmp for a background layout or a grid for a grid layout An ideal background image of a building can often be found in the emergency plans The Auto grid is a special type of grid layout that automatically splits the display area into smaller sections to show all of the layouts video sources Auto grids are basically square and can have more columns than rows This is the default grid type when creating a new grid layout e Click on OK to close the dialog box MxControlCenter creates the new layout and adds an icon according to the layout type grid or background Note
291. g for CamlO MOBOTIX signal module that the camera uses to directly operate lamps sirens and access controls as well as external audio components speakers and microphones MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 371 396 CCTV Abbreviation of Closed Circuit Television A television system in which the analog video signal is transmitted to monitor within one particular environment only for example a building The term CCTV is often used for video surveillance systems CF Card Abbreviation of Compact Flash Card An ultra compact digital random access memory medium based on flash memory modules and well known as an image storage medium for digital cameras CIF 2CIF 4CIF Abbreviation of Common Intermediate Format in accordance with PAL TV standard Corre sponds to 1 4 TV image with 288 rows and 352 columns 0 1 megapixels 2CIF 1 2 TV image has the same number of rows 288 but 704 columns 0 2 megapixels 4CIF corresponds to the image quality of a traditional TV image with 576 rows and 704 columns 0 4 megapixels CMOS Abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor MOBOTIX cameras rely on this type of image sensor for energy efficient digitalization of image information DevKit Camera development kitwith independent image sensors based on MOBOTIX M12D or M24M cameras intended for concealed installation in other devices DHCP Abbreviation of Dyn
292. ge consisting of the image of the left image sensor on the left and the image of the right sensor on the right Auto Automatically switches to the sensor only available on Day Night and IT models This section is available for all Dual camera models with exeption of the D14D 180 model Exposure Time amp Exp program Represents a filtering mechanism that increases or decreases the exposure time used for low light conditions this setting is sometimes adjusted by individual image program settings see Image Program in Section 6 3 2 The Image Settings Tab The default exposure program is 0 Standard Negative values 2 Reduce 1 Reduce reduce the exposure time and have the tendency to increase image noise Positive values increase the exposure time and reduce image noise Min exp time This parameter sets the minimum shortest exposure time It is recommended to leave the factory default unchanged Max exp time This parameter sets the maximum longest exposure time This setting is extremely important since it has to provide for crisp images short expo sure time on the one hand and for properly exposed noise free night images long exposure time on the other hand For moving objects it is recommended to use a maximum exposure time of 1 60 second to avoid motion blur For still objects you can use a maximum exposure time of 1 1 second to ensure proper exposure of the image MOBOTIX AG S
293. ge on External File Server Flash Device Change storage limits Always configure Storage Size limit Activate external logging Store web server logfile system mes sages Storage Failure Detection Enable Blink LEDs select e mail profile Max two cameras per file server NAS recommended For help on the individual settings of the Admin Menu please consult the camera help Distributing Specific Image and Event Settings to a Set of Cameras In order to distribute only the Image Control and Event Control sections using the Update Assistant use the Setup Menu to set the options listed in the table below This table uses the hardware properties as criteria for creating different sets of cameras Criteria for Creating Sets Day Dual Night Hemil Mono Image Control Camera selection Both Auto Camera Night Switch 17 lux Resolution As required Image Quality General Image Settings As required depends on frame rate require ments Display Mode As required Sharpness 4 4 1 4 Mox Exposure Time 1 30s k 1 30s 1 30s Exposure Settings Average Brightness 40 a 40 40 1 Hemispheric has additional options MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 5 4 396 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline Criteria for C
294. guring MxControlCenter A 8 1 Configuring the Global Settings A 8 2 Adding Video Sources to the MxControlCenter Workstation A 8 3 Creating a Basic MxControlCenter Configuration A 8 4 Configuring the Alarm Handling A 8 5 Setting Additional Operating System Options A 9 Final Lab Test of All Components A 9 1 Testing and Correcting A 9 2 Exporting and Distributing MxControlCenter A 10 Mounting and Initial Operation A I Adjusting Individual Cameras A 12 Final Tests A 13 Hand Off and User Training B Troubleshooting B 1 Solutions to Common Issues B 1 1 Power and Connectivity Issues B 1 2 File Server NAS Issues B 1 3 Camera Issues B 1 4 MxControlCenter Issues B 2 Using the MxControlCenter Error Log C MOBOTIX Glossary Index Manufacturer 339 339 340 340 340 342 342 344 344 349 349 350 352 355 355 355 355 356 357 357 358 358 358 359 359 360 361 364 364 364 365 365 366 367 370 380 395 MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Contents About This Manual In order to indicate special elements this manual uses the following formatting conventions e User interface elements Click on the Activate Player mode button e Values in selection boxes Select Unlimited in the selection box e User input Double click the camera name and enter the desired name Back Entrance for example e Keys on the computer keybo
295. he MxControlCenter window has been restored it automati cally resumes the retrieval of the video streams Continue decoding Continues to retrieve the video streams from all cameras as if the application were not minimized Pause Temporarily suspends the retrieval of the video streams while the appli cation is minimized Once the MxControlCenter window has been restored it automatically resumes the retrieval of the video streams Note that MxControlCenter will be restored automatically when the applica tion receives a valid camnotify or ip command for more information see Section 6 1 5 The Remote Control Tab If MxControlCenter is minimized the alarm list is always updated by the cameras that send network messages to the MxControlCenter computer Alarm images in the live streams of cameras in the current layout that do not send network messages are only added to the alarm list if the When minimized option has been set to Continue decoding e Sequential Mode If this option is activated the live cameras of one layout are shown one after the other for the specified interval Since MxControlCenter suspends the video stream of the cameras that are not shown this mode saves a considerable amount of bandwidth Since MxControlCenter suspends the video stream of the cameras that are not shown alarm information that is send via video stream is not displayed Alarms that are received as alarm messages net
296. he camera the gray entries need to be config ured manually in the camera s browser interface click on the Open camera in browser button and then on Setup Menu gt Event Settings in the browser e Click on Apply and wait until the camera configuration has been saved MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 201 396 Click on the Image Settings tab to change the image resolution size of the camera If you are setting up a professional video surveillance system you need to make sure that all recordings are signed see Section 4 8 5 Signing the Recorded Video Data This ensures that the owners operators of the system can use the record ings in a court of law 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions In this section you will activate the alarm list the reception of alarm messages the alarm sound to play on the MxControlCenter computer and the instruction file for this camera You will also configure the firewall on the MxControlCenter computer so that it does not block the port used to receive the alarm messages Make sure that the following prerequisites are fulfilled e The cameras have been added to MxControlCenter s list of video sources see Section 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter e The cameras have been configured to send network messages see Setting Up Alarm Messages
297. he plus button below to add a new IP address computer is always listed port as recipient of the network messages Double click on the lt IP gt and lt Port gt as a recipient This is f ae entries of the new line and enter the proper IP address and port of the recipient To indicated by an MxCC icon _ ain in front of the port delete a recipient select the corresponding item and click on the minus button The messages are sent to the recipients in the order of the list from top to bottom Select a recipient then use the up down arrows to change the order of the list Event Trigger 2 e Event switch Activates the event triggers that can prompt the camera to send network messages to the alarm targets On Activates the network messages of the selected cameras Off Deactivates all of the above Signal Input Open SI Signal Input Closed SI f signal inputs have been con figured on the camera you can assign the corresponding option to use as an event switch for the camera Custom Signal 1 CS1 Custom Signal 2 CS2 Combined Signal CSL If time tables or custom signals have been configured on the camera you can use one of the custom or combined signals as an event switch for the camera From Master Slave Mode If the camera is configured to operate in slave mode the event switch will be switched on or off according to the master camera s arming status e Event Trigger Se
298. he right to the left lens and vice versa Open extra window Opens an extra window that can be freely moved and scaled depending on the original this is either a player or a live window Open extra Live window Opens an extra window that is always a live window regardless of the type of original window MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 297 396 Alt Click for PTZ When setting On double click above to Open exira Live window a double click by default also executes a pan tilt action i e moves the clicked position to the center of the visible image section Activate this option to avoid this behavior and to use an ALT click for executing pan tilt actions Mouse Over Controls the behavior of MxControlCenter when the mouse is moved over a video source in a layout On Shows the original resolution image either as live or recorded video stream By MultiView Shows the default MultiView layout of this camera if such a layout has been defined on the camera itself Small area If activated MxControlCenter automatically opens and closes the mouse over window if the mouse pointer enters or leaves a small area in the center of the display window If deactivated the mouse over window remains open until the mouse pointer leaves the area of the mouse over window Layouts 2 Show toolbar at bottom Displays the toolbar at
299. he rule e g MxCC Alarm Handling Port and click on Finish Close all open Firewall related dialogs and the Control Panel MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 06 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration P fy A t n en Network Messages Testing the IP Address and Port Alarm Targets e Open the Camera Configuration dialog Adwemtedoe on IP Address Port e Click in the Network Messages tab J 172 16 0 23 E 31754 e Inthe Test Configuration group box click on the Test button e Check if the test is successful Je JAA If it is successful the box shows ee oe on the status OK J Al Events If it is not successful the box shows the status Timeout This J Video Motion VM Video Motion 2 VM2 usually points to some kind of con nection error wrong IP address port or firewall issue Fix the problem click again on Apply wait until the camera configura tion has been saved then test the setup again Testing the Remote Control Before testing the remote control features make sure that you have properly set up the network message as outlined in Setting Up Alarm Messages from the Camera to MxControlCenter in Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras e Minimize MxControlCenter to the Windows taskbar e Open the live view of the MOBOTIX camera in a browser window e Click on the UC Event button on
300. he search Note that you can also keep the CTRL key pressed then drag amp drop an existing search to duplicate it e Proceed by editing the search as outlined in the Creating an Ad Hoc Event Search section above MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 124 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Grouping Event Searches If you want to create groups to structure the searches simply ypu move a search onto another one You can thus create overview Search i i a P Indoor cameras searches e g Indoor cameras and detail searches e g foe eer Yesterday asa child element of Indoor cameras Diver To remove an element from a group simply drag it outwards pea esterday nenm 4 P Outdoor cameras until the insertion cursor is only a bar between two other ele jeje ments Once a parent element has lost its last child element P Last week the parent becomes a regular element again P Yesterday Note that the parent elements are still working as regular searches allowing you to create overview and detail searches as in the example above When dealing with grouped event searches both the parent and the child elements remain active searches Editing Existing Event Searches To edit an existing event search simply click on the search you want to edit in the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel Then proceed as d
301. her hand allows adjusting the color satu ration brightness contrast and sharpness settings of recorded video footage Applying post processing can help when trying to recognize persons for example Before you can activate image post processing in MxControlCenter you should change the settings until you get satisfactory results Proceed as follows to activate and adjust image post processing e Make sure that you have selected a video source in the perms layout yellow frame Lm terion ressiuton PTZ Lens type e Click on the down arrow to the right of the Image post processing button Camera mount e Move the Post Processing dialog to the right or left of the MxControlCenter application window e Check the Activate checkbox e Move the sliders up and down to see how the image of the selected video source changes The Post Processing dialog stays on your desktop until you close it So you can try to change the settings for other video sources too Simply select a different video source and follow the steps above until you are satisfied with the results If you want to undo your changes click on the Default button to reset the values MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings W7 396 Ne The image post processing settings are per video source settings i e the settings are stored separately for each video source This
302. his purpose that are suitable for your computer s operating system see also Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage Manuals for MOBOTIX Products All MOBOTIX products have corresponding manuals that you can download as PDF files from www mobotix comin the Support gt Manuals section e Camera Manual Such a manual describes one camera model It provides an over view over the general properties of the camera and shows how to install this model e Software Manual This manual describes the software features of the browser based user interface of all MOBOTIX cameras Notes on MOBOTIX Hardware Products e RoHS declaration The products of MOBOTIX AG are in full compliance with Art 5 of the German Electrical and Electronic Equipment Act and the E U Directive 2002 95 EC on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment RoHS as far as they are subject to these regulations You can find the MOBOTIX RoHS Declaration under www mobotix com Support gt Spec Sheets e Disposal Electrical and electronic products contain many reusable materials For this reason we would ask that you dispose of MOBOTIX products at the end of their service life in accordance with all legal requirements and regulations or deposit these products at a municipal collection center MOBOTIX products may not be disposed of with household waste lf the product contains a battery please dispose of the bat
303. hout requiring cables This is a synonym of Wi Fi Zeroconf A technology which allows devices in IP based networks to automatically advertise their services without the need of a DHCPserver A printer commonly advertises its printing service over the network a MOBOTIX camera its imaging service Using Zeroconf MxControlCenter can find other MOBOTIX cameras Snap Servers etc MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 380 396 MxCC User Manual Index INDEX Symbols 2G glossary 370 3G glossary 370 ACIF glossary 371 180 cameras Correct panorama view 62 A Access Restricting public access to cameras 222 Access Data Properties tab 307 Access rights 38 Users amp groups 38 Acknowledging alarms 103 Acoustic alarm features 102 Action log Configuring 231 Monitoring 231 Action Log Options tab 306 Activating Layout Manager 158 Storage 211 ActiveX glossary 370 Adding a MOBOTIX camera Example 57 Additional user functions 149 Alarm features 98 Alarm Handling Options tab 298 Alarm List 21 103 Filtering 104 Alarm message 29 Alarms Configuring 196 Configuring on the cameras 198 Security 28 Analog cameras Integrating third party PTZ ca
304. ibed in Creating a Reduced Bare Bones MxControlCenter View e Store detective s view View with all required sidebar elements Navigator Player PTZ Controls etc The user can select this view after logging in Creating a New or Overwriting an Existing View This procedure stores the current user interface configuration as a new view and also allows overwriting existing views e Configure the user interface according to your requirements e Select View gt Saved views gt Save as from the menu e Inthe Save View as dialog enter a name for the new view or select an existing one from the Name dropdown in this case the existing view will be overwritten by the new configuration e Activate the Display Area Options and Application Window Areas checkboxes as required e Click on Save to store the view and to close the dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface 193 396 You cannot overwrite the saved MxControlCenter views that are written in square brackets e g A11 Using a View This procedure opens the selected view and applies its user interface configuration e Select View gt Saved views from the menu e Click on the view you would like to use e f you want to keep the changes to the current view make sure that you save it as described in Creating a New or Overwrit
305. ic Task page enter a name in the Name field e g MxServer and click on Next On the Trigger page select the When the computer starts option and click on Next On the Action page select the Start a Program option and click on Next MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 278 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features e On the Start a Program page click on the Browse button e Navigatetothe MxServerprogramfolder c Program Files MOBOTIX MxServer by default select the MxServer exe file and click on OK e Click on Next e Click on Finish to close the wizard Scroll down in the Task Scheduler Summary to see the MxServertask in the Active Tasks list If you are using a different version of Windows than Vista please proceed as outlined in the Windows help search for Scheduled Task MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings 279 396 5 6 Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings MxRemotePreview has been developed to overcome one problem when using low bandwidth connections e g when accessing recordings in a remote location with a slow DSL or UTMS 3G connection In such a case MxControlCenter retrieves the original stored video sequences but since they are too large for the bandwidth the images are transferred too slowly
306. ideo source in MxControlCenter e Sends the PTZ commands from MxControlCenter to the analog PTZ dome using the serial cable e Continuously records the images of a third party analog or IP camera to a format that can be read by MxControlCenter How MxServer Works 3rd party IP camera pe as pia 1Zc oNmands MxControlCenter workstation e e e Pe Ta Switch 3rd party SN MxServer analog camera N gt k CO lt gt Li e Vio k y Piera eoj ot Ld lecordng P gt a I oe Sy x ee om mo ee MxCC PTZ commands MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 272 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Integration into an IP network means that the analog cameras connected to MxServer can be accessed the same way as network cameras using the IP address and a port of the MxServer computer You can display an image from the analog camera in a browser in MxControlCenter or in any other application that can access HTTP servers and display M JPEG streams The video cable of the analog PTZ camera is connected to a port of the frame grabber card in the computer while the control cable of the camera is connected to the serial interface of the computer RS232 RS485 MxServer ensures that the relevant channel of the frame grabber card is mapped to a network port for example 80 81 You can also control the motorized pan t
307. ield if you want to allow all addresses e Accept only camnotify and MxCC Alarm message types Only adds alarm images ifthe cameras are sending camnotify network messages to the MxControlCenter computer MxCC Alarm Messages of this type can be activated using MxControlCenter s Camera Configuration dialog see Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras camnotify Messages of this type can only be configured via the camera s web interface e Add image to Alarm List Obtains an image from the camera that sent the alarm message and adds it to the alarm list e Open extra Live window Displays an extra window showing the live video stream of the alerting camera when MxControlCenter receives an alarm message e Restore MxCC when minimized Restores the MxControlCenter main window to the size and position it had before it was minimized e Switch to Preferred Layout Switches to the Preferred Layout of the camera that sent an alarm if such a layout has been set in the camera s Properties of dialog e Always ask before switching Prompts the user before switching from one preferred layout to a different one MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 00 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference Alarm Sound amp Activate Plays back the sound on the computer speakers when MxControlCenter detects an alarm System sound Plays back the system
308. ient MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com How the Alarm Features Work 99 396 Speaker The camera plays back a specific sound on its integrated or an exter nal speaker or plays the sound from the computer microphone on its speaker SIP video calls with bidirectional audio The camera calls a SIP video phone and establishes two way communication between itself and the MxControlCenter computer intercom mode Other actions Using its signal outputs or attached MOBOTIX modules the camera can switch on lights open or close doors etc e Once a notification reaches the assigned persons we consider this the actual alarm e The usercan react by acknowledging or by escalating the alarm e The user can also rely on the instructions and additional information like a standard operating procedure provided for the corresponding camera You can use MxControlCenter to program the system so that the cameras fulfill these tasks and create a fully integrated security system Thanks to today s virtually limitless possibilities of wireless computing this system works almost anywhere on the globe New York Alarm center Tokyo 3 4 1 Visual Alarm Features When a MOBOTIX camera triggers an alarm MxControlCenter uses several visual methods for alerting the operator of the security system This section describes the options that are available Highligh
309. ies from the context menu e Open the Display tab e Select the desired Preferred Alarm Layout from the list of available layouts e Click on OK to close the Properties of dialog Instruction File An instruction file contains specific instructions for this camera e g emergency phone f D numbers standard operating procedures etc You can use all files that are recognized on the computer running MxControlCenter such as HTML or TXT files Note that you can also open web sites in a web browser by entering an entire URL such as http www mycompany com emergency To set the instruction file please see Setting the Instruction File for the Camera in Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 176 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Reference Image The reference image allows comparing the current camera image to an image stored earlier This image thus provides an easy way to determine changes in the positions of the camera itself or of other objects vehicles containers etc Click on the Show camera s reference image button in the toolbar or on the icon in the title bar of a display window to show the reference image in a separate window To set the reference image e Make sure that the Layout Manager is active e Right click on a live display window e Select Define reference image for c
310. igh number of PCs required classical centralized systems are therefore becoming less and less appro priate and cost effective Standard System MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Decentralized MOBOTIX Concept In the decentralized MOBOTIX concept each camera includes a high performance computer and if necessary a digital long term flash memory MicroSD card for several days of recording The PC or the video control center now serves purely for viewing and control of the cameras PTZ not for analysis or recording This eliminates overloaded expensive video management software as the important functions are already contained in the MOBOTIX cameras Recording x Software S MOBOTIX System i n Decentralized and secure 7 S MicroSD integrated SD Card Memory Reduces Storage Costs Events of up to 64 gigabytes can be recorded both within the camera and externally with no limitations via the network on a PC server or inexpensive NAS file system The high storage capacity and the possibility of recording only sequences in which something is occurring make it necessary to use external storage such as disk drives only rarely This reduces the need for recording devices network infrastructure and the maintenance expense of mechanical components in hard drives and fans The internal storage on the other hand is digital without mechanica
311. igure at least one camera but not more than two per file server NAS e On cameras using internal SD card storage every camera should send stor age failure notifications Setting Up Error Notification Likewise the camera can send e mails in case of system errors Open Admin Menu gt Error Notification and select the e mail profile you created for this purpose Configuring Audio Settings Activate the microphone if not prohibited by law or company regulations and the speaker in Audio and VoIP Telephony gt Speaker and Microphone Configuring the Outgoing Calls Phone Profiles Likewise create the corresponding call profiles in Audio and VoIP Telephony gt Outgoing Calls Settings Phone Profiles may vary according to different camera software versions Setting the Time and Date e Click on General Administration gt Time and Date e Time Server Select NTP RFC 1305 e Enter the IP addresses or host names of the time servers e Adjust automatically Activate this checkbox e Click on Set MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 348 396 Time Server Status 10 8 52 239 LOCAL 1 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline You can check the time server in the Time and Date dialog by clicking on the view link in the explanation to the Adjust automatically checkbox If the camera has synchronized the time the contents of th
312. iguring Where To Record e How should MxControlCenter access the camera s recordings See Configuring How MxControlCenter Accesses the Recordings in Section 4 5 4 Configuring Where to Record e Make sure that you have administration privileges on the MOBOTIX cameras you need for the installation e Make sure that you document the procedures you have set up for the user Configuration Example The following example shows you how to set up MxControlCenter and a camera so that the camera sends a network message to the MxControlCenter computer when a particular event i e alarm occurs When the computer receives this network message it automatically loads the preferred layout assigned to that camera MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 97 3 96 Example e MOBOTIX camera IP address 172 16 0 100 Video motion detection enabled Recordings are stored on the built in SD Flash card e MxControlCenter computer IP address 172 16 0 23 Alarm list enabled Alarm messages port 31754 Preferred layout for this camera West gate Player e MxControlCenter opens the preferred layout for this camera and plays back a sound file e User needs to acknowledge the alarm or else the sound file will be repeated every five seconds and can access the EmergencyProcedures txt instruction file to get i
313. ike to check the data Recording switch integrity later on activate the B Recording On a 7 Display recording symbol in live image Digital signing of recorded images 7 Digtal signing of recorded images checkbox see Section 4 8 5 Signing Recording Mode the Recorded Video Data R Recording Mode Enia ORAS ce zj iv Audio e Ifyou are configuring a Hemispheric Ful image recording Image Size Mega 1280x960 v camera you should activate the Full J image recording checkbox see Text Display Date Time Section 3 5 7 Using the Virtual recording start and duration PTZ Features When Playing Back sioi O Recordings WTP Note The HD 1280x720 and Full HD ib 1920x1080 resolutions available in i oe eee St ___in the live image and in the image pro a i Time before of files are not available for this mode eae Since these resolutions do not have an aspect ratio of 4 3 full image record a ing would clip parts of the image at E roer crs risa true C sene the top and the bottom of the image V External Recording e Set the event triggers that start a recording Inthe Recording Start and Duration group box activate the All Events checkbox in the Start Trigger list As of now MxControlCenter can only configure some of the event triggers that are listed on this tab of the Camera Configuration dialog Until this dialog can configure all event triggers of t
314. ile The action log also contains the reasons a user has entered if you are requiring such a reason for specific actions see Section 4 7 4 Requiring Users to Enter a Reason for an Action Configuring the Action Log To configure the action log select Tools gt Options from the menu and click on the Action Log tab Setting a Different Location for the Action Log e In the Action Log File group box click on the browse button and navigate to a folder of your choice e Use the proposed file name or set a new one then click on OK e f required fill in the User name and Password fields this may be the case if you are using a network share Setting the Archiving Options for the Action Log e In the Archive Action Log group box select one of the options e Incase you are using the When exceeding box enter a suitable size in megabytes no decimals When the action log reaches the limit specified in this group box MxControlCenter com presses the file and creates a new empty file Monitoring and Filtering the Action Log To see the contents of the action log select Tools gt Show Action Log from the menu You can now activate the filters see red frame in figure below and configure them by clicking on the corresponding button behind the checkbox In addition you can export the log file into an XML file format and print it toto S Export Print Time User Category Action Details a 4 12 119 29AM__ admin
315. ilt and zoom features integrated into the analog cameras of MxControlCenter using a joystick Live streams of the cameras can be recorded on a file server Live video streaming is used as a bridge between the video stream supplied by the ana log camera and Windows computers with MxControlCenter MxServer reads the video frames digitized by the frame grabber card and then converts these bitmap data into jpg images or M JPEG streams These images are then transferred to the requesting clients over the network computers with MxControlCenter The resolution of the transferred images steams can be configured with MxServer 768x576 640x480 VGA 320x240 CIF The maximum number of simultaneously requesting clients depends on the performance of the Windows computers running MxServer and the available bandwidth of the network connection Regardless of that the digitized video frames can be recorded by MxServer on the file server continuous recording and then searched and played back in MxControlCenter MxControlCenter directly accesses the data recorded on the server for that purpose 5 5 2 MxServer System Requirements and Installation Prerequisites for Using Analog or IP Cameras with MxServer e Computer minimum Pentium 4 or equivalent AMD processor with at least 512 MB RAM e Windows 2000 XP 2003 Server Vista Windows 7 e MOBOTIX MxServer e Third party analog or IP camera IP PTZ camera connected to the network Analog PTZ c
316. ime consuming searching for cameras in long lists Using the building plan as the basis makes the work much easier and faster MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 23 396 In addition to live images the most recent alarms or recordings can also be displayed in the plan immediately Special MxCC camera symbols contain information about every camera type and lens positioning Any number of these types of building plans can be created in MxCC Each layout can also YDlO FOO contain buttons for switching devices integrated in the network e g light Resta t A an door opener blinds Kurhaus CVENT SEARS nen LOCAL AROYE Various building plans can also be linked together directly This allows a fast search for the camera for example at the customer parking lot of branch XY via real maps A German map contains links to all branch establishments gt each branch establish ment with all branches gt each branch with its building plan gt building plan XY with parking lot camera and five additional cameras MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 24 396 Practical Camera Layouts In a grid layout the image windows can be of varying size e g for panorama images A specific layout can be assigned to the cameras prefer ably in case of alarm location la
317. in Downloading and Updating the Software in Two Steps e g Instead of using the Install button to automatically update the selected cameras you can Spel eS also click on the Save button In this case Update Assistant downloads the selected file piel oda Santee and you can later update the cameras by clicking on the Upload Software button If you click on the down arrow of this button see adjacent figure you can upload one of the software versions you already downloaded to the selected cameras After that the process proceeds as outlined in the Downloading and Updating the Software in One Step sec tion Using the Software Downloads Dialog The Software Downloads dialog r T Tools gt Software downloads in the o ofai MxControlCenter men u shows an There are 136 new software packages available for download from update mobotix com r Software Packages overview of the available software ver ya f Name Platform Version Time Languages Extension sions It shows the same information a MX System 4 04 19 the Software Packages panel of the E paea r2e qzaumza 5 13 11 Update Assistant see The Software Sanaa A a Packages Panel i MX System 4 0 2 33 r2 s D24M Q24M M24M 7 8 10 n new mpl German Russian Japanese English It Similar to the Software Packages panel ou can use the tabs at the bottom to er oo y is M22M D12 V12 022M M12 Q022M 7 6 10 switch between camera and application new mpl English Chi
318. ing of printouts Video Export Made Easy MxCC makes the processing and export of recorded video clips with sound particularly easy Both individual and several clips can be selected and exported at once by a mouse click They can be either unprocessed original clips or files to process later e g only relevant time sequences or details changed using PTZ MOBOTIX has developed its own compression method as MxPEG It requires less network load and computing power and is accordingly extremely efficient For third parties these MxPEG videos can be exported together with a simple viewer version of MxCC that can only be used for pure playback and viewing However direct export into standard formats such as AVI and M JPEG is also available in MxCC MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MXxCC printout with original image above and zoom image below CARA AKY ArAdrrnce 11 Qn Q Camera IP Adaress 10 8 0 118 Recording time 9 15 2010 3 52 PM e printing time 9 15 2010 3 52 PM sAAKAL mn nATY rAr WWW MODOTIX cOoMm 3 6 3 96 Get the Most of What Is There ET TT Later Video Movement Detection Each video recording of a MOBOTIX camera can also be searched later in MxCC for changes using the VM windows feature VM Video Motion For example a VM window is placed over a door using the mouse and the recording sequences are immediately display
319. ing Extra Windows to Display Video Sources 76 3 2 4 Using Sequencers to Automatically Switch Cameras or Layouts 77 3 2 5 Using a Video Wall to Display Cameras 78 3 2 6 Using the Audio Features of a Camera 79 3 2 7 Using the Camera to Switch Lights and Open Doors 80 3 2 8 Using Image Post Processing on Live Images 80 3 2 9 Using the Virtual PTZ Functions on Live Images 82 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature 92 3 3 Display Modes of the Application Window 94 3 3 1 Scaling and Display Commands 94 3 3 2 Using Saved Views 96 3 3 3 Functions When the Application Window Is Minimized 97 3 4 How the Alarm Features Work 98 3 4 1 Visual Alarm Features 99 3 4 2 Acoustic Alarm Features 102 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms 103 3 5 Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 106 3 5 1 Example Scenarios 106 3 5 2 Search Playback in a Live Display Window 109 3 5 3 Search Playback in Layouts with Display Windows in Player Mode 113 3 5 4 Synchronized Search Playback of Several Cameras 114 3 5 5 Playback in Layouts with Alarm Player Windows 115 3 5 6 Post Processing of Recorded Images 116 3 5 7 Using the Virtual PTZ Features When Playing Back Recordings 118 3 5 8 Using Event Searches 119 3 5 9 Using Post Video Motion Detection in Recordings 126 3 5 10 Using the Video Search 129 3 5 11 Playing Back Recordings from the Local Archive 131 3 5 12 Checking the Data Integrity of Recordings 132 3 6 Saving Printing and Exporting 135 3 6 1 Saving Single Images 135 3 6 2 Printing Sing
320. ing an Existing View above e MxControlCenter stores the last view you used for the next launch Deleting a View e Select View gt Saved views gt Delete view from the menu e Inthe Delete View dialog select an existing view from the Name dropdown e Click on Delete to remove the view and to close the dialog You cannot delete the saved MxControlCenter views that are written in square brack ets e g A11 Creating a Reduced Bare Bones MxControlCenter View Creating such a minimum view of MxControlCenter is commonly required when setting up a system with minimum user interaction This can be the case at a factory gate for example where the gate guard is restricted to viewing the video streams and maybe switching between several layouts Such a bare bones user interface most probably needs some protection to avoid user manipulation You should hence create a dedicated user group on the workstation for all users that will be using this MxControlCenter installation and assign the proper privileges MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 194 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration To set up a reduced view 1 Create an MxControlCenter user group and user and set the privileges see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights Set up the layouts and make one the start layout see Section 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts
321. ing v Reload now By setting MxAnalytics as the search mode the properties bar in the right corner of the window has the following elements BB macontroiCenter o o File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Help BSB Jos hBsog H28O G eaasasBslaeso o lt MA Navigator LAYOUTS Sources Line count profile CurrentiVeel Set Date Expert e ss Box SEQ hl neces nn Btu Search mode Heatmapprofie LastDay SetDete Day 19 07 2012 v Export 3 Select the desired profile in the Counting line profile and Heat map profile selection box and set the date if needed Counting line and heat map profiles Days periods of time and type of export weekly monthly are specified in the predefined report profiles Set date The period of time in the selected profile can be adjusted by setting a reference date Activate the Set date checkbox and select the desired date The current date is automatically set as the reference date if no date is entered MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com It is not necessary to perform steps two and three for predefined MxAnalytics evalua tions Adjusting the date in step three is an exception 148 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter E MControlCenter Navigator Datei Ansicht Layout Videoquelle Aufzeichnung Extras Hilfe EIS oer HBg 2e wH elana 0 o p900 A The movemen
322. ing with MxControlCenter Configurations 231 396 Add a comma and the absolute file name i e including the path at the end of the Target field C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe MxNoSave C MxCC GateGuards SouthGate ini Remember not fo use quotes before and after the absolute file name or else MxControlCenter will not start folder specified in the Start in field When using an absolute file name MxControlCenter ignores any working Click on OK to close the dialog e Copy the different shortcuts to the users Desktop folders or to the users network share Loading a Specific Configuration Using a Relative File Name Using a relative file name for the configuration file i e without the path works just like when using an absolute file name see previous section The only difference is that you specify the configuration file without the path and the working folder Target field launch command C Program Files MOBOTIX MxCC MxCC exe MxNoSave SouthGate ini Start in field working folder C MxCC GateGuards The shortcut properties dialog looks like in this figure 38 MxCC GateGuards South Gate Properties Details __ Previous Versions FS MxCC GateGuards South Gate Target type Application Target location MxCC MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 238 3
323. interesting scenes in MxControlCenter and to export the compiled scenes as one video This section will show you how to use the Export List dialog to collect the interesting scenes and to set the format of the exported video Once you have set the video format and the export options you can click on the Export button to create the video The Export List Dialog Export List Source Sequence Start Stop e 24 thio2 1 11 11 6 33 03 AM 1 12 11 1 40 11 PM Video sequences from one or more m1 thilo 1 17 11 3 54 23 AM 1 17 11 4 09 10 AM cameras Export from 1 17 11 3 54 23 AM to 1 17 11 4 09 10 AM Slider control with 7 start stop markers 12 23 10 10 29 59 AM 1 17 11 8 45 12 AM Export format of 7 target video rte dns POET DIOCESES EEES Export as MxPEG mxg v Settings v Copy application files Details w as ZIP archive Container MxPEG mxg video MxPEG audio MxPEG max file size 128 MB Check Digital Signature Check Cose Export options You can fill the Export List with video sequences from different cameras and using all methods provided by MxControlCenter such as Player windows event searches recordings in the local archive as well as the Video Search dialog When exporting you should keep the Copy application files checkbox activated This exports the video data the application files and the PlayVideo cmd file Double clicking on this file automatically launch
324. interface how to modify camera settings how to set up the alerting and recording functions how to configure playback and evaluation of recordings and how to adjust the options for storing printing and exporting videos In addition you will also find out how to manage user groups and users how to make the system more secure and how to work with MxControlCenter configurations Itis assumed that you have properly installed and connected the cameras to MxControlCenter see Chapter 2 System Installation and Initial Operation and that you are familiar with the basic operation of the application see Chapter 3 Using MxControlCenter After installing for the first time MxControlCenter does not have any users This automatically means that you have all rights on the system and that you can change the configuration as you like lf however you cannot change the configuration of the MxControlCenter system you are probably not logged in as a user that belongs to the admins group see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights Note that creating user accounts in a multi user installation is a must if you are set ting up a professional video surveillance system For more information on this topic see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights For additional information on how to make the MOBOTIX video surveillance system more secure see Section 4 8 Security Considerations 4 1 Getting Started Befor
325. ion A 4 Configuring the Camera Network Settings You are now ready to set up the cameras Before you can start to configure the cameras themselves however you need to set their IP addresses according to the IP address grouping scheme see Section A 2 1 Defining Hardware Groups The ideal tool for this purpose is MxControlCenter since it can automatically assign IP addresses from a range of addresses to a set of cameras in one step Note that you will change the camera host names later see Changing the Camera Names in Section A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras Before starting make sure that the cameras have been powered up and that you can reach them via the network When dealing with many cameras it may be advisable to change the network configuration in sets of e g 20 to 30 cameras within a range of IP addresses e g from 192 168 1 100 to 119 for 20 cameras Power up the cameras of the first set proceed with steps 1 to 9 below then repeat steps 2 to 9 for each remaining set of cameras MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring the Camera Network Settings 34 3 96 In order to configure the network settings of all powered up cameras of a set of cameras at once it is best to use MxControlCenter and the Add Video Sources dialog 1 Start MxControlCenter 2 The automatic search finds all MOBOTIX cameras select Video Source gt Add from
326. ion Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 2 2 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference Note The HD 1280x720 and Full HD 1920x1080 resolutions available in the live image and in the image profiles are not available for this mode Since these resolutions do not have an aspect ratio of 4 3 full image recording would clip parts of the image at the top and the bottom of the image JPEG Quality This parameter allows using a different JPEG quality for full image recording than for the live image for example Text Display These parameters allow showing different text messages in the images for full image recording than for the live image for example Full image recording should be applied especially when recording Hemispheric cameras which rely strongly on the vPTZ features in the live image This means that you can use the vPTZ features to pan tilt and zoom the live image while the camera is recording full images at 1 fps in MEGA or QXGA resolution Thanks to the advanced distortion correction features of MxControlCenter and MxEasy you can still play back and examine the recorded full images of Hemispheric cameras normally that is without distortion You should use at least MEGA format ideally QXGA if you are using Full image recording The applications need high resolution to deliver satisfactory image quality when viewing the recorded images in MxControlCenter or MxEasy Since the processing power
327. ions You can call up the movement and counting line evaluations as daily heat map reports or as weekly and monthly counting lines reports To do this select heat map counting lines report profiles There are several predefined profiles available Analysis of the data and its display is performed according to the settings for the profile selected You can also create custom report profiles However atthe moment this is only possible in the camera software with a web browser For additional information on creating report profiles see Section 4 6 3 Customizing the Report Profiles Used for Analysis Optional It is possible to create multiple MxAnalytics evaluations depending on your needs To reduce your workload you can save the various MxAnalytics evaluations in order to call them us as predefined evaluations with one click Open the EVENT SEARCHES amp MxANALYTICS section of the Navigator sidebar panel to call up the evaluations 1 Click on Search or a predefined MxAnalytics analysis by default the section only contains Search to display the user interface 2 Select the desired camera in the properties bar Source and set the search mode e MxAnalytics fi m pe E MControlCenter rfO File View Layout VideoSource Recording Took Help IS tav HBa n e a H laam a TE A Navigator 4 2 LAYOUTS Sources From Now 7 Sert By Date Time v Reload Automatealy v B mm 4 VIDEO SOURCES Search mode Ungi Now Order Descend
328. irect storage of the live images in the local archive recordings of suspicious events Evaluation of recordings Event search Yes Use of individually configurable search profiles e g based on time cameras events Later movement detection Yes Analysis of recorded video files for movements in the desired area Parallel time synchronized replay of Yes Replay of the recordings corresponding several cameras to the actual time sequence Reference time based evaluation Yes A mouse click makes a simple change to the recording of other cameras at the same point in time reference time MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxControlCenter Functions Export Export list Yes Merging of selected video clips from different cameras for export purposes Various export formats Yes AVI and Quicktime as video with sound Export optional with without image Yes Export of the original data for use correction optimization permissible in a court of law export of prepared files for optimal view Security User management with group access Yes Group user management including rights limitation of specific work areas and mandatory action commentaries Failure detection of individual cameras Yes Including notification by phone call storage systems e mail network message Dead man s switch Yes Includi
329. is camera MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 60 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Activating SSL Encryption Once SSL Encryption has been activated all communication to and from the camera is encrypted using SSL Using this encryption method makes eavesdropping on the data and access information virtually impossible To activate SSL encryption on the camera proceed as follows e Activate encrypted HTTP in the camera web interface Admin Menu gt Network Setup gt Web Server gt HTTPS Settings gt Enable HTTPS Click on Set then Close and return to the Admin Menu then the reboot camera in General Tasks gt Reboot e Wait until camera is available again and test by replacing http by https in the address of the camera You may have to acknowledge the certificate and allow an exception in the browser list for the camera e Activate Port Forwarding for the camera port on the router e Activate the Secure Connections SSL checkbox in Camera Properties for the selected camera in MxControlCenter Note that you may have to change the port back to 8001 as in the example e Click on Apply or on OK to apply the changes for this camera Address _mycamera dyndns org Port 3001 All communication to and from the camera is now using an SSL encrypted connection Note that you can also use the encrypted connection in a web browser
330. jour i Different subnet 48 video sources found 29 selected s erat Select all MOBOTIX cameras 4 Right click on the cameras gt Configure Network to open the Configure Selected Cameras dialog 5 Activate the Use the following IP address range option 6 Enter the start and end of the IP address range for this set of cameras This computer accesses the following subnet s 192 168 1 0 24 Get IP address automatically DHCP 7 Enter the subnet mask and standard Use the following IP address range gateway IP address start 192 168 1 100 8 Click on OK to close the Configure IIS 102 168 1 139 Selected Cameras dialog oo Ai t 255 255 9 Wait until all cameras have rebooted then disconnect them from the net work V Store configuration in camera Standard gateway 192 168 1 254 Lx oaa MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 42 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline Finishing the Network Configuration e Click on Cancel to close the Add Video Sources dialog e Close MxControlCenter without saving the configuration In case you saved the configuration anyway you should delete the MxCC ini configuration file in the current MxControlCenter working folder A 5 Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration Instead of configuring many cameras individually you will now create a ma
331. k on an event to examine the recorded video footage of a camera The operators can now select interesting parts and add them to the export list If other cameras have recorded relevant video footage the operators can also add the footage to the export list MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 109 396 After having collected the video clips they want to send to the police the operators can export the clips in the export list as one MxPEG clip The operators can then send the exported MxPEG clip together with a viewer version of MxControlCenter to the police The recorded video is then played back simply by double clicking the PlayVideo cmd batch file without having to install any software As an alternative the police can install the MxPEG DirectShow codec and can play back an exported MxPEG file in Windows Media Player Using Post VM on Continuous Recordings In addition to the event controlled camera recordings of the cameras that are securing the factory s perimeter some cameras have been set up for continuous recording They are recording video continuously at a set rate e g 2 fps 24 hours every day to make sure that specific areas of the factory are monitored around the clock A missing computer at the entrance of the storage facility requires checking the record ings of such a camera Since the Q24M Hemispheric is mounted to
332. k on the video source to select it yellow frame You can now use the playback buttons Navigating the Recordings in this section to play back the recorded video of the selected video source A display window in Player mode is always attached to one video source i e this display element does not change its video source dynamically in contrast to the Alarm Player windows described in Section 3 5 5 Playback in Layouts with Alarm Player Windows MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 114 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 5 4 Synchronized Search Playback of Several Cameras MxControlCenter can use time synchronized playback mode to show the recordings of all cameras in one layout as they happened You can use this mode for both event and continuous recordings This playback mode works similar to a timeline in a video editor event recording shown below Firstimage Current position Timeline Time gap 3 ed EN S eat U ET ES DA ba Ga a N VSS A et ES VA VE EA Ga PS EA VG DA VA PS Ea E st a VS VA Pe O V Ped EA BeA P Vea US O VEI E EE S E A A Vaa VeA es UE UA Pk ek Ue VE VCA i UA Aea ee Ee Ves Da ime A Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 The only difference between the event recording shown above and continuous recording is that continuous recording does not have any time gaps Click on the Player mode for all video sources
333. l Functions at a Glance 20 Practical Camera Layouts 22 Cost Efficient Monitor Wall Solution 26 More Security in Case of an Alarm 28 Fast Availability of Video Evidence 32 Get the Most of What Is There 36 Secure Handling of Sensitive Data 38 Simple MOBOTIX Installation 40 Total Costs Make the Difference 42 An Example Donbass Arena Ukraine 44 MxCC Performance Details 46 2 System Installation and Initial Operation 50 2 1 Setting Up MxControlCenter Overview 50 2 2 Power Supply and Network Connection of Cameras 51 2 2 1 Power Supply When Connected Directly to a Computer 51 2 2 2 Power Supply and Network Connection Using a PoE Switch 52 2 3 Installing MxControlCenter 53 2 3 1 System Requirements 53 2 3 2 Automatic Installation of MxControlCenter 55 2 4 Launching MxControlCenter for the First Time 56 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources 56 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter 59 2 4 3 Initial Installation of Hemispheric and 180 Cameras 62 2 4 4 Saving the Initial Configuration 63 3 Using MxControlCenter 64 3 1 Elements of the Application Window 65 3 1 1 MxControlCenter User Interface Elements 66 3 1 2 MxControlCenter Toolbar Buttons 68 3 1 3 MxControlCenter Sidebar Panels 70 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 396 4 396 MxCC User Manual 3 2 Live Video Surveillance 7 3 2 1 Displaying Video Content in Layouts 71 3 2 2 Switching Layouts 75 3 2 3 Us
334. l camera s viewing direction is perpendicular to the previous camera Click on this button to cycle through the four views North East South West and MxControlCenter displays one virtual camera at a time eie showing the next one This display mode does not support zooming If you cannot use any of the features described above one the following may apply e The camera image is not zoomed i e original image or after pressing the 1x Zoom button In this case you need to zoom in before you can pan or tilt the image e The PTZ feature is locked and you cannot unlock it by clicking on the lock icon In this case you do not have the proper rights to use the PTZ controls If you need these features you should ask your system administrator for assistance 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature The MOBOTIX cameras in the MxControlCenter installation can be set up to record the video stream after specific events have occurred e g when someone walks into a room or they can record continuously These recordings are stored either in the cameras or on file servers Since the storage capacity on these storage locations is limited old recordings are usually overwritten after a certain period of time The Live recording feature of MxControlCenter on the other hand creates recordings that are permanently stored locally on your computer as MxPEG video clips In addition you can start and stop the live recording manually
335. l components and is therefore maintenance free Backup Storage Standard IT Storage e g Hard Drives Failover Storage Connection Loss Even when external recording is preferred for cameras in positions at risk the internal storage ensures that the video will be buffered in the the event of bandwidth fluctuations or even network failures In any case the decentralized system ensures a lower recording load so that ten times more cameras than usual can be stored simultaneously on a PC or server The results are obviously neither postage stamp size video nor individual images but high resolution HDTV video with sound MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Recording Computer 7 396 ps in high two million For a Wide Variety of Applications MxCC is versatile and is suitable not only for security applications MxCC in use from left to right Traffic monitoring in Ghent Lohbriigge power plant and Commerzbank For Every Size of System As professional video management software MxCC is subject to no restrictions either with regard to technology or system size It makes no difference if you only want to use one camera like the shop owner on the corner or several hundred simultaneously like an international football arena For Every Situation The possibilities of MxCC primarily in combination with the high resolution network camera
336. lCenter Image Area slightly distorted Area Corrected distortion corrected If you examine the blue line in the right hand image above you will notice that the line is straight Note that the available views and features vary depending on where the Hemispheric camera is installed on the wall the ceiling or the floon If you have selected a Hemispheric camera model in the layout the PTZ Controls panel will be expanded so that you can execute the commands available for this camera model e Full Image Delivers the full image as generated by the image sensor Although this mode is available it is not suited for live viewing as the images are distorted by the wide angle lens The Full Image display mode of the cameras is to be preferred if several workstations are accessing the same cameras This way MxControlCenter can handle image correction and the users can execute their own PTZ actions without disturbing the other ones MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 87 396 e Image Area Delivers a zoomed section of the full image i e anytime you zoom into the image e Area Corrected Delivers a section of the image where the distorted lines have been corrected This is the default display mode e Surround Delivers a virtual Quad view as if four cameras would be pointing into four different directions perpendicular to one anoth
337. le Images 136 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage 137 3 7 Using MxAnalytics 146 3 7 1 MxAnalytics Overview 146 3 7 2 Calling Up Evaluations 147 3 8 Additional User Functions 149 3 8 1 Working with the Dead Man s Switch 149 3 8 2 Using the Two Man Rule 150 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Contents 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 44 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 6 5 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 3 4 7 4 System Configuration Getting Started Installing MxControlCenter Manually Updating an Older Version of MxControlCenter Installing MxControlCenter Language Packages Installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG DirectShow Codec Configuring a Common Time Server MxStatus Status Monitoring for Multiple MxControlCenter Computers Creating and Editing Layouts Creating Layouts Element Types Used in Layouts Defining Grid Layouts Defining Background Layouts More Options When Editing Layouts Setting Up Live Video Monitoring Planning a Layout Structure Configuring Layout Selection Configuring Sequencers Configuring Live Recording and the Local Archive Configuring Extra Windows Configuring MxControlCenter Remote Control and a Video Walll Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface Con
338. le in the Deciding on a Target Video Format section above MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 142 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Setting the Video Format Export List z Source Sequence Start Stop mi thilo 12 6 10 12 59 37 AM 12 6 10 10 49 18 PM m1 thilo 12 7 10 6 04 26 AM 12 7 10 6 14 49 PM Time Range eae 12 1 10 6 42 04 AM 12 8 10 7 46 22 AM Export as MxPEG mxg v Settings Copy application files Seta Container MxPEG mxg video MxPEG audio MxPEG max fle size 128 MB Check Digital Signature Check Close MxControlCenter offers several predefined export profiles that cover the majority of cases On rare occasions you may have to use the custom settings but this should be done only for very special purposes MxControlCenter does notinclude support for exporting AVC H 264 videos For an explanation please read Why MxControlCenter Does Not Support AVC H 264 at the beginning of this manual This section also provides a list of applications that can convert the MxControlCenter export formats to AVC H 264 You can create the following formats when exporting the contents of the Export List dialog e File Server Structure Folder structure with JPEG images or MxPEG clips as stored by the camera for playback in MxControlCenter or MxEasy Unlike the other profiles below creating a file server structure does not
339. lick on the Search mode button e Deselect all event types except the Video Motion items MxControlCenter only shows the events triggered by Video Motion 1 and Video Motion 2 move your mouse over the events displayed in the search results to see the event type in the tooltips Sorting Events The Sort by and Order dropdowns allow setting the sorting criteria date time video source etc and specifying the sorting order of the displayed events ascending descending Setting the Display Options If you want to see new events automatically as they have been recorded set the Reload dropdown to Automatically To force a manual reload click on the Reload now button To adjust the size of the search result images move the slider in the properties bar to the right and left The changes are applied immediately and MxControlCenter shows the results If MxControlCenter searches many cameras it will show an indicator see adjacent figure in the Player panel Creating New Event Searches To create new event searches you can use one of the following methods in the Navigator sidebar panel e Create an empty search Right click anywhere in the EVENT SEARCHES section Select New search from the context menu Enter a name that describes the search e Duplicate an existing search Right click on an existing search in the EVENT SEARCHES section Select Duplicate search from the context menu Enter a name that describes t
340. ll additional languages see Section 4 1 3 Installing MxControlCenter Language Packages 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources When MxControlCenter is launched for the first time the Add Video Sources dialog box opens Add Video Sources Name IP Address Path Type Version Status e OGEUEST SE 10 8 100 132 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour Cancel Search ODE STO Sk 10 8 100 135 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour mx 10 8 104 199 10 8 104 199 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour Mri 5 E mx 10 8 104 200 10 8 104 200 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour TSS ASS Ee mx 10 8 104 2 10 8 104 201 M2 M Seare MXV4 0 4 19 Bonjour menaam fe mx10 8 104 10 8 104 203 M2 Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour E MPEG do ODES 10 8 104 204 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour poop S mx10 8 104 10 8 104 205 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour Recording path E mx 10 8 10 8 104 206 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour E mx10 8 104 2 10 8 104 207 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour ODES 10 8 104 208 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour mx10 8 104 2 10 8 104 209 M2 M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour ei mx 10 8 104 2 16 10 8 104 210 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour OLE tes 10 8 104 211 M24 i Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour OGLE GES 30 10 8 104 212 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour E mx10 8 104 2 10 8 104 213 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour ODES LES 10 8 104 215 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour ODES irs 1
341. ll cameras at once In case of a critical situation the second operator stores the images or live recordings to MxControlCenter s Local Archive The second operator then sends the recordings to the authorities and switches back to the live display This allows following the offenders so that the authorities can pick them out of the crowd Synchronized Playback of Recordings In order to prepare video clips for a case against one of the offenders the operator of the surveillance system at the soccer stadium is reviewing the recorded video footage For this purpose the operator uses the synchronized playback feature of MxControlCenter In this mode MxControlCenter plays back the recordings of all cameras in a layout in synchronized fashion i e the recordings are shown as they happened at the time Once an interesting part of the recording has been identified the operator can set the start and end markers for the clip and can add it to the Export List Finding All Recorded Events Every morning when starting their workday the operators of the video surveillance system at a factory are required to check for new events that happened during the night They need to check the cameras at the entrances of the factory and additional cameras that are securing specific points of interest e g server room parking deck etc These cameras MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com
342. ll cameras that have made recordings at a specific point in time or aeae f immediately before or after J e a Vers 1 15 aamonesw ENE Hemnuberk batalotun wat 7 pa setter I PTZ Controls Control of the pan tilt functions and image detail enlargement of one camera PTZ pan tilt zoom using a virtual joystick Camera Soft Buttons O Contain all individually programmed functions of a selected camera e g special image setting start irrigation via camera etc MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 21 396 Title Bar For a quick orientation primarily when several program windows are open or distributed to different monitors a Dlo JOO AA i peel L Menu Bar O a ied Function areas with associated sub os rece nA menu items such as Switch views Forschung 2if Open files etc _ Toolbar Q Buttons for the most important func tions such as live announcements via a camera or printing Display Panel 8 All cameras of the currently selected layout e g all cameras of the Hamburg ae 1 gt branch office display as a grid or embed E as anicon video window in a background image e g real building plan i Wy Stadtbahn T inii p Koileweork Universitit Fis kbi s Alarm List Chronological
343. ll other settings of the cameras see Section 5 1 7 Saving and Uploading Settings of One or More Cameras If you want to use encrypted connections with a third party or a generated cer tificate on all cameras you will have to upload generate the certificate separately for each camera Step 4 Instruct MxControlCenter to Use SSL for Connecting to the Cameras Now that you have properly set up the camera s to use SSL you need to instruct MxControlCenter to use SSL when connecting to the cameras Open the Navigator panel and expand the CAMERAS section MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX Q24 2 2 amp 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Select one or more cameras use SHIFT click or CTRL click to select more than one camera Right click on one of the selected cameras and select Properties from the context menu MxControlCenter opens a Properties of lt camera name gt dialog for each selected camera Activate the Secure connection SSL checkbox and set a port if you have assigned a different port than 443 in Step 3 Activate HTTPS in the Camera and Set a Port Then click on OK to close the dialog Repeat this step for all open Properties of lt camera name gt dialog boxes Check all layouts to make sure that you do not have any connection errors this typi cally happens when a camera has not been set up properly to allow
344. low The layout sequencer automatically cycles through all defined layouts of an MxControlCenter installation To set the number of seconds to show each camera or layout e Select Tools gt Options from the menu e Open the General tab e Inthe Behavior section enter the number of seconds to show each camera or layout in the Sequencer time box Configuring Sequencer Windows in Layouts A sequencer window is a display element used in layouts to cycle through different live video streams MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com R f Layout Sequencer Camera Sequencer wF Layout Sequencer Camera Sequencer R 2 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration To define a sequencer window proceed as described in Section 4 2 2 Element Types Used in Layouts Make sure that you document the following items e How do the operators switch layouts e Which one of the layouts is the Start Layout e Which sequencers have been configured and what do they do 4 3 4 Configuring Live Recording and the Local Archive MxControlCenter uses the local archiveto permanently store video sequences from various sources This prevents video sequences from getting lost when the MOBOTIX cameras overwrite older video sequences when the cameras are storing new sequences The operators can fill this folder using one of these methods EL e Click on the Live recording butt
345. low Alarm Messages Activate alarm message server listening for TCP IP messages Port 31754 Allowed IP addresses Accept only camnotify and MxCC Alarm message types V Add image to Alarm List V Open extra live window Restore MxCC when minimized V Switch to Preferred Layout V Explanation of Options Port This is the port on the computer on which MxControlCenter listens for alarm messages from cameras Allowed IP addresses By default MxControlCenter accepts network messages from all other network devices When you enter a filter string e g 10 MxControlCenter filters network messages and only allows messages from network devices that match the filter Accept only camnotify and MxCC Alarm message types This filter checks the contents of the alarm messages and rejects messages that do not correspond to the allowed types Add image to Alarm List When receiving an accepted message MxControlCenter adds the alarm image to the alarm list Restore MxCC when minimized If this option is unchecked MxControlCenter will stay minimized even if an alarm message arrives Checking this option restores MxControlCenter s application window and brings to the foreground Switch to Preferred Layout Automatically loads the preferred layout of the alert ing camera if such a layout has been set see Setting the Preferred Layout for the Camera below MOBOTIX AG e Security Visi
346. lowed IP addresses field On the Remote Control tab enter the IP addresses of devices that are allowed to remote control MxControlCenter in the Allowed IP addresses field Network messages from unlisted IP addresses will now be rejected On the Alarm Handling tab make sure the Accept only camnotify and MxCC Alarm message types option in the Alarm messages section is activated Do not use any of the ports user names passwords or other entries that appear in this manual Enter the user name and password of the dedicated MOBOTIX camera user to access the cameras see Camera Settings in the Browser above MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 2 4 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration ation A computer running MxControlCenter with open ports e g when using the remote control and alarm handling ports should never have a direct connection to the Internet Make sure that the computer is adequately protected by an appropriate firewall Built in firewalls e g Windows firewall on the MxControlCenter computer do not provide effective protection and cannot replace a hardware firewall 4 8 3 Securing the MxControlCenter Workstation To protect the MxControlCenter installation it is highly recommended to create at least two users on the Windows computer an administrator and a user Example Folders e Program folder c Program
347. m amp Record Multiwatcher 5 Audio on UC Event MxPEG on _ _ MxPEG off UC Event E LEDs Blink Play Sound A 5 4 Additional Camera Settings Depending on the video surveillance system that you are setting up the further configura tion of the camera may vary to a great extent Again the general idea is to save time by configuring certain settings even though they may not be used on all cameras For example you can configure the e mail server settings and create e mail profiles In case you need to set up e mail notifications on a camera later on you only need to select the predefined profile Depending on the customer requirements it may be useful to configure the following settings e Set the network message profiles in Admin Menu gt Transfer Profiles gt IP Notify Profiles so the camera can send alarm messages later on e Do likewise to create the corresponding profiles in Admin Menu gt Transfer Profiles gt FTP Profiles if FTP transfers are part of the system e Create the time tables and set the custom days in Admin Menu gt General Administration gt Time Tables e Possibly move the time of the daily camera reboot to an uncritical time during the day in Admin Menu gt General Administration gt Time Tasks A 5 5 Storing and Testing the Master Configuration Before distributing the master configuration you need to permanently store the camera configuration then reboot and test the config
348. m image or calls previously defined telephone numbers e Devices integrated in the system such as lights or door locks are switched on e Analarm is sent to selected PC workstations with MxCC displaying for example the building plan including a live image of the camera reporting the alarm loca tion layout in case of alarm e Display of instructions and important background information in the location layout e g telephone numbers contact persons etc e Remote alarm alerting to an alarm center or the police e g by phone call or e mail e New York Notification Alarm Center Tokyo MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MOBOTIX cameras use VoIP SIP and H 264 i e the most advanced international telephone standard based on ISDN and analog telephony 30 396 More Security in Case of an Alarm Only after all alarms from the list are clicked does the status display switch from red to green at the top For each alarm the display shows how long ago it was Acknowledging Alarms The responsible person must act appropriately after an alarm is triggered MxCC provides an Acknowledgment Feature that can be used to ensure that all alarms are noticed and checked Once all alarms have been acknowledged the status field of the alarm list changes from red to green Example if for example a camera detects the movements of an intr
349. m images and sequences before removing Number of Sequences i V Unlimited Maximum number of sequences to store Set X Factory Restore X Close More e Click on Set Make sure that you are using at least the Storage Size limit and also make sure that the cameras have enough storage space on the storage target Use the other storage limits Time to Keep or Number of Sequences as required MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Distributing a Camera Master Configuration 347 396 Creating Required E Mail Profiles In order to be able to send storage failure messages and error notifications to IT staff owners or security staff later on you should set the global e mail options and create the required e mail profiles now Open Admin Menu gt Transfer Profiles gt E Mail Profiles in the browser and proceed as outlined in the camera help Setting Up Storage Failure Detection In case the selected storage target fails the camera must send an e mail Open Admin Menu gt Storage Failure Detection and select the e mail profile you created for this purpose It is highly recommended to always use this feature in order to avoid the loss of recordings In larger projects you should activate this feature later on when adjusting sets of cameras see Section A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras e Oncameras using file server NAS storage conf
350. m selected camera For more information on how to change the display and filtering options of alarms see Acknowledging Alarms in this section Manually added alarms Adding Images to the Alarm List below are always acknowledged by default MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 04 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Display Options of the Alarm List When the Alarm List contains many cameras and alarms you may want to adjust how MxControlCenter displays the Alarm List contents Use the buttons below to change the display options e Hides the images in the alarm list and shows only the title bars of the alarms Fa e Enlarges the alarm list images twice the regular size T e Enables alarm list filtering Filtering the Alarm List below Filtering the Alarm List T Since the Alarm List can contain many alarms at once you want to filter the alarm list Note that the alarm list filter button can have more than two states To test the filter keep on clicking on the filter button until it returns to the original state Depending on whether or not you have selected a camera yellow frame MxControlCenter provides these options for filtering the alarm list ae e No camera selected Shows only Lost Connection errors Click on the button again to return to the unfiltered list mooeone Connection Lost 10
351. m settings Possible Cause MxCC configuration not saved before quitting previously Solution Save MxCC configuration using toolbar button or when closing MxCC alarm list does not con tain any alarm images of the alerting camera although it is a alarm messages via the network Camera is not listed in the Navigator panel in the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section Add camera to this MxCC installation using Camera gt Add Firewall on MxCC computer is blocking the inbound alarm messages Add MxCC to the firewall exceptions see Configuring the Windows Firewall on the MxControlCenter Computer Camera and the MxCC com puter are in separate logical or physical networks Make sure that the camera and the MxCC computer are in the same logical networks or that the alarm messages are properly forwarded The camera is using a wrong IP address to send alarm mes sages to the MxCC computer Make sure that the proper IP address of the MxCC computer is used as an alarm target in Camera Configuration gt Network Messages The port of the alarm target to which the camera is sending the messages and the port on the MxCC computer used to receive these messages are not identical Make sure that the port of the alarm target in Camera Configuration gt Network Messages is the same as the
352. m the current position Click again J to stop Previous Goes back one image frame wm g Play Starts normal pa of the recorded gt images from the current position Click again to stop MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings V 3 96 Player Panel Player i Sidebar Window Name Explanation Next Goes forward one image frame D Frame Fast Starts fast forward playback of the recorded O sxspeed D gt Forward images from the current position Click again 2x speed to stop AAR Jump to Displays the first saved image Sapena KK Beginning Mex anced Jump to Displays the last saved image DEE Buttons for Playing Back Event Images Only The playback buttons within the red frame are marked by a red lightning bolt and are used to browse the event images only Use these buttons to get an overview over the recorded events Pia t a Name Explanation nrer Displays the previous event image Play Events Starts reverse playback of the recorded event images Backward from the current position Click again to stop Play Events Starts forward playback of the recorded event images PF Forward from the current position Click again to stop D Next Event Displays the next event image When using continuous recording MxControlCenter creates a pseudo event every minute also called minute event
353. mages although set to Event Continuous recording Intended behavior camera stores segmented MxPEG stream in jpg files of max 10 s length Only use MxCC to read file server contents B 1 3 Camera Issues Camera only shows gray image Possible Cause Lens missing lens protection foil still on lens Solution Mount lens remove protec tion foil Images of M24 D14 D24 Q24 cameras are out of focus Lens not properly focused Correct focus of lens Images in darkness are out of focus high image noise although this is a Day Night camera Minimum lighting required Install IR lamps for additional lighting Dual camera does not detect video motion in darkness Video motion only activated on Day sensor of Day Night camera Activate video motion on Night sensor Camera does not detect video motion in darkness Low Light Suppression for video motion detection acti vated Deactivate Low Light Suppression Camera does not reach maxi mum frame rate Frame rates depend on many factors resolution quality full image recording exposure times lighting etc Open camera in browser and select Image Program gt Fast in Quick Controls MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 6 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Troubleshooting Issue Camera uses wrong image resolution when recording f
354. mer cottage later on At this point you can enter different access data user and password see Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources and Section 5 3 Connecting Remote Cameras Using DynDNS MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Power Supply and Network Connection of Cameras 51 396 e Configure the network settings of the cameras MxControlCenter will prompt you to enter the new IP addresses of the cameras on the network or you can use DHCP to automatically set the IP addresses If there is a DHCP server e g a DSL router on the network MxControlCenter automatically selects the DHCP option see Section 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter e Generate layout Decide if you want to have MxControlCenter automatically generate a layout for you that contains all selected cameras After you have completed these steps MxControlCenter displays the selected cameras 2 2 Power Supply and Network Connection of Cameras You can supply the MOBOTIX cameras with power using the MOBOTIX Network Power Adapter MX NPA Po or a switch that supports the PoE standard IEEE 802 3af Both of these methods are briefly described in the following sections For information about additional power supply options and for more details see the Connecting The Camera To The Network And To The Power Supply section in the corresponding Camera Manual 2
355. meras 267 Analog PTZ cameras Connecting to MxServer 275 Apache Web Server Installing MxRemotePreview 281 Application Enhanced Features 238 Application scenarios 18 Arming glossary 370 Audio Camera Configuration tab 324 Auto Grid 25 Auto Grid glossary 370 Automatically Loading program settings 234 Automatic installation 40 55 AVC H 264 10 AVC Video glossary 370 Background Images Sidebar panel Layout Manager mode 70 Background layout glossary 370 Background layouts 22 Defining 170 Backing up Entire system 250 Bandwidth glossary 370 Bonjour glossary 370 Buttons Layout elements 73 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Index 381 396 C Camera alarms Configuring 198 Camera configuration Changing of many cameras at once 250 Camera Configuration Audio tab 324 Dialog 311 Events tab 325 Exposure tab 316 Image Settings tab 314 Network Messages tab 329 Overview tab 312 Camera connections Monitoring 232 Camera connection status Checking in Update Assistant 243 Camera layouts 22 Cameras Power supply 51 Camera settings Saving 247 Uploading 247 Camera softbuttons 20 Camera software Updating using Update Assistant 244 CamilO glossary 370 CCTV glossary 371 CF card glossary 371 Changing Configuration of many cameras at once 250 CIF glossary 371 CMOS glossary 371 Commands Display
356. mes from a MOBOTIX camera e Scenarios can be defined e g all parking spaces all vehicle access points and allows you to switch between individual monitors and the entire video wall at the push of a button MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 27 396 The same MxCC software as on the main computer runs oneach client but in remote operating mode The layouts of the clients are switched in the main computer e g display of parking lot 1 or 2 on monitor 4 The layout displayed on each client monitor can be changed via the main computer remote control function of MxCC MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 28 3 More Security in Case of an Alarm Whoever understands video surveillance systems knows that the surveillance personal has to constantly and permanently monitor the video terminals of all installed cameras at all times in order to discover an event and notify the police MxCC and the intelligent network cameras with built in sensors can detect disturbances independently and react with the necessary actions at lightning speed This can be done without the need for staff surveillance and at all times a B A gt Alarm Management z Ld cs l 2 Way Audio eeeee0e888 eeeeeeee g eeeeeee8868 ry eeeee888 eee ee TELELE E eeee0880808
357. ming Switch D e On Activates all events actions messages and recording features of the camera e Off Deactivates all of the above MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems gt Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 321 396 Signal Input Open SI Signal Input Closed Si If signal inputs have been configured on the camera you can assign the corresponding option to use as an arming switch for the camera Custom Signal 1 CS1 Custom Signal 2 CS2 Combined Signal CSL f time tables or custom signals have been configured on the camera you can use one of the custom or combined signals as an arming switch for the camera From Master Slave Mode If the camera is configured to operate in slave mode the arming switch will be switched on or off according to the master camera s arming status Recording Switch 2 Recording This switch lets you enable or disable the camera recorder If time tables customized signal switches or Master Slave mode have been configured one of these may be used to enable recording in the camera see Arming Switch above for an explanation of these settings Display recording symbol in live image When activated the camera shows the recording symbol in the upper right hand corner of a live image when it is recording Digital signing of recorded images When activated this setting adds a digital sig nature to the recorded images
358. mizes MxControlCenter to the taskbar http 192 168 1 182 8001 fullscreen 1 restores the MxControlCenter application window and displays it on top of other applications in full screen mode Getting a List of Remote Control Commands Enter the following link in the address bar of a browser to get a list of the supported parameters and values from the specified computer running MxControlCenter Syntax http lt ip_address gt lt port gt Example http 192 168 1 182 8001 orhttp 127 0 0 1 8001 ifMxControlCenter is running on the current computer List of Remote Control Commands Command Values Remarks Prompts MxControlCenter to show the images of the cameras with the speci lt IP address list of IP fied IP addresses as large as possible in 1p addresses gt ownip the program s display area The ownip keyword uses the IP address of the command issuer layout lt Layout name gt Shows the specified layout port 1 2 65535 Sets the port for a single IP address De Activates full screen display of the UE EEEREN 0 1 application 0 deactivates 1 activates Shows buttons Quick Controls etc 0 HES eonEnone 0 1 _ shows 1 hides the controls Selects the specified channel number of active 0 n or lt IP address gt the display window in a layout from left to right top to bottom starting at 0 zoom 0 1 Zooms the specified channel full 01 Executes fullscreen 1 hidecontrols 1
359. mobotix com 252 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features command in Update Assistant This mechanism lets you save and load cameras into Update Assistant without having to load them into the MxControlCenter installation The camera list file CameraList mxu can be renamed accordingly to describe the cameras location purpose or function and stored on file server as needed Thereby the user can group cameras and maintain them as a group Finding Cameras The first step to generate a camera list is to find all cameras on the physical network When starting Update Assistant with an empty camera list the application automatically starts searching for cameras To start the search manually click on the Search Cameras button Adding Cameras to a Camera List To add cameras that are not part of the current physical network e g remote cameras via DynDNS click on the Add Cameras button Then enter the IP Address IP Range URL User Password and Proxy information as required Creating a New Camera List You may want to place the cameras of your security system into different groups according to their function or location Using this approach you can make sure that all cameras for e g the gate guards use the same settings To create a new camera list file do the following 1 Click on File gt New Camera List to create an empty camera list in Update Assistant 2 Click on Add Cameras to open the Add Cameras dialog 3
360. mple view for live monitoring only and the view of the store detective Live monitoring only Reduced bare bones view with grid layouts that can be selected using the layout buttons in the toolbar Store detective s view View with all required sidebar elements Navigator Player PTZ Controls etc You can select this view after logging in If you are working on a multi user system i e you have used a specific user name and password to login to MxControlCenter you may not have the rights to save views in this case the View gt Save views menu command is not active For information on how to save different views Section 4 4 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Views Besides the customized views the following three preconfigured views are available in MxControlCenter Standard All control elements menu title bar etc the sidebar with Navigator Player control PTZ control Softbuttons and the toolbar at the top are shown Display area only Only the display area in the size of the MxControlCenter window is shown in this view Press the ESC key to return to the previous view Full screen The display area in the size of the entire screen is shown Press the ESC key to return to the previous view To activate one of these views select View gt Saved views from the menu or right click in the display area and select View gt Saved views from the context menu MxControlCenter stores the view that w
361. mportant phone numbers etc The IP addresses ports and layout names used here are only examples Make sure that you are using the proper IP addresses ports and layout names of your installation System Structure MOBOTIX camera 172 16 0 100 MxControlCenter workstation 172 16 0 23 Switch x SM yy s SSsagq ES S172 16 0 23 31754 7 ca MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 198 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Events 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras In this step you will use the Camera Configuration dialog to configure a video motion alarm on the camera it detects movement when someone tries to enter a door for example Configuring the Video Motion Event e Right click on the camera you would like to configure either in a layout or in the Navigator sidebar panel and the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section e Select Configure from the context menu The Camera Configuration dialog opens e Click on the Events tab e Click on the Video Motion 1 tab e Make sure that the Enable VM Event 1 checkbox is activated The Video Motion 1 tab should now look like in the figure Video Motion 1 Video Motion rm V Enable VM Event 1 Show Frames Display VM windows in current live image When armed Hide Show During an event Hide Highlight V Display window IDs e Move the white frame of
362. n r dialog MxControlCenter will show the Login as dialog when A starting Without any users MxControlCenter automatically starts with full i e administrator privileges User admin Admins Password eeeeeeseee To log out the current user select Tools gt Logout from the menu a or right click on the display area and select Authentication gt Logout from the context menu Logging out will restart the application The Login as dialog opens again and a new user can be logged in If MxControlCenter is configured in such a way that the menu bar and the context menu are not available for the current user the logout command can be selected by using the key combination Ctrl F12 or Ctrl Shift A Changing Rights by Moving Users to a Different Group To change the privileges of a user you can simply move the user from one group to another Moved users automatically get the privileges of the group they have been moved into 4 7 2 Editing Group Rights To edit the privileges of the groups select Tools gt Users amp groups from the menu In the Users amp Groups dialog click on the Group Rights tab Users amp Groups P e Users amp Groups Group Rights Please specify user rights for the groups Admins Users Live Live PTZ v Allow J Allow Live PTZ configuration V Allow v Allow Post processing J Allow JV Allow Post PTZ configuration v Allow v Allow Audio Aways v Aways
363. n applying individual settings You should set up the camera storage at this stage only if you are using the same file server NAS or SD card storage on all cameras of the system If this is not the case you should set the storage targets later on when adjusting sets of cameras see Section A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras Check if you can access the Windows SMB CIFS shares by entering the IP address or DNS name in Windows Explorer Enter the corresponding UNC path to the storage system e g 10 1 1 111 mxdata or mxstoragel mxdata e Adjust the settings as in the figure below see the corresponding camera manual for the available settings A MOBOTIX Q24 mx10 8 85 61 Storage on External File Server Flash Device Storage Options File Server IP 192 168 20 1 IP address of server Note The server needs to be reachable via the network Remote Directory Share mxdata Directory Share on the server to be mounted by the camera Sdata or data n using NFS you need to enter the path to the share e g pativtoata Note The server has fo grant mounting rights to the camera User Name mxcam Username of the camera account on Windows Password s s 1 8 Password of the camera account on Windows NTLM Mode NTLM g Mode used for NTLM authentication Storage Size 3000 MB Unlimited Maximum size in megabytes used to store alarm images and sequences Time to Keep Days Hours Minutes Unlimited Maximum time to keep alar
364. n software Installing 247 MOBOTIX cameras Using with Pan tilt heads 261 MOBOTIX Video System Solution Decentralized concept 16 Monitoring Action log 231 Camera connections 232 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 3 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Index MxStatus for monitoring multiple MxControlCenter computers 155 Options tab 304 Setting up live video monitoring 177 Monitor wall 26 MonoDome glossary 374 Motion detection glossary 374 Mounting position Set for hemispheric cameras 62 MPEG 4 Part 10 375 MPEG glossary 375 MxAnalytics Configuring 211 Counting Lines 146 Evaluations 147 Heat maps 146 Time tables 146 Use 146 MxControlCenter Alarm features 98 Alarm List 103 Configuration parameter 334 Configuring reactions 201 Configuring remote control 183 Configuring video wall 183 Display modes of application window 94 Elements of application window 65 Enhanced Features 238 Launching for the first time 56 Options dialog 290 Performance details 46 Reading SD cards 288 Sidebar panels 70 Start Layout 75 Toolbar buttons 68 Updating an older version 153 User interface elements 66 Using 64 MxControlCenter Configurations Working with 234 MxControlCenter glossary 375 MxControlCenter installation Backing up entire system 250 MxControlCenter workstation Securing 224 MxEasy glossary 375 MxPEG DirectShow Codec Installing 154 MxP
365. n to Never e Click on OK to close the dialog For more information on users and rights see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights Activating the Layout Buttons in the Toolbar This method replaces the existing toolbar E Mxcontroicenter Overview Outside File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Hel buttons by the layout buttons see 5 a EE Main Entrance EB wet gate EE Parking Using Layout Buttons in the Toolbar in Section 4 3 2 Configuring Layout Selection The functions executed by the buttons on the replaced toolbar remain accessible via the menu and the context menus If you want to disallow users from using any of these functions make sure that you configure the group privileges accordingly see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights Hiding the Entire Toolbar This procedure removes the entire toolbar from the application window e Deactivate View gt Show gt Toolbar in the menu e Right click anywhere on the toolbar or on the display area and deactivate View gt Show gt Toolbar in the context menu Similar to activating the layout buttons in the toolbar see above hiding the entire toolbar will not remove any privileges from user groups If you want to disallow users from using any of these functions you need to configure the group privileges accordingly see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Ma
366. n to the new program folder Make sure to retain the existing folder structure e Test the new installation by double clicking on the Mxcc exe file e Make sure that all user shortcuts use the new installation by adjusting the path to the correct program folder and the configuration file 4 1 3 Installing MxControlCenter Language Packages MOBOTIX offers additional language packages short LangPacks for MxControlCenter version 2 3 and higher You can download the language packages for the corresponding version from the MOBOTIX website Support gt Software Downloads gt MxControlCenten The files are called LangPack MxCC_V2 5 3 lt language _country gt exe where lt language _ country gt is replaced by the corresponding language and country codes as in these examples e For Italian download the file McCLanguagePack V2 5 3 it exe e For Chinese China download the file LangPack MxCC_V2 5 3 zh CN exe To Install an MxControlCenter Language Package Make sure that you are only downloading language packages for the installed version of MxControlCenter e g LangPack MxCC_V2 5 3 zh CN exe for MxCC Version 2 5 3 e Obtain the LangPack MxCC_V2 5 3 exe installation file where is the language and country code Download the installation file from the MOBOTIX website and save the file on your computer for example on the Desktop If you have received installation media CD DVD USB stick find
367. nal data storage devices no weatherproof housing with heating and less cabling Savings 70 MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 44 396 An Example Donbass Arena Ukraine A total of approximately 1 200 kilometers of electri cal and data cable was installed in the Donbass Arena MOBOTIX cameras and MxCC fulfill the highest UEFA requirements with out problems _ A Football Dome of Superlatives The Donbass Arena built in the Ukrainian industrial city of Donezk for 400 million US dollars opened its doors on August 29 2009 The highly modern football stadium with a seating capacity of 51 504 93 under roof is the home base of FK Schachtar Donezk the Ukrainian champion many times over and will be an important venue of the European Football Championship in 2012 The stadium has over 1 000 parking spaces more than 60 restaurants bars and caf s numerous shops VIP areas a fitness center and even a football museum In addition to sporting events the stadium is also used for large company events international concerts and shows By giving the Donbass Arena its highest rating of 5 stars UEFA categorized it as the first elite stadium in Eastern Europe The Most Advanced Network Infrastructure With 6 000 ports the arena possesses one of the largest computer networks ever installed in the Ukraine During construction 60 kilometers of glass fiber cabl
368. narios 106 Recordings Checking data integrity 132 Configuring 196 Configuring where to record 207 Evaluating 106 Exporting 137 Playing back 106 Playing back from Local Archive 131 Post processing 116 Post Video Motion Detection 126 Using virtual PTZ when playing back 118 Video Search 129 Remote cameras Connect using DynDNS 255 Remote control Configuring 183 Remote Control Options tab 301 Remote recordings MxRemotePreview 279 Report profiles Customizing profiles used for analy sis 217 Reports Generating 217 Sending via e mail 217 Resolution glossary 376 Restricting Public access to cameras 222 Rights Users and group rights 218 Ring buffer glossary 376 RoHS glossary 376 Router glossary 376 Saved views 96 Saving 135 Camera settings 247 Initial configuration 63 Program settings 234 Single images 135 Scaling commands 94 Scaling functions Configuring 190 Scenarios MOBOTIX systems 18 Schedule Video motion detection 216 SD card glossary 376 SD cards Using MxControlCenter to read 288 Searching In a Live display window 109 In Layouts with display windows in Player mode 113 Several cameras in synchronized mode 114 Searching glossary 376 Securing MxControlCenter workstation 224 Security Alarms 28 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Index 389 396 Network security 222 Security Considerations 222
369. nd set ED bpering Done cg a file name and location for the finished e srt top video file While exporting the application Dera nDestn oor pg shows the event images and the prog ress bar Once the export has finished MxControlCenter shows the results in the dialog in the figure in this case the results o seaurcesnepiy preten include the data integrity check 2 cortes When exporting large recordings to MxPEG MxControlCenter may need to split the resulting MXG file In this case the first MXG file will be called lt file name gt 01 mxg the second lt file name gt 02 mxg etc e When playing back such a clip in MxControlCenter please only select the first file lt file name gt _01 mxg e When playing backward however MxControlCenter will stop at the beginning of the current clip e g lt file name gt _03 mxg and will nofcontinue playing backward at the end of the previous clip lt file name gt 02 mxg In this case you need to select the previous clip manually lt file name gt 02 mxg When handing exported MxPEG video clips to others it is a good idea to include the installation file of the MxPEG DirectShow Codec see Section 4 1 4 Installing the MOBOTIX MxPEG Directshow Codec MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 146 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 7 Using MxAnalytics 3 7 1 MxAnalytics
370. ndividual cameras in order to generate distortion corrected images that still have a satisfactory resolution MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 88 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Using Full Image for Recording and Area Corrected for Live Images As we have seen above both the camera and MxControlCenter can generate different types of images The following approach to recording and live viewing has proven to bring the highest benefit Recording Full Image Live vPTZ Area Corrected Recording the Full Image and using Area Corrected for live viewing offers a number of advantages e Load can be balanced between the cameras and MxControlCenter e Although the user at the live monitor has moved the visible image section and is looking into a different direction the camera always records the full image e Users at other locations can get different live views e g reduced image size and can execute their own PTZ commands without disturbing the recording or other users For more information on searching events in recordings please see Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches For more information on how to automatically search for video motion using custom video motion windows in recordings see Section 3 5 9 Using Post Video Motion Detection in Recordings vPTZ Actions in the Camera or in MxControlCenter As mention
371. need to change any settings in this step Proceed directly to Step 3 Activate HTTPS in the Camera and Set a Port Generated certificate using data you have entered In the Web Server dialog activate the Generate option Replace the X 509 certificate and private key currently used by the camera section Fill in the fields in the Generate self signed X 509 certificate and X 509 cer tificate request section Click on the Set button at the bottom of the dialog to generate the certificate this may take a moment to complete Click on the Close button at the bottom of the dialog and permanently store the entire camera configuration e Certificate issued by a certificate authority Make sure that you have a third party certificate file from a certificate authority or your system administrator Inthe Web Server dialog activate the Upload the X 509 certificate and private key option Replace the X 509 certificate and private key currently used by the camera section MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Security Considerations 227 396 Click on the Browse button behind the Upload X 509 certificate from file field navigate to the certificate file select it and click on OK Click on the Set button at the bottom of the dialog to upload the certificate Click on the Close button at the bottom of the dialog and permanently
372. nes 10 0 32 148 Pol m es p vaa 0x48 Sl ao south gate von vo von G mmr H events lt item gt po mees il vea 640x080 l o Paking gt off y On y On G m mzu H Events H Rec off gt P mees 2 wa 640x080 Bl 0 104 4299 gt off ov On v n gt lt rot sppo H Events 04 H SO Flesh Card H Mares F xGa ozawa Bl 60 man entrare v n v On v n D rot supp H Events 0 H 50 Fash Card F mess E xaa ozas PET 60 Camera man cote Codec F mees Speake 4 On Recording y n Modet D12 Sec Resolton PO va 640x480 Micro y On Events G mM wma UC TT Software versions MK V3 5 2 23 13 PEG quality jal 60 Bet of Mode HI Events aP86 do Transfer rate E Maximum Leve 90 Target F crs 10 0 30 39 Whete balance lt rotmppeted gt Width a 50 rs at OK Cone e Overview This tab lists the settings of all cameras available in MxControlCenter e Image Settings This tab controls the image settings of the cameras e Exposure This tab allows adjusting exposure settings of the cameras e Recording This tab allows configuring the recording settings which determines how and where the video data is archived e Audio This tab activates and deactivates the microphone and speaker on the cameras e Events This tab configures the video motion windows of a camera e Network Messages This tab allows defining alarm messages on the cameras When detecting alarms the cameras are sending these messages to
373. nese software The New tab shows software n MX System 3 5 2 23 r3 that has been made available since you Ste eee new mol German English last opened the dialog The dropdown __ MX System 3 5 2 23 r3 in the bottom right corner of the dialog E Re ee g red frame in the figure allows filtering a i ES C the packages oe Click on one of the packages to save or install it If you choose to install a package you will be prompted to open Update Assistant the installation itself works as described in Section 5 1 5 Updating the Software of MOBOTIX Cameras MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Update Assistant Software Updates and More 247 396 5 1 6 Installing MOBOTIX Application Software If you would like to get the newest MOBOTIX Sere Packages application software you can click on the Applications tab of the Software Packages panel The dropdown in the bottom right corner of the panel red frame in the figure allows filtering the packages To install a software select it and click on the Install button Update Assistant down loads the software and offers to install the software Name Platform Version MxControlCenter Win64 Win32 exe MxControlCenter Win 4 Win32 exe Camera Applications x Time Languages Extension 080 Win6 4 Win32 11 19 2010 2 4 0 7 22 2010 Spanish 2 4 0 7 22 2010 Italian
374. ness and can result in malfunctioning video motion detection Use this parameter to automatically deactivate video motion detection if the illumination drops below MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 327 396 the specified level This value can be set independently for each camera lens if this is a Dual and Day Night camera model Use this parameter with due care Video motion detection will be deactivated completely if illumination drops below the specified level Set this parameter to Offif you would like to avoid this Sensor Control Click on one of the buttons to switch to the corresponding image sensor lens This section is only available on Dual and Day Night camera models The definitions of VM windows for dual cameras are valid for either the right or the left image sensor By default this dialog activates the currently used image sensor and you can switch to the other sensor Note that this is not a temporary setting but this actually switches the current sensor of the camera If you had been using a different setting before such as Both or Automatic you will have to manually set this parameter to its old value afterwards see Camera Lens under Color Settings and Resolution in Section 6 3 2 The Image Settings Tab Frame Details Coordinates This section shows the dimensio
375. nfiguration gt Exposure tab MxControlCenter Video motion windows Camera Configuration gt Events tab SIP client options Admin Menu gt SIP Client Settings PIR PIR trigger level PIR trigger level Browser Setup Menu gt Event Settings Overview K a trigger depends on the camera s software version level Configuring the Multiwatcher on One Camera After you have adjusted individual cameras as required you can now configure the Multiwatcher The Multiwatcher allows you to remotely access a camera network via MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 360 396 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline one camera only which in turn collects the images from other cameras These cameras can be grouped according to your requirements on different Multiwatcher screens When accessing the Multiwatcher camera remotely also from mobile devices the users can select the screens to see the corresponding cameras e Open the web interface of the camera on which you would like to set up the Multiwatcher e Click on the Multiwatcher button e Configure the Multiwatcher screens as described in the camera help A MOBOTIX Q24 mx10 8 85 61 Multiwatcher a Configure Screen stop Screen Reception La Audio Notification W niigure Screen stop Reception mx10 8 West gate 10 13 01 TT 10 13 02 01 09 10 12 01 TT 10 12 02 01 09 10 12 29
376. ng notification by e mail Falsification safety Yes By signature of the recorded files data integrity can be checked at the time of export Activity log Yes All activities of the users are recorded and can be traced filter functions for fast access to desired information Time synchronization Yes Uniform system time through support of internal external time servers Four eyes principle Yes Clearance approval of function authenticated by a third party supervisor data protection officer Private sphere mode Yes To safeguard the private sphere including switching off image generation microphone etc in the cameras an withdrawal of all previous user rights Installation updates Transmission of complete work environ Yes By simple export directly from MxCC fast ments configuration of several workstations Update assistant for program and cameras Yes practically unlimite Convenient updating of MxCC and camera software including backup and restoration of all configuration data of the cameras Configuration Global configuration for multi user Yes By access of all systems to a write systems protected directory containing all relevant configuration data includin building plans information files etc Centralized control of the program Yes Import export and modification of rel configurations evant contiguration data of the branches by headquarters Special functions Translation of the
377. ngs you need to set up digital signing before the system goes productive Once digital signing has been set up you should not change the digital certificate any more It is hence recommended to use the default self signed certificates of the cameras since they are valid for 25 years Configuring the Cameras to Sign the Recordings aoe Arming Switch To ensure that a camera is digitally signingits recordings proceedas Arming Olu follows FR e Right click on the camera 4 Recording Qa x iv you would like to configure Eae EO ee i x V Digital signing of recorded images either in a layout or in the Recording Mode Navigator sidebar panel and the VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section Full image recording e Select Configure from the Image Size Mega 1280x960 context menu The Camera JPEG Quality 60 Z Configuration dialog opens Text Display Date Time A i e Click on the Recording tab lt ording Start and Duration aE m Ea Start Tigger 7 fat Events d Recording e Activate the Digital sign ing of recorded images checkbox red frame in figure E Image Anaysis vM Frame rate Maximum x Fs e Click on Apply Time before Off v e Wait until MxControlCenter has rebooted the camera Time after 10 sec X V External Recording e Close the Camera ca Configuration dialog E Folder CIFS 172 16 250 111 mxdata By Setup By default the camera use
378. ngs dialog activate the Use preview data for playback and Video Search checkbox red frame in the figure e Click on OK MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings 2 87 3 96 Step 3 Use Specific MxRemotePreview Servers for Video Sources e Select the video sources in the Navigator sidebar panel that should be using MxRemotePreview servers other than the one specified in the default preview set tings in Step 1 e Right click and select Properties from the context menu MxControlCenter opens one Properties of dialog for each selected video source e Do the following in the Properties of dialog of each video source Select the Access Data tab and click on the Change button In the Access Recordings of dialog activate the Use preview data for playback and Video Search checkbox Click on the Settings button Inthe MxRemotePreview Custom Settings dialog activate the Use custom con nection data checkbox red frame in the figure MxRemotePreview Custom Settings ex a Customize any preview setting for this video source or use the defaults defined in Options gt Connection Defaults Use custom connection data Camera Preview Remote Preview IP address 172 16 0 333 Port 9000 SSL User name mxcc Password eeeseseeeece Use custom JPEG quality Use custom frame rate Use custom
379. ngs for export List of NAS user groups and users Read write access for cameras read access for MxCC full access for administrator List of MxControlCenter User groups and users Administrators management owners middle manage ment users privacy protection officials consultants union representatives Legal restraints Worker unions protection of privacy max days of stor ing recordings Customer Infrastructure If not available internally get suitable time server address from www ntp org This is an important Time server setting since all components of the VSS must have the same time base Network data Gateway DNS available IP addresses Access data user names pass words Router information for remote DynDNS public IP address ports for port forwarding A 2 Lab Installation of Components Network shares e mail SIP servers providers After you have made sure that you have the information you need you can begin to connect components or groups of components in larger systems in the lab installation During the lab installation you can accomplish many of the configuration tasks before going out to the customer to set up the real system A 2 1 Defining Hardware Groups When defining hardware groups you should keep in mind that the main focus of this step is to configure the groups as efficiently as possible Although it is possible to use other criteria
380. nly display move ments that occur very frequently for example e Legend Choose whether you would like to display an explanation of the color meanings Next define the detection areas counting lines and object sizes of the objects that are to be detected in the Visual Configuration sub tab Setting the Visual Configuration eoa MxAnadlytics can capture and evaluate move SBS QAJA amp O ments in the camera image The frequency Overview Image Settings Exoosure Recording Audo Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytcs of the movements is shown in a heat map Name s Basc Configuraton Visual Configuraton pa Configure Oeteton aes Chat ene Cain es Select the areas in the camera image that om are to be evaluated as detection areas The O 5 10 complete live image will be analyzed if you do not define any areas and MxAnalytics has been activated Counting lines can be used to capture how many people go in and out of an entrance during the day for example To do this define counting lines at the desired positions in the camera s live image Define detection areas and counting lines in the A MR Dn Ieee eD ne nuen mewn Visual Configuration sub tab O The Visual Configuration contains the fol lowing areas Detection Area This can be used to define detection areas Select the Detection area option A predefined detection area opens e Proceed as follows to adjust this detection area Us
381. nnect the Ethernet cable of the computer to a regular port of the switch router PoE PoE LAN www switch router PC 10 8 0 11 255 0 0 0 e a Camera 10 8 0 99 If everything has been connected properly the camera LEDs in the front start blinking and the camera powers up this takes about one minute Although you can test a camera with a direct connection to a computer see Section 2 2 1 Power Supply When Connected Directly to a Computer however it is recommended that you use a switch for a production system MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Installing MxControlCenter 53 396 2 3 Installing MxControlCenter The current version of MxControlCenter is available for download on the MOBOTIX website www mobotix com in the Support gt Software Downloads gt MxControlCenter section Only registered users are permitted to download MOBOTIX software from the website If you are not yet a registered MOBOTIX user now is a good time to register Registered users have the following benefits e Access to the entire range of the freely accessible MOBOTIX software e Automatic subscription to the newsletter if desired to inform you about the latest MOBOTIX products If you are updating an MxControlCenter computer with an existing installation please read the notes in Section 4 1 2 Updating an Older Version of MxControlCenter
382. ns of the selected video motion window click on such a window to activate it Changing the values of the coordinates and the dimensions modifies the selected window accordingly If no video motion win dows are present click into the display area and draw a rectangle with the mouse VM Set Shows to which video motion set Video Motion 1 or 2 the selected video motion window belongs This is also shown by the different colors of the video motion windows Video Motion 1 White outline and background Video Motion 2 Blue outline and background Motion Detection These options control the trigger thresholds for the selected video motion window note that these are per video motion window settings Low threshold Sets the minimum number of pixels in the video window that needs to change from one frame to the next in order to trigger an event Decreasing this value will make the video motion window more sensitive High threshold Sets the maximum number of pixels in the video window that may change from one frame to the next in order to trigger an event You can MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 2 8 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference use this value to suppress false alarms resulting from global changes e g when the lights are turned on Sensitivity Sets the amount of change that must be detected in the pixels of a video motion window in order
383. nsors Lists all available trigger sensors for a camera Activate the sensors that will prompt the selected cameras to send network messages Test Configuration e Testing This button triggers a test network message that is sent to the list of recipients The results of the test are listed in the adjacent text box Ifthe local MxControlCenter computer has not yet been configured to receive network messages the Camera Configuration dialog automatically adjusts the settings in the Options dialog Tools gt Options gt Alarm Handling Alarm Messages section accordingly MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 331 396 6 3 8 The Time Server Tab The system must be synchronized to ensure all cameras and devices are running in a synchronized manner To do this use this tab to set the local time of the computer as the current system time for the cameras selected or set one or multiple time servers to synchronize the cameras The tab contains the following sections E camera Configuration BeBVEA SV OC amp Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audio Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytics iita Recommendations 010 Select the cameras to configure in the ist of video sources Press Set time on cameras to apply oO MM i ee synchronisation You should also configure your computers to use one
384. nter shows the selected alarm of the camera e ifthe Player sidebar panel is visible MxControlCenter moves the current position indicator to the last available alarm e Clicking on one of the playback buttons starts playing back the recorded alarm To export some or all of the video data you can use the clip start end markers Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 116 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter on Settings e An Alarm Player window can change its video source dynamically in contrast to the display windows in Player mode described in Section 3 5 3 Search Playback in Layouts with Display Windows in Player Mode e One layout can have more than one Alarm Player window If several of these display elements are present in a layout MxControlCenter shows the last alarm camera in the first window the second but last camera in the second window etc 3 5 6 Post Processing of Recorded Images Post processing means that MxControlCenter can change both live and recorded images Since this constitutes a manipulation of the original image printing such an image will always print two images the original and the adjusted image Image Post Processing By default MxControlCenter displays all recorded video images as they had been stored by the video source Post processing on the ot
385. o south cate v n y on v on G wm wma Hi events 4 lt ntemaiRam gt F msec fil vea 540x480 Bal 60 Peking 1 off ov on ov on G m mau H events m Ee lt Rec off gt F mees 1 vea x380 PEI eo mx105 42 9 of von v On lt not spp H events 4 H SO Flesh Card PY mees PA xea rozax7es BI eo manenvence YO von v On lt not spo H events qa H SO Flash Card Fi mses E xGa nozas ES eo Camera man gate Codec F mees Speake f On Recording On Modet Diz Sec Resolution ill VGA 64080 Micra y On Events G m2 UC TF Software versions MK 3 5 2 23 r3 PEG quality Bes 60 Event Off Mode H Bvents 0086 do Transfer rate 2 Macau leve 90 Target HA crs 10 0 30 39 Whvte balance lt notspperted gt Width 50 ms 3 e om ca Note that you can change some of the parameters of a video source directly in this dialog To do so select a camera right click on the parameter you want to change and select the new setting from the context menu The following table lists the columns of the Overview tab explains the corresponding parameters how to change them and where to find them on the other tabs Column Provides Access to Change Does not change video source con figuration only MxCC access data Video source s Properties and access data reload configuration reboot video source ft In video source s Properties of dialog O Can be changed in Overview tab T Use ta
386. o avoid security problems 4 8 1 General Thoughts on Network Security e Certain MxControlCenter features remote control for example require additional ports to be open on a Windows computer Make sure that the Windows computer running MxControlCenter is behind a firewall e Some anti virus scanners are checking all data streams that enter the computer As a result an anti virus scanner may identify the video audio data received in the MxControlCenter camera as malicious code and block it If the corresponding mechanisms of the anti virus scanner are deactivated the anti virus protection of the computer is incomplete For this reason the MxControlCenter computer should never be used to surf the Internet 4 8 2 Restricting Public Access to the Cameras You can improve the security of the entire system by disabling public access on all cameras and setting up a dedicated user for MxControlCenter on each camera MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Security Considerations 223 396 Camera Settings in the Browser Open the user interface of each camera in the browser and do the following Change the default password for the admin user in Admin Menu gt Users and Passwords Make sure the cameras web interface cannot be accessed by unauthorized users by blocking the public access in Admin Menu gt Users and Passwords Security section Create a new group for e
387. o you can use one of the following methods e Use the Player controls in the sidebar to find and add video sequences to the export list To open the Player controls do one of the following Switch a live camera window in a layout to Player mode Click on a Player window in a layout Click on a predefined event search in the EVENT SEARCHES section of the Navigator sidebar panel Open a recording in the LOCAL ARCHIVE section of the Navigator sidebar panel e Open the Video Search dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 40 3 96 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter You can now use the Player controls in the sidebar or in the Video Search dialog to find the video sequences you want to export Step 2 Add Events to the Export List Once you have identified the event sequence you want to export you are ready to add these sequences to the export list Adding the Entire Recording to the Export List e Using the Player sidebar panel Make sure the Player sidebar panel is open Click on the Add to Export List button the Export List dialog opens fos e Using the Video Search dialog Make sure the Video Search dialog is open Select a camera in the Cameras tab Click on the Export button the Export List dialog opens Although it is technically possible to export the entire recordings of one camera we recommend to use
388. o create a complete layout structure with all live cameras then copy the structure and switch all cameras in the lay outs to player mode The live layouts would use display windows showing the live video streams of the cameras while the player layouts would use player windows to show the camera s recordings see Section 4 2 2 Element Types Used in Layouts This way the operators can easily switch back and forth between the live and player modes of the entire layout General Remarks on the Layout Structure You should keep an eye on the number of cameras in one layout Putting too many cam eras six or more in one layout will only reduce the chances that the operators will see everything they need to see Instead use more layouts with a few cameras each and use MxControlCenter s mechanisms for switching layouts automatically This will support the operators rather than confuse them When using third party cameras you should not put too many cameras in one layout As a rule of thumb third party cameras create four fo five times more CPU loadthan MOBOTIX cameras running on MxPEG Open the Windows Task Manager and monitor it closely when loading a layout with third party cameras Make sure that you document the following items e Which layouts are used for which purpose e Label the layouts properly Make sure that the operators can tell live layouts from player layouts e g by adding Live and
389. o form B west gate B Parking hierarchical structures This panel shows gridand ohh background layouts with different icons B Reception Inthe VIDEO SOURCES section of this sidebar panel per MxControlCenter displays the cameras clips and vs m a VIDE l 4 Cameras storage devices that have already been added to at ie MxControlCenter You can drag and drop the video ite i sources into a grid element or onto a background aal bese f image PO n e Grids Background Layouts The contents of this Auto VGA VGA panel changes depending on the type of the current cod s VGA VGA layout CIF CIF Grids In this sidebar panel you can select and CIF CIF modify the grid of the current grid layout You can Esters also create your own grid definitions in addition to the predefined ones click on the Edit grid button at the bottom or select Auto grid see below in Section 4 2 1 Creating Layouts Background Images In this sidebar panel you can set the background image for the current background layout You can also add more background images by clicking on the Add Image button at the bottom Deactivating the Layout Manager To deactivate the Layout Manager do one of the following e Deactivate the Layout Manager button in the toolbar eg e Select Layout gt Quit Layout Manager in the menu e Right click in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select Quit Layout Manager 4 2 1 Creatin
390. o use the same time base for the entire surveillance system you need to set up the following on the MxControlCenter workstations e Set the same time zone as on the master camera e Activate automatic time synchronization and set the same time server as for the time server camera Adding Virus Scanner Exceptions Since most of the virus scanners are also monitoring the network traffic that enters the workstation via the HTTP ports they can considerably slow down the workstation s perfor mance You should hence add the camera ports typically 80 and 443 and the ports used for remote control and alarm messaging see Tools gt Options on the Remote Control and Alarm Handling tabs to the exceptions that are notmonitored by the virus scanner MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 358 396 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline A 9 Final Lab Test of All Components Since you have set up your components and configured the cameras you are now ready to test the entire system Once you done so and corrected any errors you can export the MxControlCenter configuration If you cannot test all cameras at once you should make sure that all storage targets are running then test the cameras in groups A 9 1 Testing and Correcting e Jest the hardware Are the switches storage targets cameras and MxControlCenter workstations running properly
391. obotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 69 396 For more information about the different types of display elements for layouts in general see Section 4 2 2 Element Types Used in Layouts Changing Existing or Creating New Grid Definitions To create a new grid make sure that the Layout Manager is activated then click on the Edit Grids buttons in the Grids sidebar panel MxControlCenter automatically splits the available space according to the width of the display area the maximum dimensions are 2560x960 pixels A tiny element 80x60 1 2 column Available grid definitions in this x small PDA 160x120 element 1 column MxControlCenter configuration 2 medium 320x240 sized CIF 2 columns element 1 large VGA 640x480 List of grid elements element 4 columns h huge MEGA 1280x960 element 8 columns du ds dm dl dh panorama views double veidth Grid Definition Preview Width 3 gt Columns 160 pixels 480 pels s m Grid editor Preview of new grid definition The grid definition is shown in the grid editor as a list of grid elements see the Grid Windows table below To change an existing or to create a new grid definition 1 Select a definition you want to modify duplicate an existing definition Duplicate button or create a new definition New button 2 Set the width of the definition as a number of columns having
392. of its digital certificate e MxControlCenter encrypts a random number using the camera s public key and sends it to the camera e The camera uses its private key to decrypt the random number MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 2 6 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration e Using the random number both parties generate sessions keys to encrypt and decrypt all communication for the duration of the connection Setting Up Encrypted Connections If you want to implement a secure infrastructure you need to configure all cameras you would like to use via SSL and set up MxControlCenter accordingly The entire process involves the following steps 1 Open the camera s browser interface 2 Configure the camera to use a certificate 3 Activate HTTPS in the camera and set a port 4 Instruct MxControlCenter to use SSL for connecting the camera s Step 1 Open the Camera s Browser Interface Q e Click on the Open camera in browser button in MxControlCenter e Click on the Admin Menu button in the camera s browser interface and enter the user name and password e Inthe Administration Overview dialog click on the Web Server link Network Setup section Step 2 Configure the Camera to Use a Certificate Do the following depending on which type of certificate you would like to use e Camera s self signed certificate When using this certificate you do not
393. oftware storage unit and high performance computer simple integration in the existing computer network and the low number of cameras and network components Control center with MxCC worksta tions and 42 live image monitors User interface in Russian Allin all the installation comprises 528 MOBOTIX cameras that record to four SAN servers a total of 210 terabytes The video control center completely uses MxCC and includes four workstations with several 42 monitors for live monitoring by the security staff plus two monitor workstations for administration and data archiving Shortly after installation the system successfully proved its performance capability by identifying rowdy fans The police officers were actually more than surprised by the high detail images to be used as evidence from our MOBOTIX cameras happily commented Donbass Head of Security Sergey Burgela MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 46 2 MxCC Performance Details MxControlCenter Functions Audio transmission Yes bidirectional General Number of manageable cameras Yes Practically unlimited number of cameras license free Integration of analog digital cameras Yes including Analog cameras can be integrated via from third party manufacturers PTZ control MxServer various IP cameras from third party manufacturers can be integrated directly Decentrali
394. olCenter in different network environments Prerequisites e You or an administrator have properly installed the cameras and attached them to MxControlCenter Chapter 2 System Installation and Initial Operation e fyou are using a professional MxControlCenter video surveillance system you need to have access to the documentation of the system which should have been provided by the administrator or the system installer If you want to find out more about how to configure MxControlCenter you should first read this chapter to get acquainted with MxControlCenter and then read Chapter 4 System Configuration Starting MxControlCenter Once you have installed MxControlCenter Chapter 2 3 Installing MxControlCenter you can start the application Double click on the shortcut on your desktop click on Start gt Programs and find the link to MxControlCenter or double click on the MxCC exe file in the program folder Logging in By default MxControlCenter is a single user applica tion where the user that started the application has full control of the entire system By adding groups and F users however you can configure the application MxCC Login as a multi user system Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights User user Users x i Login as 7 Ee If this MxControlCenter installation has been set up oE SOSORSRSSS as a multi user system the dialog in the figure at the right appears Select your use
395. ollowing sections Camera Configuration oO lees E QRDE V O amp Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audio Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytics Name Alarm Targets axs 1 GD main gate Acknowledge Off north gate e east gate E Address o i 10 0 2 15 By 31754 10 0 2 153 000 Parking 1 mx10 9 42 99 main entrance Downtown office backdoor at O QO Event Trigger 2 Event switch On v All Events Video Motion VM E Video Moton 2 VM2 J User Click UC L A n Test Configuration This tab of the Camera Configuration allows selecting several video sources Alarm Targets Gp e Enable Activates the sending of network messages for the selected cameras e Acknowledge When set to On this setting activates an alarm acknowledgement request that is also sent to the IP addresses ports in the list below MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 3 O 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference If a recipient does not acknowledge a network message the selected cameras will send the message to the next recipient in the IP Address Port list To acknowledge such a request the users need to click on the title bar of the alarm image in the alarm list as described in Section 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms The local MxControlCenter e IP Address Port Click on t
396. on see Section 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature e Drag amp drop a video sequence from an event search see Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches e Drag amp drop a video sequence from a Post VM search see Section 3 5 9 Using Post Video Motion Detection in Recordings By default the local archive is a folder in the user s folder as shown in the Options dialog If you need to move this folder to a different location e g a share on a server proceed as follows e Select Tools gt Options from the menu e Open the General tab Local Archive User folder Custom folder e Inthe LOCAL ARCHIVE section activate the Custom folder option the current folder is shown behind the User folder option e Select a different folder for the local archive using the browse button MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 183 396 4 3 5 Configuring Extra Windows Extra floating windows provide a quick way to show the video stream of a camera in a larger window or on a different monitor see also Section 3 2 3 Using Extra Windows to Display Video Sources To activate extra windows do the following e Select Tools gt Options from the menu e Open the View tab e In the Mouse section the On double click dropdown contains these two options for extra windows Select Open extra Live window if you w
397. on 3 5 6 Post Processing of Recorded Images The camera has recorded full images while MxControlCenter is showing only an image section Section 3 5 7 Using the Virtual PTZ Features When Playing Back Recordings This option is only available for the AVI MPEG4 export profile e Copy application files Use this option if you intend to burn the exported video File Server Structure or MxPEG on a CD DVD This will also copy the application files and create the PlayVideo cmd file for playing back the exported video in MxControlCenter Create compressed Zip folder This option creates a compressed z1P folder of the exported video that can be sent by e mail if it is small enough or transferred using FTP or any other means e Check digital signature Checks the digital signature of the video data while export ing to make sure that the video images have not been manipulated Step 4 Export the Video Optionally Check Data Integrity below MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Saving Printing and Exporting 145 3 96 Step 4 Export the Video Optionally Check Data Integrity You are now ready to create the video format you selected above If you want to check the integrity of the video data while exporting make sure that you have activated the Check data integrity checkbox in the Export List dialog Click on Export to start the process a
398. on Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 203 396 Configuring the Alarm Sound on the MxControlCenter Computer Select Tools gt Options from the MxControlCenter menu Click on the Alarm Handling tab Configure the Alarm Sound group box as shown below Alarm Sound J Activate System sound File C Users e Desktop MxCC 2 5 Soun gt Deadtime Repeat evey 5 seconds Until acknowledging Every alam Repeat for at most Explanation of Options File Allows setting a specific sound file to play back when MxControlCenter detects an alarm in a live video stream or when receiving an alarm message Deadtime Prevents alarms from occurring back to back and waits for the specified time after one alarm before processing the next Repeat every Repeats the alarm after the specified time until the option set in Until acknowledging has been fulfilled Until acknowledging Works together with the Repeat every option and repeats the alarm until the user has clicked on any alarm the most recent alarm or every alarm the latter setting is the most demanding one as the user needs to click on every alarm to stop the alarm from repeating Repeat for at most Use this option to stop the alarm repetition after the specified number of seconds provided new alarm occurred in the meantime Setting the Preferred Layout for the Camera Set the preferred layout of a
399. on Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Index 385 396 JPEG glossary 373 LAN glossary 374 Language Packages Installing 153 Latency glossary 374 Launching MxControlCenter For the first time 56 Layout elements Buttons 73 Display windows 73 Icons 73 Layout glossary 374 Layout Manager Activating 158 Layouts 22 Auto grid 25 Background 22 Configuring layout selection 179 Creating overview 158 Defining background layouts 170 Defining grid layouts 167 Definition 65 Editing overview 158 Element types of 161 Generating 61 Grid 24 More options when editing 173 Planning a structure 177 Switching 75 Switching automatically using Sequencers 77 LAYOUTS Navigator sidebar panel 70 Layout selection Configuring 179 LED glossary 374 Linux glossary 374 Live images Virtual PTZ 82 vPTZ 82 Live recording Configuring 182 Live Recording 92 Example 92 Live video Setting up monitoring 177 Live Video Surveillance 71 Loading Program settings automatically 234 Local archive Configuring 182 Local Archive Playing back recordings 131 LOCAL ARCHIVE Navigator sidebar panel 70 Logical glossary 374 M Megapixel glossary 374 Menu Bar 21 microSD card glossary 376 Microsoft IIS 7 Installing MxRemotePreview 283 Minimized application window Functions 97 Minimized MxControlCenter Configuring 194 M JPEG glossary 374 MOBOTIX applicatio
400. on files Users Thilo Desktop CustomerXYZ q24 thilo 2011 09 01 cfg Choose J Reboot the camera after the configuration has been updated 9 Select the checkboxes as shown above Make sure that you have at least one user name and password of the admins group for administrative access later on If you apply this configuration to all other cameras without knowing an administrative user name and password you will have to send all cameras back to MOBOTIX to have them reset This service is not free Make sure that IP address and host name is not activated Setting all cameras to the same IP address will render them unreachable Activate the File Server section only if you are using the same file server NAS on all cameras Deactivate the Image Control and Event Control sections These settings will be configured later see Section A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras 10 Click on OK you can safely ignore the warning wait until all cameras have been rebooted then disconnect them from the network 11 Repeat Steps 5 to 10 until you have uploaded the master configuration to all cameras MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 352 396 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline A 6 Adjusting Sets of Cameras The underlying idea of this section is to define sets of cameras grouping by file server NAS or camera type such as Dual Day Night
401. on on the connection and control commands can be found in the documentation of the respective pan tilt head MOBOTIX Pan Tilt Head Camera Setup MOBOTIX cameras currently M12 and D12 models only can be connected to the motorized pan tilt heads via the D SUB 15HD connector Once the cable has been attached you can use the user interface softbuttons of the camera to pan and tilt the camera Assembling and Activating a Pan Tilt Head in the Camera e Attach the MOBOTIX camera to the mounting bracket on the pan tilt head e Connect the supplied control cable of the pan tilt head to the D SUB 15HD connector of the MOBOTIX camera e Connect the pan tilt head and camera to the power supply e Configure the serial interface of the MOBOTIX camera Admin Menu gt Configure Serial Interface see figure below e Save the configuration to the permanent flash memory of the MOBOTIX camera Admin Menu gt Save and reboot the MOBOTIX camera fA MOBOTIX X99 cke m12 d43 rotor Serielle Schnittstelle und Modem Serielle Schnittstelle und Modem Serielle Schnittstelle Geschwindigkeit Bits Stop Bits Flusskontrolle Echo Zeilenendezeichen Puffergr e Zeitstempel Daten ey Terminal und Logger Mode Aus Serelie Scnnimstelic ist deaktivien Daten Seriele Scnnitistelie 10r Datenterminal oder t r erweltenen Schaltein ausgang verwenden Modem Seriele Schnitistelie 101 Modem Telefon oder GSM verwenden Wet
402. on when using NFS SMB or CIFS SD Flash Card is the default setting i e the camera uses the built in SD card to store its recordings Max storage size reserve Max age Select USB Storage device or USB Hard Drive if one of these devices is attached to the camera Co File sharing is set up correctly Use SMB or CIFS if you are using a Windows server or a Mac OS X Linux server running Samba Use NFS if you are using a Linux server with NFS shares e Fill in the appropriate fields for the selected type of storage Finishing the Setup e Set the Quota fields as required used by the camera to limit the size of the storage Make sure that you are setting at least one of the options in the Quota group If you do not use any of these limits the camera will stop recording once it has used up the available storage capacity e Click on OK to close the External Recording dialog e Click on Apply and wait until the configurations of all selected cameras have been saved e Click on OK to close the Camera Configuration dialog MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring Alarms and Recordings 209 396 Configuring How MxControlCenter Accesses the Recordings Since MxControlCenter by default accesses the recordings of the attached cameras via the camera itself MxControlCenter does not need know where the camera is st
403. onal information east gate TOE MX V3 5 2 23 r3 When launched from MxControlCenter MX V4 0 6 9 select Tools gt Update Assistant from MX V3 5 2 23 r3 the menu this list automatically con mx10 9 4299 B liae MX V4 0 7 31 tains all cameras that are available in this MxControlCenter installation m paa is ke Note that you can also add cameras either manually or by searching them on the physi cal network MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Update Assistant Software Updates and More 241 396 The Software Packages Panel The Software Packages panel automati Ss Packages 8 x cally retrieves a list of available software 75 Yom eson Tme Languages Extension packages from the update server see Why s System TRIS Is the Software Packages Panel Empty if oa a a One ae this is not the case ag System 4 0 2 33 r2 Similar to the Software Downloads dia D2M Q24M M2 M 7 8 2010 log see Using the Software Downloads zi ETAT Dialog you can use the tabs at the bottom n MX System 3 5 2 23 r3 to switch between camera and application E E ee iin A software The New tab shows software that has been made available since you last Camera E Lae d opened Update Assistant The dropdown in the bottom right corner of the panel red frame in the figure allows filtering the packages Getting Information on Soft
404. ongoing display of the time passed since the alarm was reported Automatic activation of layouts Yes Activation at the camera fe ale the alarm including selection of the specified layout Immediate access to emergency plans Yes Can be defined for each camera and etc brought up as an information file in the standard program e g text HTML PDF sound can be retrieved Alarm to external locations Yes By e mail phone call network message Recording Decentralized recording with file server Yes internal SD Flash recording integrated in the camera synchronization card or NAS ensures high reliability synchroniza tion with the file server or NAS systems for extra storage and use of backup functions Event recording with audio channel Yes Event controlled recording is only started when the camera detects specific events owerful internal sensors flexible implementation of the requirements by connection of external sensors Connec tion of external sensors is possible Continuous recording with audio channel Yes Continuous recording optional with fixed or reduced frame rate min 0 2 fps using automatic frame rate adjust ment if events are detected continuous recording of the audio channel Full image recording Yes practically Recording of the complete camera sen unlimited sor made independent of the current live display e g PTZ Local archive Yes Storage on local computer drive Live recording Yes D
405. ontrol the behavior of the video motion windows in the live and recorded video streams When armed Set this option to Show to see the video motion windows when the camera is armed During an event Set this option to Highlightto see a solid red frame around the video motion windows that triggered an alarm Display window IDs Shows the numbers IDs of the video motion windows in the upper left hand corner Image Sensors 2 Detect video motion on both sensors Enables video motion detection on both sensors This setting is useful when using different VM windows sets Note that this option is only available on Dual and Day Night camera models Apply window definitions to both sensors This option will use the same video motion windows defined for the right image sensor on the left image sensor of the camera Note that this option is only available on Dual and Day Night camera models You should only use this option if you are intend to use the same video motion windows on both sensors This usually applies to MOBOTIX Dual or Day Night models with identical focal lengths for both image sensors e g a MOBOTIX M12 with one D43 right day and one N43 left night lens Low Light Conditions When illumination decreases e g at dawn the camera s image sensor tries to amplify the remaining light which results in increased image noise also called dark noise This noise produces unforeseeable changes in pixel bright
406. ool ntp org MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Installing MxControlCenter 55 396 The entire system i e the MxControlCenter computer and all cameras should use a common time server This ensures that all recordings are using the same time base see Section 4 1 5 Configuring a Common Time Server 2 3 2 Automatic Installation of MxControlCenter e Obtain the MxCcontrolCenter V2 5 3 Setup exe installation file Download the installation file from the MOBOTIX website and save the file on your computer for example on the Desktop If you have received installation media CD DVD USB stick find the folder of the installation file e Launch the MxcontrolCenter V2 5 3 Setup exe installation file e Follow the instructions of the installation wizard Make sure that you install the Apple Bonjour Service if the installation wizard prompts you to do so or else the application may not be able to automatically locate MOBOTIX cameras MxControlCenter can automatically check for new program versions on the MOBOTIX website If new software is available you can start the Update Assistant to download and install the software as described in Section 5 1 Update Assistant Software Updates and More Today s anti virus programs are typically checking all streams that are entering a computer including the HTTP image streams from M
407. or Videotronic Provitek and VPT 42 pan tilt heads This setting is intended only to be used with those models MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 264 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features The Fast patch option requires a camera software version that has been modified by a patch from MOBOTIX Do not activate the Fast patch unless this patch has been installed on the corre sponding MOBOTIX camera The MxControlCenter controls for a pan tilt head do notwork with the normal unmodified camera software if the Fast patch option has been activated Additional information on this feature is available from our technical support www mobotix com gt Supporf Using the Pelco D Protocol to Control a Mechanical Zoom MxControlCenter also supports mechani AccessData Information Display PTZ Rotor cal zoom actions using the Pelco D pro Tyee fa tocol This option allows controlling a Sensitivity Normal Pelco D enabled motorized zoom lens seein Joystick control V Invert horizontal direction on a MOBOTIX camera V Invert vertical direction Mechanical zoom vV If such a zoom lens is attached to thecam PTZheadaddress 3 era activate the Mechanical zoom checkbox and select a PTZ head address in the range from 1 to 255 It corresponds to the serial address defined in the Pelco D device itself This address is required to identify the proper de
408. or switching configuring layouts B Grouped tree view for direct access to cameras video VIDEO SOURCES clips and storage devices and for adding them to lay outs Stores preset event Post VM searches and allows creat LOCAL ARCHIVE Used for creating ad hoc recordings on local computer Contains the controls for playing back recordings in one 33 5 2 ff Player or all player windows 34 2 2 Contains the vPTZ controls for live images and record 33 2 9 Softbuttons Shows the softbuttons from the selected camera Grids Shows available grid layouts and allows creating new 33 2 1 f ones 4 2 3 Background Images oe background images and allows adding Eo 1 Only in Layout Manager showing a grid layout 2 Only in Layout Manager showing a background layout MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 7 3 96 3 2 Live Video Surveillance In smaller installations with only a few cameras the monitoring requirements can be met using only a few cameras in a single window However for more complex monitoring tasks a single window will not suffice MxControlCenter thus uses layouts to show the video sources additional information and navigation elements 3 2 1 Displaying Video Content in Layouts MxControlCenter provides the following basic types of layouts e Grid The display windows of cameras and other video sources are arranged in H rectangles of the
409. or the video sources that are using a different server than the default MxRemotePreview server set the desired MxRemotePreview server in the corre sponding Properties of dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 286 396 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Step 1 Set the Default Preview Settings to an MxRemotePreview Server e Open Tools gt Options from the menu and select the Connection Defaults tab e Set the following parameters in the Default Preview Settings section Set Preview Mode to Remote Preview Specify the MxRemotePreview server access data Set the default MxRemotePreview parameters JPEG quality frame rate etc Close the Options dialog by clicking on OK Step 2 Instruct MxControlCenter to Use Default Preview Data for Video Sources Access Recordings So B Select how MxControlCenter should access the recordings of Parking 1 Downtown office Via camera Default file server path factory IP address will be appended Specific file server path factory IP will be appended Specific File Server vJ Use preview data for playback and Video Search Lox cancel _ e Select allvideo sources in the Navigator sidebar panel VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras section that should be using the default preview settings as specified in Step 1 e Right click and select Access Recordings from the context menu e Inthe Access Recordi
410. oring its recordings The cameras can record on the built in SD card default or on different file servers and storage media This approach does have its drawbacks however since the cameras have to carry the load of sending the recorded video images to MxControlCenter In case the cameras are using a file server or NAS system to store their recordings MxControlCenter can directly access the recordings thus relieving the cameras from handling the recordings This requires that you reconfigure MxControlCenter to directly access the recordings on the corresponding file server NAS system Setting a Default File Server in MxControlCenter By setting a default file server you can easily instruct MxControlCenter to use this file server for accessing the recordings of many cameras at once Proceed as follows to do this e Select Tools gt Options from the menu and click on the Connection Defaults tab e Inthe Access Recordings section enter a file server or select it on the network using the button e Enter the User name and Password required to access the default file server Changing MxControlCenter s Access to the Recordings of Individual Cameras If you need to reconfigure MxControlCenter s W access to the recordings for only a few cam eras you can use the Properties of dialog i i AccessData Information Display PTZ Rotor To do so right click on a camera in the Address 10 8 195 72 VIDEO SOURCES gt Cameras s
411. ork Messages Time Server MxAnalytics Name A Apply changes immediately axs 1 Camera Lene ihn lt Muit v Select the camera lens you would tke to change north gate east gate KoG Bi i eee 3 Parking 1 Resolution VGA 640x460 zj bed mx10 9 42 99 JPEG quality 60 4 main entrance Camera frame rate Maximum gt Fis Downtown office Image quality Normal x backdoor eae k O Fe l Nightimprovement On vy White balance v Noise suppression Low l Automatic contrast Automate Image program Select O ox cancel This tab of the Camera Configuration allows selecting several video sources The Apply changes immediately checkbox automatically applies the camera settings as they are changed without having to click on OK or Apply Camera Lens aD This dropdown selects the lens image sensor that the camera currently uses only avail able on Dual camera models e Right Uses the right image sensor of the camera default e Left Uses the left image sensor of the camera e Both Creates a double width image consisting of the image of the left image sensor on the left and the image of the right sensor on the right e Auto Automatically switches to the sensor only available on Day Night and IT models This section is available for all Dual camera models with exeption of the D14D 180 model MOBO
412. orks with one another The router creates the physical connection between the devices in different networks like a hub analyzes the relevant data packets and forwards routes these packets to the correct target network SD Card microSD card Also called SD Memory Card abbreviation of Secure Digital Memory Cara A digital storage medium based on flash storage modules such as USB sticks Search Monitoring of recordings searching for a particular event Sequencer Feature that automatically switches the camera displayed in the main window after a specific time delay SIP Abbreviation of Session Initiation Protocol Network protocol for setting up controlling and terminating a communication connection via a computer network SIP is frequently used by IP Phones and Softphones but more recently also for Video SIP MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 377 396 Signal Input Signal Output Coupling an alarm triggering device for example a fire alarm system or a network camera to a control center or another type of transmitter for example a phone or IP network A typical signal input output scenario in video surveillance progresses as follows an event triggers an alarm that then displays for example the video image from the network camera that triggered the alarm on the monitor at a control center Snap Server NAS system manufactured by Overland Storage
413. orkstations use different configuration files or create installations with specific subsets of cameras for example This section of the manual will explain how to do this What Are MxControlCenter Configurations MxControlCenter uses a configuration file by default MxCC ini to store its settings When you add layouts or video sources change the window size or other specific options related to MxControlCenter the corresponding settings are stored in this configuration file To store the configuration manually select File gt Save from the menu or click on the Save configuration button in the MxControlCenter toolbar In addition MxControlCenter will ask you to save configuration changes when you quit the program MxControlCenter automatically stores the Mxcc ini configuration file in the hidden Windows user folder e Windows Vista 7 c Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming MOBOTIX MxControlCenter e Windows XP c Dokuments and Settings lt user name gt Application Data MOBOTIX MxControlCenter MxControlCenter configuration files should not be edited manually Open Tools gt Folder options in the Windows Explorer click on the View tab and activate the Show hidden files and folders option in the Enhanced Settings list in order to browse the AppData and Application Data folders 4 9 1 Automatically Loading Program Settings As long as the Always select configuration file checkbox is notactivated see Section 6
414. osition of the camera wall ceiling or floor installation Set the other options depending on the mounting position Mounting to a wall Select the desired mode from the Camera Default Start Mode dropdown menu in the PTZ Controls panel Mounting to the ceiling floor Rotate the camera in the desired direction using ALT click and then click on Set North to set the preferred viewing direction of the camera MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Launching MxControlCenter for the First Time 63 396 The mounting position and other options can be set up separately per image sensor in S14D cameras To do so select the view of the corresponding image sensor with ALT click and perform the installation See the corresponding camera manual for more information on the mounting positions and the available display modes Initial Installation of 180 Dual Lens Cameras e To start the configuration process click on the Activate button in the PTZ Controls panel in the Configuration of Panorama View section e Adjust the dual image of the camera using the OnScreen Control as outlined in the corresponding camera manual e Click on the Deactivate button in the PTZ Controls panel in the Configuration of Panorama View section to end the configuration process and save the results See the corresponding camera manual for more information on adjusting the image sensors an
415. ot available Exposure Mode has been set to Virtual PTZ In this mode the camera cannot use any exposure windows MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 2 O 3 96 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 3 4 The Recording Tab This tab allows you to configure the Recording settings which determines how image data is stored To record events the Arming Switch and Recording Switch need to be activated This tab contains the following sections E Camera Configuration obok E Q BooK S O w Overview Image Settings Exposure Recording Audio Events Network Messages Time Server MxAnalytics Name 2 Arming Switch a O maingate y north gate Recording Switch O enone E Recorre south gate Q 7 Display recording symbol in live image Parking 1 V Digital signing of recorded images mx0 9 42 99 Recording Mode main entrance Recording Mode Events MxPEG cip x Downtown office Hi V Audio back door V Full image recording Resolution PEG Gust Text Oey Recording Start and Duration joes Start Trigger fe All Events a Enviroment PI E Enviroment M F O V Image Anaysis VM E Image Anaysis VM2 L7 Signal SI 2 Frame rate F Tee before Tre afier 7 External Recording A Folder CIFS 10 0 30 39 mxdata This tab of the Camera Configuration allows selecting several video sources Ar
416. otix com sales mobotix com The hemispheric door camera captures the entire entrance area without any blind spots from wall to wall floor to ceiling The video analysis pursues each per son and shows which areas are frequented particularly heavily Total Costs Make the Difference MxCC for No Cost at All But isn t the entire system with the necessary hardware and software very expensive all the same Clear answer No The high resolution MOBOTIX systems with fewer cameras less installation and fewer recording devices servers offer unbeatable value for the money While many people still believe that IP cameras do not become more cost efficient than an analog system until a relatively high number of cameras is purchased MOBOTIX proves that even small installations can be implemented extremely cost efficiently with a high resolution system Fewer Cameras Thanks to Higher Resolution The more accurate detail of megapixel technology requires fewer cameras compared to conventional solutions Less Cabling Because MOBOTIX cameras are simply connected via the network cable and are simultaneously supplied with energy their installation is significantly simpler faster and more economical than in all other camera systems Less Network and Storage Load MOBOTIX cameras can record on flash memory devices such as MicroSD cards to help reduce the load on the network Through the camera s efficient inte
417. out MxControlCenter sets a common time base for these clips before start ing the playback MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 Q 8 3 9 amp MxCC User Manual Reference 6 1 4 The Alarm Handling Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options es General Connection Defaults View Alam Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log Alam List Activate Alam Messages Activate alarm message server listening for TCP IP messages 2 Alarm Sound No configuration loaded zamm OK Alarm List GD Activate Activates the alarm list see Section 3 4 1 Visual Alarm Features and Section 4 5 Configuring Alarms and Recordings for more information List size Controls the maximum amount of RAM reserved for the alarm list If the value specified here is exceeded the oldest alarms are automatically deleted to make room for new alarms Add live stream events Adds the alarms to the alarm list that are detected in the live streams of the cameras in the current layout If this option is deactivated MxControlCenter only adds images to the alarm list when cameras are sending network alarm messages Alarm List file Stores the alarm list as a file instead of only in the computer s RAM This means that the alarm list will also be available when launching MxControlCenter the next time Open on new alarm Automaticall
418. out and select Insert from the context menu From the Element type dropdown select Command button Click on the Add button Enter the command in the Add Command URL dialog AddCommanduRe O URL 192 168 1 204 31 667 layout Parking beep Click on OK to close the Add Command URL dialog Highlight the command you just entered in the Command URL list Enter a Button name that is shown on the button later on Parking1 see red frame The Edit Display Element dialog now looks like this Element type Command button hitp 192 168 1 204 31667 Mlayout Parking amp beep Edit Delete Button namel Parking Click on OK to close the Edit Display Element dialog Clicking on the Parking button in a layout on the main computer will now show the Parking1 layout on Client 4 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Setting Up Live Video Monitoring 189 396 Using Additional Remote Control Commands MxControlCenter offers three additional remote control commands which can be used in this context e showInAlarmWindow Shows the image of the given camera IP address or host name in an alarm window e showInExtraWindow Shows an extra window of the given camera IP address or host name e showMessage Upon receiving this command MxControlCenter shows a window with the specified URL encoded message Caution door is
419. out button on the main computer MxControlCenter on the main computer then sends the following command to MxControlCenter on the client computer http 192 168 1 204 31667 layout Parkingl amp beep Explanation e layout Parkingl1 Show the Parking1 layout e beep Play the sound specified on the target computer in the Options gt Remote Control dialog of MxControlCenter e amp introduces the first command amp separates the commands Certain characters in the URL need to be percent encoded also called URL encoded e g a space character would be 20 For more information on percent encoded characters see the Percent encoding topic on en wikipedia org MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 8 R 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Prerequisites e Remote control has been activated on the client computer 192 168 1 204 listening to port 31667 e Layoutnamed Parking1 has been defined on the client computer e Command button has been defined in a layout If you want to send such a command from MxControlCenter to another computer running MxControlCenter e g to show a different layout on a client you should proceed as follows e Edit an existing or create a new background layout see Section 4 2 4 Defining Background Layouts e Adda command button Right click anywhere on the lay
420. outs which have a background see faresenene Section 4 2 4 Grid layouts are specifically suited to implement H RaT systems in which showing the video sourcesismostimportant Ba B Recepton B Elevators Assigning Video Sources to Grid Layouts eee a B Player Inside 1 Activate the Layout Manager see Activating the Layout Caner Seu Manager in Section 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts dizio diz 2 Select the layout you want to edit for example Main naz n22 o i Entrance or create a new grid layout see Section 4 2 sw Creating Layouts Auto VGA VGA Grid gt A 3 Select a grid type in the Grids panel for example VGA VGA VGA VGA VGA VGA as highlighted by the red frame inthe CIF GIF pam figure CIF CIF 4 Confirm the system prompt The display area of MxControlCenter now uses the new grid 5 Assign a video source to a display window using one of these methods Drag amp drop a camera or other video source from the sidebar to a grid display window in the display area Right click on a display window select Edit from the context menu select an Element type and select a Video source See the Additional Rules for Assigning Video Sources to Grid Layouts section below for more information on the available options 6 Quit the Layout Manager see Deactivating the Layout Manager in Section 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts The layout definition is saved automatically A
421. p Gia w Sar hBoea 8O GO 8 elaeoqlaa 7 7 lt EFALTEIRE SNe T Display windows Icons Buttons Display windows Elements with Permanently Assigned Video Sources e Live This type of display window basically shows a live video source as is with the selected frame rate Available video sources MOBOTIX and third party cameras This is also the default type when using drag amp drop to add video sources to a layout ground layouts It consists of a camera icon which automatically shows the live stream when the camera detects an alarm Double clicking on such an icon opens the live video stream in an extra window e Live icon This is a variant of the Live display window that is only available in back Q24M live icon e Preview This type of display window shows the preview image stream of a MOBOTIX camera in order to save bandwidth In addition you can select the lens the frame rate max 4 fps and the image size of the transferred video stream A preview window requires significantly fewer resources and causes less network traffic compared to a live window This element is particularly efficient when your MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 6 2 3 9g 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration network has limited bandwidth and you are displaying many different video sources in the layout Available video sources MOBOTIX cameras
422. pd apache org docs project or to the Microsoft Internet Information Server help 5 6 1 MxRemotePreview System Requirements and Installation The web server computer needs a fast connection with high bandwidth to access the file server recordings of the MOBOTIX cameras MxRemotePreview runs on computers with Windows or Ubuntu Linux Computer System MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings 2 81 3 9 6 e Computer with Intel Pentium 4 processor or better e Atleast 2 GB RAM e Operating system Windows XP SP 3 or higher Ubuntu Linux MxRemotePreview for this operating system is available upon request only Web Server e Apache see Section 5 6 2 Installing MxRemotePreview on Windows with Apache Web Server e Microsoft Internet Information Server 7 see Section 5 6 3 Installing MxRemotePreview on Microsoft Internet Information Server 7 5 6 2 Installing MxRemotePreview on Windows with Apache Web Server 1 Install the Apache web server on the Windows computer Download an Apache web server installation file for Windows from httpd apache org Execute the apache _xxx win32 64 xxx msi installation file and follow the instructions Install Apache as a Windows service and make sure that the server is listening to port 80 default Open a web browser and enter http
423. ploading Settings of One or More Cameras can create and restore backups for individual cameras Update Assistant also provides a means for backing up and restoring all cameras in the camera list e Select File gt System Backup from the menu or press F2 to create a zipped backup archive with the configuration files c g of all cameras in the camera ist e Select File gt Restore System Backup from the menu or press SHIFT F2 to select a zipped backup archive for restoring the configurations of all cameras When loading a configuration backup archive MxConfig lt date gt zip see Contents of a Zipped Backup Archive the configuration files of the cameras are automatically uploaded to the individual cameras These System Backup commands basically automate the Camera gt Save Settings and the Camera gt Upload Settings menu commands for all cameras in one step They can thus be used to comfortably backup and restore the complete set of camera configura tions of the MxControlCenter system 5 1 9 Changing the Configuration of Many Cameras at Once By properly configuring one camera and applying that configuration or parts thereof to many other target cameras you can save a considerable amount of time The procedure follows these steps e Configure one camera using the Camera Configuration dialog see Section 4 5 Configuring Alarms and Recordings e Save the configuration from that camera see Creating a Back
424. ponding e mail profile in the Time Tasks dialog under Admin Menu gt Camera Administration for the scheduled time tasks 4 6 5 Creating and Storing Suitable Evaluations in MxControlCenter The movements and heat maps are evaluated according to the defined profile and time period It is possible to create multiple MxAnalytics evaluations depending on your needs To reduce your workload you can save the various MxAnalytics evaluations in order to call them with one click Proceed as follows to create new MxAnalytics evaluations in the Navigator sidebar panel 1 Right click anywhere in the EVENT SEARCHES amp MxANALYTICS section 2 Select New search from the shortcut menu 3 Enter a name that describes the setting 4 Create an MxAnalytics evaluation as outlined in Section 3 7 2 Calling Up Evaluations The setting is saved under the corresponding name and can be accessed with one click MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 218 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights By default MxControlCenter is a single user application where the user that started the application has full control of the entire system By adding groups and users however you can configure the application as a multi user system In this case you will need to decide on who will use the system and which roles these persons will play MxControlCenter uses a
425. r Model Q24M Secure Software version MX V4 0 7 31 MAC address 00 03 c5 09 28 63 Factory IP address 10 9 42 99 Current IP addresses 19 9 42 99 e Model Shows the camera model e Software version Shows the version of the camera software e MAC address Shows the MAC address of the camera e Factory IP address Shows the original factory IP address of the camera e Current IP addresses Shows the IP address es currently in use 6 2 3 The Display Tab This tab contains the following parameters Access Data Information Display PTZ Rotor Instruction file Preferred Alarm Layout Not defined z Display strategy Minimum delay Smooth display Audio path Self fF ci e Instruction file Enter a file name and path in this box txt htm1 etc When executing the Show alarm instructions command for this video source see adjacent buttons MxControlCenter shows the file in its default application i e an HTML file will be shown in the default web browser e Preferred Alarm Layout Select one of the layouts of this MxControlCenter installation from this dropdown MxControlCenter automatically shows this layout if the application receives an alarm message from the camera and the Switch to Preferred Layout checkbox has been activated on the Alarm Handling tab of the Options dialog MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Properties of
426. r name root Password eceececee Access recordings M axis_0 e Click on the Change button in the Access recordings section to open the Access This path can point Recordings of dialog either to a shared folder on MxServer or E Access Recordings of axis 1 a mapped network drive Access Recordings ona separate file server No recording folder Default file server pat factory IP address Specific file server path M axis_0 More Use preview data for playback and Video Search e Activate the Specific file server path option and enter the corresponding path Click on the More button to open the Recording Folders dialog You will have to add Click on the Add button and navigate to the camera s recordings folder a separate path for Recording folders each IP dome camera pee Name Path 1 H psffHome mxdata 10_8_195_72 psf Home mxdata 10_8_195_72 j2 FBS m axs_o M axis_0 p p Add __ Edit _ Remove __ Apply Select the new recording folder and click on OK MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks 267 396 5 4 3 Integrating Analog Third Party PTZ Cameras As a second part of the configuration process an additional step lets you define an Event Recording path This step enables the converted digitized video streams to be stored in a MOBOTIX file server structure
427. r name and enter the corresponding password to start MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Elements of the Application Window 6 5 3 Q 6 3 1 Elements of the Application Window Upon launching MxControlCenter opens its application window showing the following elements Title bar Menu bar Toolbar Tools Help OG HO G sseslgeo d a More Information on page 66 Alarm list Status bar Display area shows lay outs with video sources Sidebar with panels and event searches What Are Layouts and Video Sources A layoutdisplays the video streams of one or more video sources in MxControlCenter s display area The following layout types are available e A Grid Layout shows the video sources in a grid with either fixed sizes or an automatic grid layout e A Background Layout shows the video sources in front of a background image e g a map of the building either as a video window or an icon Layouts can be grouped in the Navigator sidebar panel to provide a structured tree view A video source is any source offering video content that can be displayed in MxControlCenter The term not only refers to MOBOTIX cameras but also to third party IP cameras recordings stored on file servers file server paths and on Snap Server NAS systems MxPEG clips and analog cameras connected via MxServer e g an analog Dome
428. r the maximum age to appropriate values so as not to exceed the capacity of the share Set the Frame rate as required ON OFF Activate recording for this channel Rec root directory path MADATA Rec disk quota MB Rec max age 4096 0 dO h Event recording Frame rate 12 frame per second v Click on Send to update the parameters in MxServer and save the settings Using the Recordings of Third Party Cameras in MxControlCenter To use the recordings of these cameras in MxControlCenter enter the File server path in MxControlCenter depending on the type of camera Analog cameras connected to MxServer Proceed as described in Step 4 Set the Storage Location of the Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter of Section 5 4 3 Integrating Analog Third Party PTZ Cameras IP cameras Proceed as described in Step 3 Set the Storage Location of the IP PTZ Dome in MxControlCenter of Section 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras 5 5 6 Automatically Starting MxServer on the Computer For using MxServer productively it is recommended to add the MxServer exe file as a scheduled task in Windows This makes sure that MxServer starts automatically when booting the computer On a Windows Vista computer click on Start gt Control Panel Click on System and Maintenance and in the Administrative Tools section on Schedule tasks In the Actions panel click on Create Basic Task On the Create a Bas
429. ra 32 3 6 Fast Availability of Video Evidence A mouse click makes a simple change to the recording of other cameras at the same point in time Important events are recorded every day not only in connection with criminal acts Sometimes a receptionist would simply like to know if someone rang the doorbell during his her brief absence or if an agitated customer really left his bank card at cash register 3 an hour ago In another case it is important to filter out the decisive video evidence as quickly and simply as possible from the recorded data and export it as evidence for a court of law possibly printing it out MOBOTIX with MxCC has the right solutions available Time Controlled Event Search Searching for an event e g shoplifting that is supposed to have occurred at a known location is particularly easy using the chronological display of all event recordings of one camera The search results are displayed in a time line the selected event in a larger window The image settings can be immediately optimized here and the event can be directly exported ECEE Last event seque Con coo ed Name IF Versand S w Eck 192 168 41 120 15 5929 Tue 21 0 Con Versand NW 14 16H 41 177 TRUAIN Tue 710 Con Lager Gang 6 192 168 41 134 15 41 19 Tue 21 0 Con PKwW Einfaht T24 192 168 41 177 03 04 20 Mon 20 Coni Flu 20G Warten 192 168 41 57 16 02 59 Tue 21 0 Con Foyer Q24 2 192 168 41 73 18 07
430. rame by dragging its ay interior To create other shapes than rectangles simply drag k the corners until the window matches the area of interest see figure to the right If you want to delete a window click on the close icon in the top right corner MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 128 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter C 100 e Execute the search by clicking on the Search button MxControlCenter starts searching the event images in the defined time range and starts filling the search results panel above While the search is running the progress bar is filling If MxControlCenter detects movements within the boundaries of a video window it turns red and the clip is added to the search results panel Once the search has finished you can double click on a clip in the search results panel to play it back in the Player panel Note that the red video motion window indicates the area in which MxControlCenter detected video motion if several windows had been defined the others may stay yellow v orang OSB a a HE 2 O G AB OBOl a s 0IeDe o raa H inean A pe wieny es inry 84 858 Triggering Post VM window is Pe le G bunch Mode x Post VM window PTL Cortrets Sober Ces MeCentrotieste Playing back the events works exactly as explained in Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches Modifying an Existing Post VM Search
431. ras Determine where you want to install the cameras Run the Ethernet cable to the mounting position of the camera Install the cameras and connect the Ethernet cable to the corresponding camera e Setup the power supply Determine the method for supplying power to the camera Use either MOBOTIX power supplies with Network Power Adapters or a commercial PoE switch see Section 2 2 Power Supply and Network Connection of Cameras e Connect the cameras Connect the Ethernet cable from the cameras to the PoE switch or the Network Power Rack Network Power Adapter The PoE switch is usually con nected to the local area network LAN via another Ethernet cable e Check the cameras Inspect the LEDs of the operating cameras to make sure that the cameras are operating normally The MOBOTIX cameras are now ready to use and available on the local area network They can now be integrated into MxControlCenter Integrating the Cameras into MxControlCenter e Install MxControlCenter Insert the MOBOTIX Demo DVD if available or download the MxControlCenter software for your operating system Install the application see Section 2 3 Installing MxControlCenter e Automatically search for cameras Launch MxControlCenter The application automati cally finds all MOBOTIX cameras in the local network and shows a preview image for each camera that is directly accessible You can add cameras which are outside of the local network e g in your sum
432. rd eeeeee Proxy server IP Port MxStatus Server 172 16 0 20 Port 8080 MxStatus has been used in the example in Section 3 2 1 Displaying Video Content in Layouts to update the status of camera icons for the head of the surveillance team MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 158 396 B E Grid Background MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 2 Creating and Editing Layouts Layouts play a key role in MxControlCenter since they are used to show cameras and other video sources if you are unsure about video sources layouts and how they are used in MxControlCenter please see Section 3 1 Elements of the Application Window This section focuses on how to create and edit layouts and also on the different layout types For more general instructions about planning a layout structure and when to use which layout type please see Section 4 3 1 Planning a Layout Structure To automatically create layouts for different video sources MOBOTIX cameras file server paths MxPEG clips and third party network cameras you can proceed as described in Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources If you want to customize layouts or create new layouts from scratch you will need to activate the Layout Manager In this application mode you can create new layouts and modify or delete existing ones Activating the Layout Manager To acti
433. rdings overwritten by the camera s Ring Bufferstorage mechanism To export entire events to the local archive e Open the Navigator sidebar panel if it is not visible e Open a predefined event search in the EVENT SEARCHES section or create an ad hoc search MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 126 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter e Find the event you want to store e Drag the event to any folder in the LOCAL ARCHIVE section MxControlCenter shows a progress dialog You can now export the event as a video clip in different formats For more information on how to do this Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage 3 5 9 Using Post Video Motion Detection in Recordings Detecting movements in live video motion windows is a feature that is common fo all MOBOTIX cameras and that is known as Video Motion Detection If the cameras detect movements in the video motion windows they typically store the event images event recording The event searches allow finding these events Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches Cameras set to continuous recording on the other hand typically store images at a reduced frame rate e g 2 fps over longer periods of time When searching for a specific event however this could mean that you would need to play back several days worth of recorded video This is where the Subsequent Video Motion Detection Pos
434. re windows are used for deter mining exposure the rest of the image area does notinfluence exposure A value of 0 is useful if the exposure windows are to be used only for automatic white balance e White Balance Controls to which degree the camera uses exposure windows to control the white balance in relation to the rest of the image Total 0 to 100 A value of Jofa uses the whole image area for adjusting white balance and ignores the exposure windows This setting is useful if the exposure windows are to be used only for automatic exposure e Brightness This parameter sets the average image brightness 0 to 100 that should be reached within the exposure windows Ifthe options of this section are not available Exposure Mode has been set to Virtual PTZ In this mode the camera cannot use any exposure windows Frame Details O This section shows the dimensions of the selected exposure window click on such a window to activate it Changing the values of the coordinates and the dimensions modi fies the selected window accordingly If no exposure windows are present click into the display area and draw a rectangle with the mouse e Geometry Use the spin buttons to modify the size and position of the selected exposure window e Exclude window area from exposure If this option is activated for the last exposure window you clicked on its area is excluded from exposure control lf the options of this section are n
435. reating Sets bier sella Dual eae Hemil Mono Text and Display Text Display On Comment ID HOSTNAME engs Date and Time Date amp Time vPTZ Settings vPTZ Actions Allow or lock as required Event Control Arming As required available General Event Settings Time Table Profile Select profile if required Arming Delay As required Event Dead Time 20s Passive Infrared Enabled Enabled Video Motion Enabled Video Motion ate S generate Event Settings Definitions Copy Video Motion Definitions Disabled Enabled gt Dual Lens Video Motion Enabled Disabled Other events Activate as required available Arming Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Time Table Profile Select profile if required Recording Status Symbol On Full Image Recording On Recording Mode Event Recording Recording Time Before Eveni 2 to 5s Recording Recording Time Min 30s Visual Alarm VA On Left Camera Selection o Auto Auto Resolution Mega or QXGA Text Display On Comment ID HOSTNAME Date and Time Date amp Time Hemispheric has additional options For help on the individual image and event control settings please consult the camera help MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Finishing the Lab Configuration of the Cameras 355 396
436. resolution Use custom audio setting Ca ea Activate the Remote Preview option Enter the IP address or server name in the IP address field and specify the Port to use 172 16 0 333 and 9000 in the figure Enter the access information for the MxRemotePreview server in the User name and Password fields Ifyou want to use MxRemotePreview parameters that are different from the default preview settings specified in Step 1 activate the corresponding parameters and set the values you would like to use blue frame in the figure e Close all open dialogs by clicking on OK MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 8 8 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features 5 7 Using MxControlCenter to Read SD Cards MOBOTIX cameras IT and Secure models store their recordings on an internal SD card see the corresponding manual of your camera for more information on SD card storage Since MOBOTIX cameras use a special file system for storing the recordings on the SD card you cannot read the cards in a computer This requires a MOBOTIX driver which is available for Windows computers Follow these steps to read an SD card with recordings of a MOBOTIX camera on a computer e Quit MxControlCenter if it is running e Insert the SD card into a card reader e Windows shows a message that it found new hardware Do not attempt to access the drive in Windows Explorer
437. right hand corner of the frame Highlighted frames can also be deleted by pressing the DEL key You can select any one of the predefined exposure windows then click on it and move it to a different position to create a custom exposure window e Show windows These options allow you to define if and when the exposure and exclusion window frames are shown in the camera s image Off Does not show any exposure window frames in the camera images Show Frame Permanently shows the exposure window frames in the camera images and not only on this tab Frame and Histogram Permanently shows the exposure window frames and a histogram of the measured exposure values in the camera images Ifthe options of this section are not available Exposure Mode has been set to Virtual PTZ In this mode the camera cannot use any exposure windows MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 319 396 Weights O The settings in this group box are used in special situations for fine tuning and adjust ing images to attain the desired result These settings should only be altered if all other measures have not produced the desired results e Exposure Controls to which degree the camera uses exposure windows to control the exposure in relation to the rest of the image 0 to 100 A value of 700 default means that only the exposu
438. rinting and Exporting Once you have identified the recordings you want to present to the authorities you can save specific images or create videos from the recordings of one or more cameras 3 6 1 Saving Single Images This process comprises finding a good image to save storing the file as an image on the desktop and sending it off via e mail for example To store an image on your desktop e Select the camera you want to use yellow frame e lf you want to save an image from a recording Make sure that the camera is in Player mode it shows a red recording icon in the top right corner Navigate to the image you want to store using the controls in the Player section of the sidebar e Click on the Save current image to desktop button to store the current image as JPEG file default MxControlCenter saves the current file to the desktop and assigns a file name as follows Syntax lt camera name gt _ lt yyyymmdd hhmm gt lt sequence no gt lt extension gt Example east gate 20101123 1453 374 jpg You can now attach the file s to an e mail for example Selecting the File Format By default MxControlCenter uses the JPEG image format Click on the down arrow to the right of the Save current image to desktop button and select the format you want to use see Notes below MxControlCenter saves an image with the selected format to the desktop and uses this format from now on e You can also use this fe
439. rm List bach acivatad 33 4 Show as grid layout Auto Helpful for background layouts to see all video sources 23 21 Scalable to any size automati Open extra window cally maintains aspect ratio P2 Change scaling of display Applies to all display windows gt 33 windows in a layout Shows the image as gener ated by the camera s image sensor s Activate image post Use dropdown s Settings com 3328 processing mand to configure this function a Save current image to the MxControlCenter stores the last 336 1 desktop selection of the dropdown ae Permanently stores live video 3 2 10 Record to Local Archive stream on MxCC computer 34 3 4 Allows to manually add interest ing images of selected display window Shows two images if using post Print current image processing or virtual PTZ 3 6 2 1 Available only when camera is selected Drop down button Activate Full Image live view Copy current image to Alarm List E a a e a MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Elements of the Application Window Toolbar Button Name Remark See Show camera s alarm Available if instruction file has 33 43 instructions been set in Properties Show camera s preferred Available if preferred layout has 33 43 layout been set in Properties Show camera s reference Available if reference image has 33 43 image been set in Properti
440. rnal software MOBOTIX allow a standard network storage medium to have enough capacity to record 10 times more cameras than is ordinarily the case MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Conventional video system MOBOTIX complete HiRes solution Cameras 3x dome cameras 2 700 1x store cash register 798 4x cameras with weather protection 4 000 1xD24M 4 gas pumps 748 2x cameras with weather protection 2 000 2x D24M car wash 1 496 1x mechanical dome camera 2 300 1x M24M Sec repair shop 798 2x day night cameras 2 200 1x M12DNight car dealership 1 398 Costs 13 200 5 238 Network infrastructure 500 m coaxial cabling 1 000 300m CAT 5 cabling 600 500 m power supply cabling 1 000 1x 8 port switch 500 Costs 2 000 1 100 Camera software licenses All figures in euros e Material costs without installation Costs 1 000 0 Central recording Internal video recording DVR system software 4900 6xSDcard 4 GB incl 0 Total costs 21 100 6 338 This example is based on an average gas station with four lanes store car wash and repair shop The left column shows the costs of a conventional centralized storage video systems while the right column shows the costs of MOBOTIX According to the calculations in this example the savings with MOBOTIX come to 70 the reasons are simple Fewer cameras thanks to more detail no software costs no additio
441. s Update Assistant dialog 239 Elements of application window 65 Element types of Layouts 161 Encrypted connections To access cameras 225 Enhanced features 238 Errors Activating MxControlCenter error log 367 Finding and correcting 364 Ethernet glossary 372 Evaluating Recordings 106 Evaluations Creating 217 MxAnalytics 147 Storing suitable evaluations 217 Events 28 Camera Configuration tab 325 Filtering 35 Event searches 119 Event Searches Filtering results 123 EVENT SEARCHES Navigator sidebar panel 70 Events glossary 372 Example Adding a MOBOTIX camera 57 Display modes 94 Live Recording 92 Synchronized playback 115 Two man rule 150 Example application Donbass Arena Ukraine 44 Example scenarios Recording 106 Exporting 135 Installations 234 Recordings 137 Video 35 Exposure Camera Configuration tab 316 ExtIO glossary 372 Extra live windows Using 77 Extra windows Configuring 183 Using 76 Fast Ethernet glossary 372 Filtering Alarm List 104 Events 35 Event Search results 123 Finding Video sources 56 FixDome glossary 372 Flash memory glossary 372 fps glossary 372 Frame rate 372 FTP glossary 372 Functions Minimized application window 97 Virtual PTZ 82 vPTZ 82 G General Options tab 291 Generating Layout 61 Reports 217 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 84 3 96 MxCC User M
442. s have been activated in the Options gt Alarm Handling dialog MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com How the Alarm Features Work 103 396 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms When MxControlCenter receives an alarm the application can execute the defined auto matic functions e g switching to the preferred layout of the alerting camera In addition the operator can execute specific functions to react to such an alarm Acknowledging Alarms If MxControlCenter has been set up so that the operator needs to acknowledge incoming alarms MxControlCenter shows the alarms as described in Section 3 4 1 Visual Alarm Features in the alarm list To acknowledge an alarm you simply click on the title bar of the alarm image Once all images in the alarm list have been acknowledged the red status bar at the top of the alarm list turns green Title Bar Colors of Acknowledged Alarm List Images Once you have acknowledged an alarm its title bar changes from the status shown in Title Bar Colors and Types of Alarm List Images to the colors shown in the table below Title Bar Explanation eee teens eee Acknowledged event alarm eo Acknowledged event alarm from selected camera 14 20 25 doku d12d 180 N mm Acknowledged IP Notify alarm Pee Acknowledged IP Notify alarm from selected camera 180 See Acknowledged connection alarm Acknowledged connection alarm fro
443. s from MOBOTIX far exceed the standard of a traditional video management system The program layout and functions can be tailored for nearly any application and any user type MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com O V O MxCC is perfectly suited for controlling security oriented CCTV systems however it is also a suitable operating software for the video monitoring of production processes for preparing time lapse videos for documenting construction progress and for controlling information monitors with live video in car washes or events For a Variety of Camera Systems Hybrid Solution MOBOTIX makes it especially easy to decide in favor of the decentralized high resolution video system MxCC not only operates optimally with MOBOTIX cameras but also allows you to continue using already existing video cameras from other manufacturers hybrid solution IP cameras and even analog motor controlled PTZ cameras can be integrated displayed live and remotely controlled via a virtual or real joystick The recorded videos of these third party cameras can also be evaluated and exported at the monitor with MxCC MOBOTIX Cameras ie Analog Cameras 7 E Wxce PTZ Cameras For a Minimum of Hardware Requirements Once again the decentralized camera technology plays a part as the system advantage of decisive importance Beca
444. s presented in this section are controlling how MxControlCenter shows the video sources of a specific grid layout While it is possible to remove the sidebar and other controls from view the commands listed below provide access to specific display functions of MxControlCenter Apply Free Scaling of Display Windows If you activate View gt Free scaling in the menu MxControlCenter automatically adjusts the size of all display windows in a grid to the space that is available within the display area To do so MxControlCenter smoothly adjusts the size of the display windows while maintaining the aspect ratio In contrast to regular scaling the application does not switch back and forth between the predefined display window sizes Quarter PDA PDA CIF VGA Mega Activate View gt Free scaling then click on the Maximize button of the application window to see how MxControlCenter is automatically scaling the display windows Free scaling substantially increases the CPU load on the computer that is running MxControlCenter If you are using many cameras in one layout you may have to change the interpolation method see Setting the Interpolation Method for Free Scaling in Section 4 2 5 More Options When Editing Layouts or reduce the frame rates of the cameras you are displaying MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Display Modes of the Application Window 95
445. s that can convert the MxControlCenter export formats to AVC H 264 Proposed Video Formats Among the supported formats two formats merit special attention The File Server Structure allows verifying the integrity of the exported video on Windows machines whereas MxPEG can be played back in Windows Media Player As opposed to the other formats both of these formats do not involve any recoding i e the original image format is preserved Proposed Format for Legal Purposes When exporting video for legal purposes it is recommended to export as a File Server Structure or as MxPEG and to include the MxControlCenter application files You can burn the exported folder structure to a CD DVD to hand over to the authorities All that is required to play back the video is a Windows computer with a CD DVD drive Playing back the structure does not involve any installation simply double clicking onthe PlayVideo cmd file in the export folder starts the playback in MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Saving Printing and Exporting 139 396 This format also allows checking the data integrity to prove that the video has not been manipulated afterwards The camera s public key file cert pem that is required for check ing the integrity of the exported data is automatically included in the export Note that MxControlCenter can also create a compressed ZIP ar
446. s that are too high Make sure that the factory access data of the cameras user name admin and password meinsm have been changed MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 5 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features How DynDNS Works Private IP addresses Camera 1 Camera 2 6 Ko Back door Front door ve o 4 I X 4 WF gly RY le ST I gal O MIR S I a alias V 5 i O S 4 et ER N L GAI S l 4 Ie oy S Internet a y public IP addresses L DSL router mycamera dyndns org DynDNS server The router updates its IP address at the DynDNS server QO The computer asks for the IP address of mycamera dyndns org The DNS service sends the IP address 213 63 87 154 back to the computer O The computer uses different ports 8001 and 8002 when accessing the router s external IP address 213 63 87 154 O The router forwards queries on ports 8001 and 8002 of its external IP address 213 63 87 154 to the internal IP addresses 192 168 178 201 and 192 168 178 202 respectively Scenario Internet Connection of the Cameras Using a Broadband Router In this scenario all cameras are connected to the Internet via a broadband router with a flat rate tariff Note that you only need a DynDNS name for the router itself This name and the corresponding access data are then entered in the router
447. s the self generated digital certificate If you want to use a dif ferent digital certificate please proceed as described in Section 4 8 4 Using Encrypted Connections to Access Cameras MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 3 0 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration Downloading the Public Key to Check Data Integrity This is only required if you want to check the digital signature of storage folders created with a MOBOTIX camera that has a software version lower than 4 0 6 x To automatically store the public key in a file server path e Click on the Open camera in browser button in MxControlCenter e Click on the Admin Menu button in the camera s browser interface you most likely need to enter the proper user name and password e Inthe Administration Overview dialog click on the Storage on External File Server Flash Device link Storage section e Inthe Storage on External File Server Flash Device dialog click on the More button at the bottom of the dialog e Inthe External Logging section at the bottom of the dialog set Camera Logfiles to On The camera now periodically stores its logfiles and the cert pem file with the public key in the camera s storage location on the file server e This option is only available on cameras with software version MX V4 0 6 x or higher e This only works if the camera is using a file server to store its
448. s then displayed in the top left corner of the camera image You can perform PTZ com mands either using the OnScreen Control which can be opened and closed using ALT click or the PTZ Controls sidebar panel The OnScreen Control displayed in the browser interface of the camera can be activated and deactivated in Setup Menu gt vPTZ Settings Changes of various image settings that are made in the PTZ Controls sidebar panel are saved only when you change the camera or the layout of the camera In the Options dialog you can set if and how changes are saved see Section 6 1 1 The General Tab This applies to changes of the following image settings lens selection dual cameras display mode hemispheric installation setting of preset views and locking unlocking of the PTZ feature Image settings that are changed by camera zoom are never saved in the camera MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Live Video Surveillance 8 3 3 96 Introduction to Display Modes Regular PTZ cameras rely on electric actuators and motorized zoom lenses to execute pan tilt and zoom actions MOBOTIX cameras on the other hand use high resolution image sensors to provide virtual PTZ functionality Once you zoom into the image you can use the mouse or the virtual joystick in the PTZ Controls sidebar panel to execute virtual PTZ actions Full Image Zoomed Image Area E ar TAN J
449. s when loosing the connection to one of the cameras e Activate after Activate this Bi Mail Settings es checkbox and set the num SMTP Settings ber of minutes to wait before asasin mycompany com 7 Port 25 5 defauk port 25 e playing an alarm sound Encrypted connection Never TLS f available SSL Send e mail message to If server requires authentication Activate this checkbox to use User name Password this function then click on Message the Mail settings button to aE oOo aycan To addresseel mycompany com addressee2 mycompany com s configure the e mails sent by Ce Bcc MxControlCenter see figure ees to the right Note that you eee EEA need to know the address of Subject MxControiCenter Dead Man s Switch on tsc vbox vista a valid e mail server a valid Content Rich Text and Phin Text Only Plain Text e mail account and possi indicates a required field bly a password for using Pevew this function Activate the a aa s Preview checkbox to see the MxControlCenter z b d i a U ea M pir e mail as it will be sent and NPE EPT click on the Send Test Mail to SS ETT i test the configuration MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 234 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration a 4 9 Working with MxControlCenter Configurations Now that you have configured your MOBOTIX system you may want to copy this configura tion to other w
450. sentatives Users of this group can authorize users of the Playback group to access recordings Creating the Groups the Users and Setting the Rights When setting up a two man rule you need to create the two groups mentioned above and the corresponding users e Select Tools gt Users amp groups in the menu and activate the Users amp Groups tab e Click on the Add Group button and create the Union Representatives group 2L e Click again on the Add Group button and create the Playback group e Using the Add User button create at least one user 4 Union Representatives L for each group do not forget to set passwords see mike Section 4 7 1 Creating and Editing Groups and Users 4 Playback For this example the user names are mike and gary gary respectively e Activate the Group Rights tab e Forthe Union Representatives group activate the Authorize checkbox in the Access control section Make sure that all other rights for this group are switched off e For the Playback group activate the Play checkbox in the Playback Export amp Printing section e Set all other rights for the Playback group as required Playback Export amp Printing gt Video search Always Playback Export amp Printing gt Export Always Playback Export amp Printing gt Local archive Activate checkbox Application gt Quit Activate checkbox e Click on OK to close the dialog You can now use this
451. sers from Changing the Scaling and Display Settings If you want to prevent the users of a group from changing the scaling and display set tings proceed as follows e Open the Users amp Groups dialog Tools gt Users amp groups in the menu e Click on the Group Rights tab e Deactivate the Allow checkbox of the Application gt Camera display scaling right in the column of the user group that is not supposed to use this function e Click on OK to close the dialog For more information on users and rights see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights 4 4 2 Configuring the Toolbar The toolbar provides a quick way to access often used functions of MxControlCenter You can configure the toolbar using one of these methods e Remove group rights e Activate the layout buttons in the toolbar e Hide the entire toolbar MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring the Program Views and the User Interface 191 396 Removing Group Rights This method removes the buttons that are attached to the corresponding group privileges If you want to prevent the users of a group from activating the audio from a camera for example proceed as follows e Open the Users amp Groups dialog Tools gt Users amp groups in the menu e Click on the Group Rights tab e Set Live gt Audio right in the column of the user group that is not supposed to use this functio
452. set the corresponding group rights For information on how to do this see Section 4 7 Users Groups and Group Rights Users amp Groups o Users amp Groups Group Rights Create users and groups _ and enter details Name Group Settings Admins Owners Group name Admins MxControlCenter has its own access rights management The groups and users defined for MxControlCenter have nothing to do with those defined f r the cameras see Creating the User Groups and Creating the Users in Section A 5 3 Setting the Admin Menu Options The exception is the mike user on the cameras which is used by the MxControlCenter workstations to access the cameras see Section A 8 1 Configuring the Global Settings Configure MxControlCenter views See Section 4 4 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Views Assign cameras to other file servers NAS When using more than one file Access Recordings B Select how MxControlCenter should access the recordings of server NAS select all cameras that Parking 1 z Downtown office are using one file server NAS in the oua Navigator sidebar panel then right Default fie server path factory IP address wil be appended click and select Access Recordings en ee Specific File Server see Changing MxControlCenter s MT pme een Access fo the Recordings of oe p a Many Cameras in Section 4 5 4 Password eeseeo Configuring Where to Record Create layou
453. sidebar panel and select the Configure entry from the shortcut menu E Camere Configuration ro x nl Q e Overvies Image Settings Dgonre Opening the MxAnalytics tab automatically opens the Basic Configuration sub tab Ada amp O amp W Recrang Audo Events Neteork Messages Time Server Mudnsiytcs Name Been Configurator Vaeual Configuraton General There it is possible to permanently activate MxAnalytics or activate it temporarily via a camera time table To do this a suitable time table must be defined in the camera and then selected for MxAnalytics activation see Section 4 6 2 Controlling Motion Detection Time Tables Optional The settings regarding basic configuration and permanent storage of detected movement data for future evaluation are also set in the same sub tab Define the detection areas eee FER amp m2 w a 4 army Time Table Profle Low ig suppressor Detection Mounting hegyt Tit angie LGA and shad 7 Setup Mesnsiytics storage 20 hex Show Getecton areas Y Object Desplay Counter v counting lines and object sizes in the Visual a Configuration sub tab of the MxAnalytics tab However before setting up storage for future evaluation test the settings for basic configuration and visual configuration and where necessary adjust them until you obtain the desired results This way you can avoid storing any corrupt data that may result during this st
454. so by activating the Exclude pseudo events button e If the button is activated yellow the event list will only show real events VM UC IR etc e ifthe button is deactivated not yellow the events list will also include the pseudo events of continuous recordings MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 131 396 Printing Event Images Click on the Print current and post processed image button to print the currently displayed image MxControlCenter now shows a print preview of the image If this image has been corrected by post processing the original non processed image will be added as well You can also export event images as pdf files using the integrated PDF print feature for easy sending and archiving of printouts Exporting Events as Video The Video Search dialog also allows adding sequences to the Export List dialog for sub sequent exporting of video content For more information on how to do this Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage 3 5 11 Playing Back Recordings from the Local Archive The recordings in the LOCAL ARCHIVE section of the Navigator panel are created using either the Live Recording function Section 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature or by dragging amp dropping clips from an event search into a folder within the local archive The clips in the lo
455. ssword Protected or Insufficient Privileges in the camera list you first need to enter a valid user name and password with administrator level access Move the mouse over one of the status icons at the beginning of a line red frame in the figure to see the status and a legend To change the access informa tion select a camera click on the Connection Settings button and enter the proper user name and password Qrx10 8 85 61 Riu MX V4 0 6 9 The connection status of this camera is Connected Successfully connected to the camera roy Software upload in progress Ej Rebooting Connecte Password Protected gt O B linsufficient Privileges lweshbe SOStSCS Not a MOBOTIX Camera Not a MOBOTIX Camera or MOBOTIX Camera on Backup System io Connection refused Unknown Detected If cameras have identical user names and passwords you can select several cam eras using CTRL SHIFT click or press CTRL A to select all cameras Then click on the Connection Settings button and adjust the settings accordingly The settings in the Proxy section of this dialog are per camera settings They are not to be confused with the proxy settings of the software download mechanisms see Why Is the Software Packages Panel Empty Make sure that the No Proxy option is activated when using the Connection Settings dialog or else updating the software on the cameras ma
456. stalled in the network newly added or removed are automatically found by MxCC even in current operation and can be configured and remotely operated as desired Fast Configuration In MxCC With MxCC you can push a button to get an overview of all available cameras and their basic settings such as the status of the camera arming type or recording or stor age location You can change the configuration settings for individual several or all MOBOTIX cameras at once Exposure control To set the optimal exposure you can use the camera s predefined exposure window or set up your own exposure window for adjusting to local circum stances large window areas Event settings In addition to other events it is possible here to set up one or more camera image areas in which movements in the image trigger an automatic alarm Recording parameters Events detected by the camera activate a recording with a specific frame rate resolution and pre alarm and post alarm recording In addition to the internal SD card recording the camera can also store on a PC or NAS e g SnapServer 1928 41 13 192 46 41 1 192 168 41 136 192 168 41 164 192 168 411 177 1 P Max Bel z it muam E st e E E aes ba a ee Bl 192 168 4119 m i aero 192 168 41 20 an mim aig 192 168 41 27 1 192 169 41 28 92 48 4190 3248 41 46 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobo
457. ster configura tion in the browser on one camera and copy that configuration to as many cameras as required This way you can save a lot of time when configuring many cameras The master configuration is a collection of generic settings and can be applied to other projects as well i If you have questions on the options in a dialog of the camera s browser interface remember that the online help provides context specific information click on the adjacent button in the top right corner of any camera dialog A 5 1 Overview The following table provides an overview of the settings that need to be adapted in order to create a camera independent master configuration Some of these settings can be changed in the Quick Installation wizard marked in the QI column below A more detailed description is provided starting with Section A 5 2 Using the Quick Installation Wizard Dialog Admin Menu Parameter Remark Public Access Disable alll X Group Access Control Lists Create three groups admins remote mxcc Create at least three users one per Users and Passwords group e g andrew richard mike Language Set browser language X Language and Start Page Select Start Page Set start page for browser BOOTP DHCP Activate Off DNS Servers Enter DNS servers as required Ethernet Interface Domain Enter domain name as required Enabled recommended disable if AI Items marked by an X can also be set using th
458. store the entire camera configuration In the following dialog do not reboot the camera but click on the Return to menu button at the top you will reboot the camera at the end of the next step Step 3 Activate HTTPS in the Camera and Set a Port In the Web Server dialog activate the Enable HTTPS checkbox HTTPS Settings section If you want to prevent regular i e unencrypted HTTP connections you can deactivate the Enable HTTP checkbox in the same section optional If you want to use a different port than the default port 443 you can enter that port in the SSL TLS port for HTTPS server field optional leave this field empty to use the default Click on the Set button at the bottom of the dialog Click on the Close button at the bottom of the dialog and permanently store the entire camera configuration Reboot the camera In the Permanently Store Configuration dialog click on the Reboot link In the Reboot the Camera dialog click on the Reboot Now button Wait until the camera has rebooted before proceeding If you want to use the existing self signed certificate of the camera configure one camera as outlined in steps 1 to 3 Then use the Update Assistant to store the configuration of that camera and upload its configuration to all other cameras While doing so you should instruct the Update Assistant to only update the Page language softbuttons section of the camera configuration this protects a
459. suspect that the data integrity of this camera s recordings is corrupted Inthe Export List dialog Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage click on the Check button this will manually check the video clips in the export list In the Export List dialog activate Check data integrity and export the video clips this will check the clips while exporting MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 4 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter The dialog opens and starts checking immediately While the check is running you will see the rolling ring and the sequence number MxControlCenter is currently checking red frame in figure below Check Data Integrity Data Integrity Check Detected Problems 4q24 thilo2 V 47 Sequences OK a 1940 Sequences not signed Sequences Integrity problem Certificates e Click on the Certificates button to get more information on the camera certificate MxControlCenter will also open this dialog automatically if it detects problems with the certificate e g if it has expired Once MxControlCenter has finished checking the video sequences the rolling ring disap pears and the results are listed in the Check Data Integrity dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Saving Printing and Exporting 135 396 3 6 Saving P
460. t VM search in short comes into play A Post VM search can help answer questions such as the following e Who stole the laptop that had been placed on the desk an hour ago e Was the car already damaged as it entered the parking lot this morning e Did anyone successfully evade the video motion windows In order to run a Post VM search the following requirements need to be fulfilled e The recorded video stream needs to be in MxPEG format event or continu ous recording e The software version of the MOBOTIX camera that recorded the video needs to be MX v4 0 4 18 or higher Post video motion searches only make sense on cameras that are recording con tinuously f you need this feature and the camera in question does not record continuously make sure that your system administrator changes the recording of this camera accordingly MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Playing Back and Evaluating Recordings 27 396 Creating a Post Video Motion Search A Post VM search is a special type of event search on one camera Creating a Post VM search is thus similar to creating a regular event search see Creating New Event Searches in Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches except that it uses a different search mode e Create a new search Open the Navigator sidebar panel if it is not visible Right click anywhere in the EVENT SEARCHE
461. t all If this option is activated camera settings will be replaced File sections Warning time signals signalout time timestamp weatherstat systemalarm sensors i Configuration file not found for LS mx10 8 85 61 7 Back up Configuration Files Before uploading store configuration files ers Thilo Desktop MxCC 2 5 MxConfig Backup 20 11 07 06 zip V Reboot the camera after the configuration has been updated Lox cancel MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 249 396 Update Assistant Software Updates and More This dialog will warn you if you have selected cameras without a corresponding configuration file Move the mouse over a configuration section to get more information on that section 4 Click on OK to upload the configuration settings Sections for Updating Each section in the Sections for Updating group box corresponds to one of the following configuration sections in the camera s web interface Admin Menu gt Configuration gt Edit Section Camera Dialogs Configuration File Sections User and Passwords access Security Group Access Control Lists IP Level Access Control accesscontrol FTP ales ftp i E Mail Protiles mai Transfer Profiles IP Notify Profles imagelink Image Profiles ipnotify Time Tasks Time Tasks timetasks Time Tables Time Tables timetable Speaker and Microphone audio Audio Manage
462. t data is analyzed and displayed according to the selected settings a LAYOUTS Boo Bso B mm VIDEOQUELLEN P suche 4 LOKALES ARO 4 EREIGNISSUCHEN amp MxANALYTICS Quelen ZablinienProfi Aktuelle woe V Datum setzen Woche 07 08 2012 Export i EAER Sei a Properties bar to Suchmodus HestmapProfi deem sete lt a select and setup profile and time data Zahllinien Bericht 32 2012 2012 08 06 2012 08 12 Linel Q24 Ba Area for counting Zeit west ost west line reports in a table 8 8 B 8 8 con n ost ost 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 00 12 00 Camera reference image with heat map to display the heat map and or counting lines MxControlCenter MB s KBR Open analysis via event searches amp MxAnalytics e Area for counting line reports in a table This area displays the reports for the period of time of the selected profile Line designations and designations for line limits in both directions are assigned automatically or manually when the counting lines are defined These designations are shown in the counting lines report You can show or hide counting lines in the lower part of the reference image The designa tions for line limits are then also displayed on the counting lines in the image This way it is easy to assign the counting lines to the values in the counting lines report
463. t invented by MOBOTIX MOBOTIX offers a monitor wall control which can be controlled remotely from a single worksta tion economically and efficiently For this purpose a standard PC with MxCC used as a main computer is connected to the cameras and any number of economical mini PCs with an MxCC installed as clients via the video network In turn each client is connected to a monitor on which the images of one or a small number of cameras are displayed The highest computing power to fetch and display camera images via network is thus transferred from the central main computer to each decentralized client However the image displayed by each client on the monitor can be converted as desired via the main computer by a mouse click and MxCC The main computer activates a port of the client s IP address in a purely technical manner and transfers the preset monitor display as a network message now switch to MxCC display x using cameras y and z Decentralized Video Wall Reduces Costs Increases Reliability e Easy to implement decentralized concept for video walls of any size e No licensing fees and no additional software required except for MxCC e Cost effective mini PCs as clients no keyboard no hard drive e ifa client malfunctions its display can simply be switched to a different monitor e Layout of video walls can be modified with a network command the command can also be automatically triggered by specific events or at specific ti
464. t menu Reference Image The frequency of the movements in specific time periods is shown in heat maps It is use ful if evaluations are based on the same background image in order to better compare heat maps for different time periods with one another or in the event that no people can be detected in the image To do this specify a reference image by clicking on the Save reference image button We recommend testing the effects of these settings after configuring the process parameters Only after the settings have been tested can it be guaranteed that MxAnalytics delivers usable data suitable for future evaluation It is not possible to perform or test evaluations or export processes if the recording is not activated as described in Section 3 7 Using MxAnalytics Alternatively you can activate the recording directly and delete any data saved during setup by reformating the recording once configuration is completed Switch to the camera s live image in the Visual Configuration sub tab to test the settings Check whether the counting lines have the correct label and label color for example Allow one or more people to move through the live image and check in the camera s live MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 21 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration image to see for example whether the counter values in the counting lines increase or if the mo
465. t to use location names but you should use a more detailed naming scheme for large projects Small project West gate Main entrance Large projects lt device_type gt lt building gt lt floor gt lt section gt lt room gt such as Cam1 B10 F2 S3 A210 for a camera and FS2 B10 F1 S1 A120 for a file server Make sure that you are entering the names in the List of components and locations mentioned in the table in Section A 1 Collecting Information About the System A 2 3 Connecting and Powering Up All Components You are now ready to connect some or all of your components and to power them up in this order e Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS e File servers NAS e Switches e Cameras e MxControlCenter workstation MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring the Storage Systems 339 396 A 2 4 Installing MxControlCenter on One Workstation The next step is to install MxControlCenter on one workstation in the lab This workstation can be either your own or one of the computers of the VSS The workstation is needed to configure the entire system and to create an MxControlCenter master configuration later on For more information on installing MxControlCenter see Section 2 3 2 Automatic Installation of MxControlCenter When starting MxControlCenter the application automatically searches for MOBOTIX devices on the network Add Video So
466. t you the status gt A 7 Name MxStatus exe Publisher Uninown Path C users wit nxcc 2 S mxstatus exe Network location Private network hat are network ations Se emite MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Getting Started 157 396 Running MxStatus as a Scheduled Task When setting up a professional system with several MxControlCenter workstations it is recommended to start MxStatus as a Scheduled Task every time the computer is started If you do not know how to do this or you do not have the rights to set up a scheduled task please ask your system administrator for assistance Configuring MxStatus on the MxControlCenter Computers Let s assume that you have set up an MxStatus computer that is using the same IP address and port as in the example above e P address of MxStatus computer 172 16 0 20 e Port of MxStatus computer 8080 Do the following on each of the MxControlCenter workstations e Open Tools gt Options from the MxControlCenter menu e Click on the Connection Defaults tab e Enter the IP address 172 16 0 20 in the Default Connection Data gt MxStatus Server box e Enter the port 8080 in the adjacent Port box e Click on OK to close the dialog Options n General Connection Defaults View Alam Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log Connections to Cameras Username admin Passwo
467. ter Seriele Schnmstelie 10r den Emptang von Wetterdaten einer unterst0izion Welterstation verwenden Terminal und Logger Mode Erlaudt Terminaimodus Remotezugrit und Protokollierung EinvAusgabemodus Verwendung der drei zus tzlichen Pins Automodus Automatische Umschaltung falis m glich Uventragungsgeschwindigkell der Scnnitisielic Anzani der Daten Bits pro Zeichen Pamlatsmodus der Feniererkennung N Keine E Gerado O Ungerade Anzani der Stop Bits An der Flusskontrolle Aus Keine Flusskontrolie criscts Hardware Flusskontrolie Speicnem der ausgehenden Zeichen im Putter Legt Zeichen tor Zellenende fest GOtige Zeichen nangen vom angescniossenen Geral ab Gro e des Putters in Zeichen zum Protokolieron der Ein und Ausgaben der serielien Scnnintsteio FOgt vor jeder Zele im Putter einen Zenstempo cin Setzen Siehe auch Y Voreinstellung jd Zur ckholen Schlie en Serielles Terminal Zustand der Signaleing nge Once you have completed these steps the pan and tilt features of the pan tilt head will be available for the camera in MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks 2 63 3 96 Selecting a Pan Tilt Head Protocol for a MOBOTIX Camera e Highlight a camera in the layout yel se infomation oispisy PTZRotor low frame ve unaaa
468. ter loses the connection to one of the cameras it will show an error message or a graphic set in this parameter e On latency timeout MxControlCenter shows the error message or graphic if the following is true MxControlCenter measures the latency time between capturing the image by the camera and displaying it on the monitor for each generated image Once the latency exceeds the Maximum latency time MxControlCenter starts measuring the time span during which this is the case If this time span surpasses the value specified in Maximum overdue time MxControlCenter executes the latency error display specified in this group box The Vertical image coverage settings control the area covered in vertical direction by the graphic files you have specified The Automatic stream recovery checkbox ensures that MxControlCenter does all it can to recover a lost stream as quickly as possible MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Security Considerations 2 3 3 3 Q 6 4 8 8 Configuring the Dead Man s Switch The dead man s switch is a tool for monitoring the activity of the guards on duty for example see Section 3 8 1 Working with the Dead Man s Switch To configure these settings select Tools gt Options from the menu and click on the Monitoring tab The options in the Dead Man s Switch group box on this tab are controlling how MxControlCenter react
469. ter the path mapped drive or UNC path to a common file server NAS system as well as the user name and password in the Access Recordings section See Setting a Default File Server in MxControlCenter in Section 4 5 4 Configuring Where to Record for more information e Configure the other global settings as required A 8 2 Adding Video Sources to the MxControlCenter Workstation e Open the Add Video Sources dialog Video Source gt Add in the menu The automatic search finds all connected MOBOTIX cameras that are currently running e Select all MOBOTIX cameras e Click on Add selected video sources MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 5 6 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline Decide whether or not to generate a layout depending on the number of cameras of the system 10 cameras or less Generate a new grid layout and set a descriptive name More than 10 cameras Do not generate a new layout and only add the video sources to the system A 8 3 Creating a Basic MxControlCenter Configuration a LAYOUTS e 4 Overview Outside B Main Entrance H west gate B Parking B Garage Entrance 4 g Overview Inside B Reception B Elevators B Back Entrance B outside Player B Inside Player 4 VIDEO SOURCES Create groups and users for MxControlCenter See Section A 1 Collecting Information About the System and
470. terto access the recording and play it back Two steps are necessary to integrate a third party IP camera in MxServer Please see the sections in Section 5 5 MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras as listed below 1 Add the third party IP camera as a New Channel in MxServer Section 5 5 4 Connecting a Third Party IP Camera to MxServer 2 Add an Event Recording path to the IP camera to store the video streaming data on MxServer in MOBOTIX file server structure see Section 5 5 5 Setting Up Recording in MxServer MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Automatic search Insert manually l Camera MxPEG dip Recording path 2 6 6 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features Step 3 Set the Storage Location of the IP PTZ Dome in MxControlCenter Once the MxServer environment has been set up return to MxControlCenter and open the Properties dialog of the camera Then update the path of the Storage location with the same path used in MxServer for storing video image data To set a path from the IP camera to MxServer e Select the camera from the Video Source gt Cameras node e Open the Properties of dialog for the camera and go to the Access Data tab Properties of axis 1 Name axis 1 Access Data Informatio Display l PTZ Rotor Urls Address 172 16 250 27 Port 80 Secure connection SSL Use
471. tery separately the corres ponding product manuals contain specific directions if the product contains a battery MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 11 396 MxCC User Manual Disclaimer Neither MOBOTIX AG nor any subsidiary of MOBOTIX AG will assume any responsibility for damage resulting from improper use of its products or failure to comply with the manuals and the applicable rules and regulations Our General Terms and Conditions apply You can download the current version of the General Terms and Conditions from our website at www mobotix com by clicking on the cos link at the bottom of every page MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com ere 13 396 THE MOBOTIX INFORMATION CHANNELS Support on the MOBOTIX Website MOBOTIX www mobotix com other Support The MOBOTIX Video Tutorials www mobotix com other Support Tutorials Seminars on MOBOTIX Campus www mobotix com other Partners Seminars The MOBOTIX YouTube Channel www youtube com MOBOTIXAG MOBOTIX Seminars MOBOTIX offers inexpensive seminars that include workshops and practical exer cises For more information visit www mobotix com gt Seminars Copyright Information All rights reserved MOBOTIX the MX logo MxControlCenter MxEasy and MxPEG are trademarks of MOBOTIX AG registered in the European Union the U
472. th e Password Password for accessing the default file server path Retrieving stored video data from a file server is much faster than retrieving video data via the MOBOTIX camera This approach does not put any strain on the camera since it is not involved in providing any files Default Preview Settings When searching recorded video MxControlCenter can obtain preview datainstead of the original recorded video to reduce the required bandwidth You can use this section to set specific preview parameters for all cameras see Section 5 6 Using MxRemotePreview to Access Remote Recordings for more information on setting up an MxRemotePreview server e Preview mode Camera Preview The cameras provide the preview video data according to the parameters specified for JPEG quality Frame rate etc below Remote Preview An MxRemotePreview server provides the preview video data according to the parameters specified for JPEG quality Frame rate etc below e Server Address Port Sets the server address and port number for accessing the MxRemotePreview server e Username Enter the user name required for accessing the MxRemotePreview server e Password Enter the password required for accessing the MxRemotePreview server e SSL Activate this option if the server connection is encrypted using SSL Secure Socket Layer e JPEG Quality Sets the JPEG quality of the preview video data delivered by the MxRemotePrevie
473. th increased event frame rate see below Event frame rate Increased frame rate during and after an event Recording time Time during which the camera records the video stream with increased frame rate External Recording O In addition to configuring the camera for internal RAM recordings the camera can also store video data on external storage options SD card USB drive etc the current com puter or a file server on the network Click on the Setup button to display the External Recording dialog box Depending on the selected option in the Target Computer section the External Recording dialog has different settings e Create a shared folder on this computer Shared folder Enter a name for this shared folder Local path Select the folder on this computer you would like to use for storing User name Set a user name for accessing this shared folder Password Set a password for accessing this shared folder Activate the Show checkbox to see the password e Use a different server or storage medium Storage Select the type of storage you would like to use NFS CIFS SMB Samba USB Storage USB Hard Drive SD Flash Cara Note that these options reflect the hardware that is available on this camera Server Enter the name or the IP address of the server Shared folder Select the shared folder you would like to use User name Set a user name for accessing this shared folder
474. the Alarm Features Work 105 396 e Background layouts The Show camera s alarm instructions button in the toolbar and the yellow Alarm Instructions icon in the title bar of a display window indicate that an instruction file is available Click on the button or the icon to see the file or right click on the window and select Show Alarm Instructions e Alarm List Make sure that MxControlCenter shows the alarm list Right click on an image of the alarm list and select Show Alarm Instructions The alarm instructions file can be an image an HTML file or web page in your browser a text file or any other file type that contains further instructions Showing the Preferred Layout of a Video Source When working with more cameras that fit comfortably into one layout you may need to create several layouts While you can easily switch to a different layout by clicking on a different one in the Navigator MxControlCenter can automatically switch to the Preferred Layout of the video source that sends an alarm message provided such a layout has been set Using this approach MxControlCenter can automatically show the alerts in layouts that have been optimized for this purpose You can thus show exactly the information needed by the operator when a certain alarm comes in if a preferred layout has been set for the video source yellow frame this button is active in the toolbar Click on this button or right click on the window and select Load pre
475. the Info button Update Assistant downloads the release notes and shows them in your web browser Why Is the Software Packages Panel Empty Certain settings in the Options dialog can prevent Update Assistant from downloading the list of software updates from the update server Do the following to check the settings e Select View gt Options from the menu of Update Assistant e Click on the Settings button in the Software Downloads dialog MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 242 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features G A Options g Language Camera Preview 7 Stil image English or i paS Live stream French At Program Start German Open recent camera list Search for cameras in the network Table Columns Start with an empty ist J Sei J Look for new software downloads Name 7i Address Software Download vJ Version J Progress amp Update server http update mobotix com Factory Address No proxy System Settings S ox Resolution 7 oy Custom proxy Alt Address ay Software Packages list stays empty Make sure that the Look for new software downloads checkbox in the At program Start section is activated To manually update the list of software downloads you can select Help gt Download Software from the menu Note that this option is not available when you click on the Settings button in the Software Downloa
476. the PTZ Controls in MxControlCenter The PTZ Controls sidebar panel contains a number of controls that you can operate with a mouse and that work just like a joystick e Turn the joystick left right or use the slider Adjusts the zoom setting of the selected video source blue arrows in figure w e Move the joystick left right up down Moves the visibleimage lt gt in the direction you choose until you let go of the joystick red arrows in figure Note that you may have to zoom in before j you can use this feature MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 90 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Devices for Controlling the PTZ Features You can execute the following actions to control the PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom features Actions Mouse Sidebar Panel Joystick Mouse wheel Turn right Mouse wheel Turn left Pan left ALT click in left half Tilt left of image Pan right ALT click in right half Move right Tilt right of image Tilt down ALT click in bottom Move up Tilt forward half of image Tilt up ALT click in top half Move down Tilt backward of image 7 Click on preset views Press the preset Remarks Unless inverted see Adjusting the Joystick Control Settings see Using the Preset Views Adjusting the Joystick Control Settings Depending on your needs you can invert the direc PTZ Controls tion of the joystick
477. the ZIP package to a different location using e mail or FTP for example To create an export of camera recordings including a full MxControlCenter environ ment ready for playing back recordings use the Export List functions as shown in Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com in 2 3 6 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 9 3 Using Different MxControlCenter Configurations The most simple method of using different MxControlCenter configurations is to save different configuration files using the File gt Save as menu command and to load them again using File gt Open Prerequisites e One MxControlCenter program folder that is accessible from the computer e Several MxControlCenter configuration files that have been created using the File gt Save as menu command or through exporting see The Export Configuration Dialog above e Make sure that the Always choose configuration file checkbox Tools gt Options gt General is activated Otherwise MxControlCenter loads the configuration file last used Manually Loading a Configuration File on Startup e Select one of the displayed config m G i a Desktop MxCC Configurations uration files or a file at a different location via y Date modifed Type 6 9 2011 1123 AM Configuration Sett 1 6 1 2011 4 21 PM
478. the bottom of the main window instead of at the top Layout buttons in toolbar Replaces the regular toolbar function buttons by names of the first layouts in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar see Section 4 4 2 Configuring the Toolbar for more information Show grid borders Shows the display windows in grid layouts with a thin white border You can use this option to provide a better overview when showing many cameras in small display windows Center grid layouts Centers the grid if it is smaller than the entire display area Show Player icon in recordings Activates the Player indicator see adjacent icon when playing back recordings Application On top after After the interval in this field has elapsed MxControlCenter auto matically restores the application window on top of all other application windows This is a convenient option to use when other applications are running alongside MxControlCenter and may be covering the MxControlCenter window Leave the field empty to deactivate this option Always on top Always shows the MxControlCenter window on top of all other applications This option can be used to ensure that MxControlCenter is not covered by other application windows Demo mode Activates the demo mode in which MxControlCenter automatically executes typical actions for all cameras in the current layout Synchronize clips on start When showing exported MxPEG clips in display windows of a lay
479. the broadband router s configuration page of the DynDNS client in the web browser Read the documentation of the router or search the router s online help to find more information on the DynDNS topic Enter the DynDNS name and the access data you have registered with your DynDNS provider as described in the documentation Furthermore you should activate the remote configuration of your router at least temporarily e Setting up port forwarding Open the broadband router s configuration page for port forwarding in the web browser Read the documentation of the router or search the router s online help to find more information on the port forwarding topic Assign every local IP address 192 168 178 201 192 168 178 202 you would like to access from outside of the local network to one port 192 168 178 201 gt 8001 192 168 178 202 gt 8002 Testing the DynDNS Configuration Once you have completed the previous steps you should run the following tests e Test DynDNS Open your web browser and enter the DynDNS name you registered example http mycamera dyndns org If everything has been configured properly and the remote configuration has been activated you should see the user interface of the router e Test the cameras Open your web browser and enter the DynDNS name and the port of the first camera example http mycamera dyndns org 8001 You should now see the user interface of the camera and the
480. the detective scenario presented in the live recording example of Section 3 2 10 Using the Live Recording Feature Using Live Recording the store detective has started the live recording at 3 30 pm To find out what the suspicious person did before the detective activated live recording the detective activates the Syne checkbox sets the search time in the Player sidebar panel to 3 30 pm clicks on the Go to Date Time button and then clicks on the Fast Backward button MxControlCenter now plays back the cameras in synchronized fash ion so the detective can check the individual cameras to find out which way the suspi cious person took through the entire building 3 5 5 Playback in Layouts with Alarm Player Windows An Alarm Player window shows the last recording of the camera you clicked on in the Alarm List You can use one or more of these display elements to quickly access the recordings of the last camera that triggered an alarm How Alarm Player Windows Work Alarm 4 camera 2 W 4 in a h p i gt S N Alam3 a f n camera 2 W n a ad ie bar p E a i N a l a5 ad al Alarm 2 le camera 1 J a a m NA N NW Alarm 1 mir Alarm Player window always shows alarm of last cam cameral W era clicked on in the Alarm List r a a i bs i pe Alarm List Display area with layout Click on a camera in the Alarm List dropdown to fill the Alarm Player window e MxControlCe
481. the menu and click on Automatic search to start the search Add Video Sources Name IP Address Path Type Version Status l Automatic search mx10 8 100 132 10 8 100 132 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour Pei mx 10 8 100 135 10 8 100 135 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour F mx10 8 104 199 10 8 104 199 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour K mx 10 8 104 200 10 8 104 200 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 201 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour fs mx 10 8 104 203 10 8 104 203 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour E Cs mx 10 8 104 204 10 8 104 204 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour bs mx 10 8 104 205 10 8 104 205 M24M Secure MX 4 0 4 19 Bonjour De mx 10 8 104 206 10 8 104 206 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 207 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 208 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 209 M24M Secure MX V 4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 210 M24 Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 211 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 212 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 213 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 215 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 216 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 217 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 104 218 M24M Secure MX V 4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 105 145 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 105 146 M24M Secure MX V4 0 4 19 Bonjour 10 8 105 147 M24M Secure MX V74 0 4 19 Bonjour a snap Server 10 8 105 148 a MX V4 0 4 19 Bon
482. the reference time to the time of the image that is currently displayed The Unlock Reference Time button deletes the reference time Showing Only Layout Cameras Having many cameras in the Cameras list can make finding the proper cameras a tedious task In order to narrow down the list of cameras to those in the current layout you can activate the Only show cameras from the current layout button Filtering Events If you want to search for special event types for example video motion detection only you can filter the Events list To do so click on the Set event filter button Activate the events you want to see in the filtered list Event Filter Select al events Select Events PI Passive Infrared Detector RB Recording Begin VM Video Motion Window RE Recording End J VM2 Video Motion Window RH Recording History Mi Microphone RT Recording Terminate SI Signal Input BT Buttons SI2 Second Signal Input IR JIR Remote Control SI3 Thid Signal Input RC IP Receive S14 Fourth Signal Input Ci COM In PE Periodic Event TP Temperature TT Time Task IL Iiumination UC User Cick EL Event Logic RD Random Event EL2 Event Logic 2 Lok Canoe Handling Pseudo Events in Continuous Recordings Pseudo event images are generated every minute by cameras that are recording con tinuously If you would like to remove the pseudo events from the list you can do
483. ting Video Content To export events from an Event Search e Search the start of an interesting scene using these methods Scroll through the list of events in the results panel and double click on the event to open it in the Player panel Set a date and time and click on the Go to Date Time button in the Player sidebar panel Move the red position indicator above the slider in the Player sidebar panel to the right and left until you find the event you are looking for e Highlight the scene you want to export Activate the Marker Mode button Click on the Play button to show the video Click again on the Play button if you reach the end of the scene you want to export Note that you can also highlight scenes by dragging the red position indicator of the slider e Click on the Add to Export button to add the highlighted green part of the event to the Export List e To add other sections from this and other events simply highlight a different scene in the Player panel and repeat the steps above Once you have added the desired parts to the Export List you can export the entire list as a video clip in different formats For more information on how to do this Section 3 6 3 Exporting Recorded Video Footage Storing Entire Events in the Local Archive Storing an event in the local archive is a good method of sav 4 Local ARCHIVE ing it permanently This also protects the event from getting d Live Reco
484. ting of Live Display Windows The red frame around a live display window in a layout is the most immediate signal that a camera has triggered an alarm Since the cameras add the red frame to the images of the transmitted video stream cameras in grid and background layouts show the same red frame as cameras in extra float ing windows MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 100 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Showing Alarm Images in the Alarm List The Alarm List collects the alarm images from alerting cameras Once a camera detects an alarm MxControlCenter adds the new alarm image to the top of the list and the green bar see figure turns red e The alarm image of any camera in the current layout that triggered an alarm is added to the top of the Alarm List e Alarm images of cameras not in the current layout are added to the top of the list only if they are sending alarm messages see Caution note below e The title bar of the alarm image indicates which camera has sent the image and how long ago that happened e The green status bar at the top of the Alarm List turns red This indicates that the list still contains an alarm image that has not been acknowledged you will learn how to do this in Section 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms lf the alarm list is hidden when an alarm occurs MxControlCenter will automatically show the list again
485. tivate SSL if necessary e Click on OK to close the dialog This adds the video server channel to the Add Video Sources list e Select the video server channel in the Add Video Sources list and add it to the sys tem as described in Section 2 4 2 Using the Video Sources in MxControlCenter Step 4 Set the Storage Location of the Analog PTZ Camera in MxControlCenter Since this step works exactly as for setting the storage location of an IP PTZ dome please proceed as described in Sfep 3 Set the Storage Location of the IP PTZ Dome in MxControlCenter of Section 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras 2 7 3 9 6 5 5 MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras MOBOTIX MxServer allows integrating IP and analog surveillance cameras from third party manufacturers into a MOBOTIX system Its main application is to digitize the images from expensive analog PTZ dome cameras and to execute the PTZ commands of an MxControlCenter workstation MxServer consists of a Windows computer with a frame grabber card IDS Falcon QuattroPro and the MOBOTIX MxServer software 5 5 1 Introduction to MxServer In summary MxServer carries out the following tasks e Converts the images of a third party analog camera to a digital video stream in M JPEG format which can be used as a live v
486. tix com 41 396 Installing MOBOTIX Cameras With MOBOTIX both software and hardware are equally easy to install Unpack the camera screw it to the ceiling wall or pole Connect the network cable and you are done Probably no other camera can be connected more quickly or easily Integration of MOBOTIX Video Door Stations MxCC also integrates the new MOBOTIX T24 IP video door station you can open the door switch on the lights and speak over the intercom with a live image very comfortably from any MxCC workstation T24 MxCC Door Station Door Station Integration Functions Door Light Speak Free of Charge a Convenient Update Wizard A large share of the functions of the entire video security system is based on the software that is installed on every MOBOTIX camera without additional costs and directly from the factory You can get a free update conveniently via MxCC and synchronously for all the cameras in the network Without changing to new hardware you can use the newest camera functions developed by MOBOTIX You can also obtain all MxCC updates free of charge at the push of a button Example In a single step via the MxCC control center the latest software is installed on all 270 MOBOTIX hemispheric cameras in the shops of a retail chain Now this software also contains video analysis tools for customer behavior feature soon available MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mob
487. to one store without having to Internationa i Fia RAaasar iret open the Navigator sidebar panel See Using Layout Buttons in Layouts in Section 4 3 2 Configuring Layout Selection MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 716 39 6 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter e Layout buttons in the toolbar On some installations these buttons located either above or below the display area provide a quick method for switching between a limited number of layouts MxControlCenter Overview Outside File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Help HA Overview Outside HH Main Entrance EH West gate HE Parking See Using Layout Buttons in the Toolbar in Section 4 3 2 Configuring Layout Selection When using the toolbar to show layout buttons the toolbar does not show any other toolbar buttons 3 2 3 Using Extra Windows to Display Video Sources Up to this point we have only examined video sources in layouts However certain situa tions may require having an additional window of a video source This is useful in instances where for example the active windowis in Player mode yet you want to see the camera simultaneously in real time MxControlCenter opens such an extra floating window if you do one of the following e Double click on any display window or icon of a video source in a layout e Double click on any video source in the N
488. to trigger an event Besides Low threshold this is the second parameter for fine tuning the triggering By default this value is 20 for regular video motion windows and 0 for reference windows see below e Reference Activate this checkbox to use this window as a reference window These windows are used to avoid false alarms for events that would be triggered by video motion windows e g if lighting conditions change rapidly sun and cloudy sky headlights from cars etc As soon as a reference window triggers all other video motion windows of the same VM set are deactivated Reference windows have the following colors Video Motion 1 Yellow outline and background Video Motion 2 Green outline and background Make sure that you are creating reference windows outside of the other video motion windows and at a position in the image where no movements are to be expected e g on a blank wall above a window that does not get any direct sunlight MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Camera Configuration Dialog 3 2 9 3 9 6 6 3 7 The Network Messages Tab This tab allows sending alarm messages i e special IP network messages from the selected cameras to a list of MxControlCenter computers the alarm targets In addition you can select the event triggers that will prompt the cameras to send network messages This tab contains the f
489. trolCenter which gets the alarm image Unacknowledged IP Notify alarm Unacknowledged IP Notify alarm from selected camera MxControlCenter has lost the connection to this camera Unacknowledged connection alarm Unacknowledged connection alarm from selected camera User has manually added an image to the alarm list 11 39 18 10 3 205 238 U Had Manually added user image Manually added user image from selected camera For more information on how to acknowledge alarms see Section 3 4 3 Reacting to Alarms Using One or More Live Alarm Windows in a Layout Live Alarm windows automatically show the live e ert images of the camera or video source for which i J an alarm was triggered most recently If there are E several live alarm windows in a layout the first Y m 3 alarm window always shows the live stream of the A i camera with the most recent alarm and the last alarm window shows the live stream of the camera with the n alarm Upon a new alarm the live streams of all other cameras are pushed back by one window If you have five alarm windows in one layout for example you will always see the live streams of the last five cameras that have triggered an alarm Alarm windows in back ground layouts have a gray title bar MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 102 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter Using an
490. trolCenter see below Expert Setup This section con tains different tabs for setting the most important parameters of a Snap Server General Users Shares UPS and Time In con trast to Quick Setup you can use this section for adjusting the Snap Server more precisely to the cur rent application scenario If you need to customize the setup even further you should use the Snap _ Quick Setup Qk Seto creates defa users and shares on the Snap Server You must prode passwords for these users In additen you can change the password of the Snap Server s ecu uset BB configure Snap Server 22E eat Lat lt 4 y on Quick Seto Eoet Seno Browser R Free capacity Server s web interface see Browser below Browser If you want to control the entire setup in detail you can click on this button to open the Snap Server s web interface Then change the settings to your requirements see the Snap Server documentation on how to do this 3 Save the changes by clicking on OK To use the Snap Server as storage location for the MOBOTIX cameras proceed as described in Section 4 5 4 Configuring Where to Record To configure MxControlCenter for direct access to the recordings i e to free the cameras from the task of handling the record ings see Changing MxControlCenter s Access to the Recordings of Individual Cameras in the same section MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems
491. ts To help you in creating the layouts for MxControlCenter it is recom mended to proceed as outlined in Section 4 3 1 Planning a Layout Structure and the following sections Create event searches Create and structure event searches to user requirements e g by location all gate cameras all door cameras all elevator cameras etc See MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Configuring MxControlCenter 3 5 7 3 Q 6 Creating New Event Searches in Section 3 5 8 Using Event Searches for more information A 8 4 Configuring the Alarm Handling Setting Up Alarm Handling Proceed as outlined in Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions but use the following settings e Activate the alarm list e Setup a permanently stored alarm list file e Deactivate the Add live stream events checkbox e Configure the reception of alarm messages e Activate the alarm sound and set the corresponding options e Set the instruction file if required available e Set an audio path if applicable see Section 6 2 3 The Display Tab Configuring Alarm Messages Using Network Messages Proceed as outlined in Section 4 5 1 Configuring Alarms on the Cameras and set up the alarm messages to the IP addresses of the MxControlCenter workstations A 8 5 Setting Additional Operating System Options Setting the Time Zone and the Time Server In order t
492. u 16 11 2006 End 14 41 00 Thu 16 11 2006 Search Time 14 27 00 14 27 12 14 27 59 11 16 2008 1 59 40 PM Seach KIKIKI D 4 Ala Reference Time TAREE erence 000000 e 6 The Video Search dialog box can be used to browse through the recordings from all cameras defined in the current layout In the Cameras tab select the camera whose recordings you want to examine MxControlCenter now shows all recorded events in chronological order in the Events tab The vertical slider bar next to the event list provides a visual indication of the time range during the entire recording period By selecting an event in the list the image associated with that event is displayed in the area of the player window at the right If you have identified an event as relevant eterence Time j Bo Diference 00 00 00 the time of the event can be defined as the Reference time MxControlCenter now s 8 shows the time difference between the reference time and the image that is currently displayed in the player window MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 130 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter ba S EJIE The reference time works similar to the global playback time in the Player sidebar panel Playing Back Events in Section 3 5 2 Search Playback in a Live Display Window The Reference time follows image time button automatically sets
493. uder in the area it records video motion detection in the sales room of a retail branch location at night the camera immediately triggers an acoustical alarm automatically via signal outputs and a network connection contacts the security service via e mail with an alarm image attachment and sends an alarm SMS via a provider to the mobile telephone of the security guard in charge The building plan of the sales room of the branch in question opens automatically in the central security control center of the headquarters in which the live image from the camera reporting the alarm is in turn displayed The security staff at the MxCC control center immediately have a view of the cameras in the immediate surroundings and can directly access their live images and recordings In addition the trendsetting VoIP SIP technology of the MOBOTIX cameras makes it possible to listen to the intruder live from anywhere via camera and MxCC or a smart phone Of course announcements can also be made MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com l JAN i P Acoustic Alarm 3 Email with Alarm Image Attachment Alarm SMS via a Provider Building Plan of the Branch Offices in Question including Camera Preview Images VoIP SIP Technology MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 1 individu a alarm he came
494. ull images e g Mega instead of QXGA Possible Cause Full Image Recording acti vated but Mega still set as image resolution Solution Select image resolution for full image recording in Setup Menu gt Recording click on parameters link below Activate Full Image Recording B 1 4 MxControlCenter Issues Issue Live video stream in MxCC is slow or has high latency Possible Cause Virus scanner checks video stream Solution Add camera ports typically 80 and 443 on MxCC workstation to virus scanner exceptions Workstation is downscaling many cameras with large image resolutions Reduce number of cameras in one layout or select smaller image resolutions Insufficient user rights MxCC uses guest rights to access camera Create dedicated mxcc user on camera with proper rights Display window shows No image available check pass word Wrong global or specific user password used Use proper user password in global settings or camera properties MxCC uses too much RAM when showing a layout with many cameras Local Recorder uses too much RAM per camera Reduce Local Recorder size to 1 MB Tools gt Options gt General Layouts do not fill the monitor MxCC does not scale freely Activate free scaling in MxCC MxCC workstation does not play alarm sounds although sound system is working Sound on alarm not activated in MxCC
495. up Configuration File for One or More Cameras in Section 5 1 7 Saving and Uploading Settings of One or More Cameras e Select the cameras you would to configure and upload the configuration to the selected cameras see Restoring Camera Configuration Settings from a Backup File in Section 5 1 7 Saving and Uploading Settings of One or More Cameras e Select the configuration sections you would like to apply to the target cameras MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Update Assistant Software Updates and More 251 396 Using the Upload Camera Settings Dialog The Upload Camera Settings dialog see Restoring Camera Configuration Settings from a Backup File controls which parts of the configuration will be overwritten in the target cameras Note that the Back up Configuration Files option creates a backup file of the cameras with an automatic file name This allows restoring the current configuration of the selected cameras if required Make sure that the IP address and host name option is deactivated This would apply the IP address and host name of the configuration file to the target cameras and render them unreachable after rebooting 5 1 10 Using Update Assistant as a Stand Alone Application The only difference between using Update Assistant from MxControlCenter and as a stand alone application is that the stand alone application
496. uration e Store the configuration Admin Menu gt Configuration gt Store e Reboot the camera Admin Menu gt General Tasks gt Reboot MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 5 O 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline Check the camera time and the time server status Admin Menu gt General Administration gt Time and Date Test the e mail profiles DNS servers etc in Admin Menu gt Network Setup gt Test Current Network Configuration Check the system messages for errors Admin Menu gt System Information gt System Messages Are the camera LEDs showing the intended behavior If you find errors in the configuration correct the settings and repeat the test If everything is working as planned proceed by distributing the configuration to all other cameras see below A 5 6 Distributing the Master Configuration You are now ready to copy the master configuration to other cameras The ideal tool for this purpose is the Update Assistant see Section 5 1 Update Assistant Software Updates and More To start it as a stand alone application click on the link or open the MxControlCenter program folder and double click onthe Update Assistant exe file 1 ao Se SS S amp S lf the camera list is empty click on the Search Cameras button You should see the master camera compare to the address in the browser window
497. urces dialog Click on Cancel to close this dialog and close MxControlCenter without saving the configuration You will later find and configure the cameras A 3 Configuring the Storage Systems If the surveillance system is using one or more external file servers or NAS systems you should configure them now Since the cameras are using these settings you can test them when setting the corresponding options on the cameras Due to the many different scenarios that are largely customer dependent listing all pos sible configuration options would be beyond the scope of this manual The following sections are listing some important configuration tasks you should accomplish before configuring the cameras Overland Storage Snap Servers can be configured using MxControlCenter See Section 5 2 1 Adding Overland Storage Snap Servers for more information A 3 1 Configuring the Server Settings of the Storage System Settings Remark Server name According to name in the List of components and locations RAID According to requirements redundancy performance storage capacity One share per file server NAS always use the same name on different file servers NAS e g mxdata Create camera user that can access share for writing e g mx cam and MxControlCenter user with read access e g mxcc Shares Users According to requirements redundancy performance assign IP address from File servers NAS pool set gate
498. urity Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 76 396 MXxcc User Manual MOBOTIX Glossary Preferred Layout Layout of a camera that is automatically displayed by MxControlCenter if that camera sends an alarm PTZ Abbreviation of Pan Tilt Zoom Refers to the movement of a video camera to the left and right up and down and to the camera s ability to enlarge an image Quad Display Layout in which the images from four cameras are displayed in one window Resolution Indicates the number of pixels used to produce an image The more pixels an image has the greater the detail when the image is enlarged The resolution is expressed as either the number of pixel columns times pixel rows or as a total number of pixels A VGA image has 640 columns and 480 rows 640 x 480 pixels which equals 307 200 pixels or approximately 0 3 megapixels Ring Buffer Type of storage where the newest items overwrite the oldest ones if the assigned disk space is full Commonly used by MOBOTIX cameras to store audio video recordings RoHS Abbreviation of Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive Refers to EC Directive 2002 95 EC which prohibits the use of certain hazardous substances when manufacturing products and components The goal of this directive is to prevent these substances from harming the environment when the products are recycled after their useful life Router Network device that connects multiple netw
499. use the MOBOTIX cameras and not the video management software perform the computational work e g movement detection recording storage etc MxCC needs only one standard PC with a monitor as the hardware platform The modern system configuration based on the Internet Protocol IP can set up and manage security projects of any size extremely economically using standardized network components and connection paths that are usually already available MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com ilt zoom stems from entium 4 or better s XP SP3 or higher 20 396 All Functions at a Glance Navigator Layouts A layout includes several cameras in video windows of any size or as clickable icons Video sources All cameras integrated A MxControlCenter Li MOnt en in the security system File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Help ry Event search Individual search queries aie eh roa 3 aie er eS for specific cameras events and time rie E amp smor 3 Gelandeplan periods e g all motion sensor alarms me ai z A tend of the previous night at the parking lot hae E Homburg Local Archive Stores photos of all regis Be Pore tered shoplifters or persons banned from the store for example Video Player 2 I 16 09 10 114536 Playback of recorded videos or single TE ETR E images also simultaneously shows the videos of a
500. used by MxControlCenter when accessing a camera Note that you can set individual user names in the Properties of dialog of a video source e Password Default password used by MxControlCenter when accessing a camera Note that you can set individual passwords in the Properties of dialog of a video source e Proxy server IP Activate this option and set a proxy IP address and port if this is required to access the video sources in your network e MxStatus Server Enter an IP address or computer name and the port of an MxStatus computer in this field see Section 4 1 6 MxStatus Status Monitoring for Multiple MxControlCenter Computers for more information on MxStatus Leave the field empty to deactivate this option MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 295 396 Access Recordings 2 e File server path MxControlCenter can access stored video sequences either via the camera default setting or directly from the file server on which the camera has stored the data MxControlCenter uses this path to access the recordings of all MOBOTIX cameras if the corresponding Access Data tab of the Properties of dialog has been set to use the Default file server path Besides folders on local or mapped network drives you can also use a UNC path e g 10 1 1 111 mxdata or mxstoragel mxdata e User name User name for accessing the default file server pa
501. uses its own search mecha nisms to find cameras and uses camera lists to store information on these cameras In other words Update Assistant does not rely on MxControlCenter to maintain such a list Using the Update Assistant as a stand alone application only makes sense if you want to use its features independentof MxControlCenter installations This would be the case when updating the software of a large installation that comprises several MxControlCenter workstations that are each using different cameras for example Starting Update Assistant By default the MxControlCenter setup wizard creates a link in the Windows Programs folder this is usually Start gt Programs gt MOBOTIX gt MxCC Click on the Update Assistant icon to start the application If you started MxControlCenter from a desktop icon and the Update Assistant icon is not there search for the Update Assistant exe file and create a link on the desktop Working with Camera Lists Camera lists can be used in a variety of ways to help maintain update and configure a larger number of cameras consistently and simultaneously In addition you can manually create your own lists and administer them as needed The camera list file CameraList mxu by default contains the camera addresses and additional information This file is first created when using the File gt Save Camera List MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales
502. ut name in the sidebar H Back Entrance as oP You can also define a time interval at which MxControlCenter 4 VIDEO SOURCES automatically returns to the defined start layout This ensures that MxControlCenter auto matically returns to the scene you want to monitor even if a different layout had been selected in the meantime see Notes box below e Select Use as start layout from the context menu MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 174 396 MxCC User Manual System Configuration If you want to use a start layout make sure that Load start has been set to Start layout Tools gt Options menu General tab On Startup group box To automatically return to the start layout enter the number of seconds to wait before returning to the start layout in the Return to Start Layout after box To deac tivate this feature delete the contents of this box Setting the Interpolation Method for Free Scaling When displaying grid layouts you can use the View gt Free Scaling menu command to expand the display windows to the entire display area In conjunction with the free scal ing of the entire MxControlCenter application window you can adjust the display of the layout to best fit your monitor Free scaling of a grid layout to any size of the display area also means that the individual display windows within the layout will be scaled freely as opposed to the
503. utton any other lines in this list Alarm Targets J Enable Acknowledge On x IP Address Port J 172 16 0 23 31754 e Set the event trigger In the Event Trigger group box set the Event switch dropdown to On Activate the All Events checkbox The Event Trigger group box should now look like this Event Trigger Event switch On X fe All Events a V Video Motion VM vV Video Motion 2 VM2 As of now MxControlCenter can only configure some of the event triggers that O are listed on this tab of the Camera Configuration dialog Until this dialog can configure all event triggers of the camera the gray entries need to be config ured manually in the camera s browser interface click on the Open camera in browser button and then on Setup Menu gt Event Settings in the browser e Click on Apply and wait until the camera configuration has been saved MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 00 3 96 MxCC User Manual System Configuration 4 5 2 Configuring What to Record G e Open the Camera Configuration dialog 4 e Click on the Recording tab Recording This tab of the Camera Configuration dialog allows selecting several cameras Use CTRL SHIFT click Any changes to this tab are applied to all selected cameras e Apply the settings as shown in the arming switch figure to the right d Arming On z e f you would l
504. vate the Layout Manager do one of the following e Click on the Layout Manager button in the toolbar e Select Layout gt New in the menu to create a new empty layout e Select Layout gt Edit in the menu to edit the current layout e Right click in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select New layout to create a new empty layout that is inserted on the same level as the current layout New sub layout to create a new empty layout that is inserted as a sub layout to the current layout e Right click on a layout in the LAYOUTS section of the Navigator sidebar panel and select Edit to modify this layout MxControlCenter changes as follows to indicate that the application is in Layout Manager mode e The title bar reads MxControlCenter Layout Manager e The background color of the sidebar s panel headings changes from gray to light yellow e The sidebar only shows the Navigator on top and an additional panel below depending on the selected layout this is either the Grids or the Backgrounds panel MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Creating and Editing Layouts 15 9 396 When activated the Layout Manager shows the following panels in the sidebar e Navigator Navigator a s In the LAYOUTS section of this sidebar panel you 4 i Ovarian Outside B Main Entrance can create rename and move layouts t
505. vement of people is followed with a track color Activate the storage of the data generated once you have correctly set up MxAnalytics and tested the settings Setting Up Storage Movement data must be stored permanently in order to subsequently create and evalu ate MxAnalytics statistics and use the export function To do this it is necessary to config ure and format a MicroSD card accordingly Configure storage in the MxFFS Volume Partitioning dialog To open it click on the Set up MxAnalytics storage button in the Basic Configuration sub tab The dialog contains the following areas e Format Mode Select Quick Format if you know for certain that your camera is not being accessed Secure deletion mode requires significantly more time MxFFS Volume Partitioning Format Mode Quick format Secure deletion mode slow Backup existing recordings e Activate the Backup existing recordings checkbox to secure recorded data Otherwise you will permanently lose the data MxAnalytics onl D hoa IE e Device Usage Select whether MxAnalytics recordings only no MocAnalytics Volume Size TW oa other recordings are stored or all other recordings are to be stored sce re bahar 1 Ene von Bays 26 1e5e94409c1916 e MxAnalytics Volume Size Approximately 1 GB per month is required to permanently store results data Ga Geel q e Enable Data Encryption You can encrypt the recordings to ensure the SD cards can be read only by entering th
506. veral cameras decentralized concept has made high resolution video systems cost efficient MxCC MxEasy MOBOTIX AG D 67722 Langmeil e Phone 49 6302 9816 103 Fax 49 6302 9816 190 sales mobotix com Licence free Video Management Software www mobotix com e oe Jao o je es SB a o o o e ea o w o o o o o o kai a o o a o o o oe e Bs o a o ea w es o o o o o o o o o o o o o oe a e E e a o o o File View Layout VideoSource Recording Tools Help GA Be HA aa SRA AAIE t Browser vser en a A T d LAYOUTS a j CHINA a SINGAPORE H Warehouse South Docks a EROE 4 GERMANY bea Cresden fei Frankfurt faa Hamburg a Kaiserslautern EJ Store Konigstrasse 5 Store Reichssrasse 10 Bal Synch sor r 16 09 10 14S 6 Floor Plan Pee eee eee eee eee ent y Peete eee e amp Ee tee 8 Reena ie actpe ef ee we ol Hemispheric Installation C Wall mounted W Ceiling mounted Set North Pee eee ee ee 8 ee HHE M 1 34 Eten Rae eee E ttt itenh e ae amp kx Xi kat Rll o a Fij ttt amp 8h N O O Bi a LAC Event MxControlCenter Contents 1 Introduction 15 MOBOTIX Video System Solution 15 The Decentralized MOBOTIX Concept 16 For a Wide Variety of Applications 18 Al
507. verview of the Update Assistant s main window above the toolbar provides quick access to the most important functions Manually add cameras by IP address IP aP Add Cameras address range or URL Allows changing the connection settings e g L Connection Settings user name and passwords of the selected cameras Finds all available cameras available in the af Search Cameras physical network see also Section 2 4 1 Finding and Configuring Video Sources Manually reboots the selected cameras for uw Reboot testing purposes Manually uploads software packages down en Upload Software oaded bears a Save Settings Saves the camera configurations from one or more selected cameras Uploads one or more camera configuration amp Upload Settings files to one or more cameras either in parts or as a whole Opens the camera s browser based user interface 1 Available only when camera is selected Drop down button 5 1 3 Getting Started with Update Assistant IN SY Open browser Update Assistant automatically copies the list of cameras from MxControlCenter retrieves the list of software packages available for downloading and tries to connect to the cameras In addition the Update Assistant also shows a preview image of all connected cameras The Camera List Panel This panel shows alist of available cameras _ Name Address Version Alt preview images and additi
508. vice if more than one Pelco D device is attached via the same serial cable In Camera The PTZ actions are executed using either a physical joystick or the elements of the PTZ Controls panel in MxControlCenter If A the Mechanical zoom checkbox is activated the PTZ controls Y N in MxControlCenter have an additional Focus slider opposite C gt C the Zoom slider see figure to the right This slider is used to adjust the focus ofthe mechanical zoom after zoominginorout V Lej ocus Pan Tit Zoom 5 4 2 Integrating Third Party IP PTZ Dome Cameras This scenario describes how to integrate an IP PTZ Dome camera into MxControlCenter for live viewing MxServer on the other hand manages the continuous recording of the video data in a MOBOTIX compatible file server structure This scenario is based on using the M JPEG format for live streaming and recording and does not support audio Integrating IP PTZ Dome cameras for live streaming in MxControlCenter requires the following steps 1 Add the IP PTZ dome camera as additional video source in MxControlCenter 2 Connect the IP PTZ dome camera to MxServer for continuous recording 3 Set the storage location of the IP PTZ dome in MxControlCenter MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Using Pan Tilt Heads Third Party Cameras and Joysticks 265 396 Step 1 Add the IP PTZ Dome Camera to MxControlCenter
509. view 158 Suitable evaluations 217 Users 218 Customizing Report profiles used for analysis 217 D Data integrity Checking in recordings 132 Dead man s switch Configuring 233 Dead Man s Switch 39 Using 149 Decentralized MOBOTIX concept 16 Defining Background layouts 170 Grid layouts 167 Layouts 65 Video sources 65 Detecting Video Motion 36 DevKit glossary 371 DHCP glossary 371 Dialogs Camera Configuration 311 Options 290 Properties of video source 307 Different configurations Using 236 DirectShow Codec MxPEG Installing 154 Display Properties tab 308 Display commands 94 Display functions Configuring 190 Displaying Video content in layouts 71 Display modes Cameras with L22 lens 85 Example 94 Hemispheric cameras with L11 lens 85 Introduction 83 MxControlCenter application window 94 Regular cameras 84 Display Panel 21 Display windows Layout elements 73 Distortion Correcting 36 DNS glossary 371 Dome camera glossary 371 Donbass Arena Ukraine 44 DSL glossary 371 DualDome glossary 371 DVR glossary 371 DynDNS Connecting remote cameras 255 DynDNS glossary 372 Editing Group rights 219 Groups 218 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Index 383 396 Layouts overview 158 List of video sources 59 Options when editing layouts 173 Snap Server settings 254 Users 218 Element
510. w know the exact system time Then you simply press a button to have all cameras in the immediate area display the event recordings from this point in time on the monitor MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com Fast Availability of Video Evidence 34 396 High Speed Search at the Push of a Button Customer Specific Using the integrated storage function of the MOBOTIX cameras reduces the permanent network load which in turn speeds up the event search And it is guaranteed that a search for specific cameras in a specified time period which is predefined and stored by the user in MxCC will deliver the results even faster In this case MxCC offers the great advantage while it does not require repetitive entry of search criteria for each individual search Variable search criteria can be easily stored with MxCC and brought up at the push of a button For example the recorded event videos of the last hour and only from the cameras at the entrances and exits are immediately displayed to a security service manager at the push of a button This predefined search function one hour ago all cameras x to y lets him know after each inspection round who drove onto and left the company premises based on the recorded license plates Help OS v ar HB oM 20 G 8 S8sloaseolc s o s o dey oo T SertBy CaneTme gt Reload Manualy ee Search Criteria
511. w server e Frame rate Sets the frame rate of the preview video data delivered by the MxRemotePreview server MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 2 Q 6 3 9 6 MxCC User Manual Reference e Resolution Sets the resolution size of the preview video data delivered by the MxRemotePreview server Note that the Custom entry allows setting custom width height values in pixels for the preview video data e Audio Activate this option if you need the audio channel in the preview video data Note that deactivating this option saves 64 kbit s of network bandwidth 6 1 3 The View Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options ES General Connection Defaults View Alam Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log Mouse On double click Open extra window bd a Alt Click for PTZ 7 Mouse Over Off On By MultiView V Small area Layouts Show toolbar at bottom Layout buttons in toolbar lt Show grid borders Center grid layouts Show Player icon in recordings V Application On top after seconds Always on top Demo mode Synchronize clips on start No configuration loaded Mouse D e On double click Controls the behavior of MxControlCenter when double clicking a video source in a layout Do nothing Deactivates the double click feature default setting Switch lens dual cameras only Switches from t
512. w the MxCC instance on a different monitor in full screen mode you can maximize the MxCC programm window on that monitor using the Maximize function in the title bar and then adjust it by selecting Display area only e Ifthe Alarm List has been activated it will automatically appear if MxControlCenter receives an alarm message e If you do not see the menu any more after executing one of the commands listed above press the ESC key to return to the default display mode MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com ole e v Defined by layout Full screen Maximize Original size All windows full screen 96 396 MxCC User Manual Using MxControlCenter 3 3 2 Using Saved Views A view basically contains the current settings of the Save View As 2 faba commands accessible from MxControlCenter s View Name Gate Guard v menu When saving a view you can select what SE Se TIS SOE Ree to include by activating deactivating the following pice eerste belay anata options Include 7 Display Area Options Sequencer states scaling and grid e Display Area Options Sequencer scaling and options Title bar tool bar menu bar status bar e Application Window Areas Show options sakes later menu title bar etc sidebar and toolbar options Example for Using Views In this example two views are used on one MxControlCenter installation a si
513. ware Versions Every entry in the Software Packages panel represents one downloadable software PR version When you click on a download the Info Save and Install buttons display D24M T24M 024M M24M 5 13 2011 Dino H sae E erista pa e Move the mouse over an entry to get more detailed information on the software download M MAAN MX System Version 4 0 4 19 For D24M T24M Q24M M24M Date 5 13 2011 File MX_system_4_0419 mpl Languages German Russian Japanese English Italian French Spanish Chinese Software release in all available languages for all MOBOTIX cameras Q24M D24M M24M and T24M Together with this software release the new hardware platform of these models reaches about twice the frame rates as in the predecessor models Q22M D22M and M22M This software release contains the same functions as its predecessor 4 0 4 18 Among other improvements you can implement flexible alarm reactions for one event by executing virtually any number of action profiles FTP e mail sound phone call and network messages This release also brings enhanced functionality in the VoIP SIP telephony area DHCP server functionality for self USB8 to FTDI adapter In addition this release also contains the adjustments and enhancements to the MxPEG video stream that are required for the new features of the upcoming software releases MxControlCenter V2 5 and MxEasy V1 4 e To see the release notes of this software click on
514. way and DNS Network interface s server Activate Gigabit and connect to backbone using Gigabit network interface Activate trunking when using several net work interfaces Set time server and time zone according to Customer Time server Infrastructure Configure the notification events and set up required e mail or Error notification phone accounts Trash feature If available make sure that any trash feature is disabled MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 40 3 96 MxCC User Manual Video Surveillance Implementation Guideline Settings Remark UPS Configure what to do in case of power failure Create users and groups as specified in Customer A 3 2 Configuring the Network Settings of the Storage System Access the administrative tools of the file server or the web interface of the NAS system and set the following parameters e P address and subnet mask e Default gateway e Domain name servers DNS e WINS servers e Domain name These are special options which should only be configured if absolutely necessary A 3 3 Finishing the Configuration of the Storage System Reboot the storage system and access it again If everything has been configured properly you should get a dialog for entering the user name and password Once you have logged in again you should check the system logs for errors and test the e mail notificat
515. web browser and connects to port 80 of this computer i e MxServer opens the http loc alhost 80 address Seustty Vision Systems MOBOTIX MaxServer 1 3 1 1 Configuration MOBOTIX Channels Configuration form 3 System Settings Existing channels hay orarriaieaen Configuration IP address 00 0 0 80 Log file path MxServerLog log IP Log file max size Mb 5 ea Ari iF Admins Remove l be IP admin New Sony IP Add a new administrator Logins New Panasonic IP New login New password gt System lt Retype new password ee ee Send Reset e Set a new password Enter admin as the new login name this will overwrite the existing password for the admin user Enter the password in the New password field MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com MxServer Integrating Third Party Cameras 275 396 Enter the password again in the Retype new password field Click on Send to update the MxServer configuration e The default Configuration IP address 0 0 0 0 listens to all IP addresses of all network interface cards NICs of this computer Only change this setting if you have several NICs installed on this computer and you want MxServer to listen only on a specific NIC MxServer is now running and ready for connecting third party analog and IP cameras 5 5 3 Connecting an Analog PTZ Camera to MxServer To connect
516. work messages are not affected e Disconnect streams during Video Search Allows disconnecting the live video streams from the cameras when executing a search in the Video Search dialog This is help ful when using a low bandwidth connection since this leaves more bandwidth to the search and playback features Once the Video Search dialog has been closed MxControlCenter resumes showing the live video streams Local Archive O e User folder Shows the default storage location of the local archive LOCAL ARCHIVE section in the Navigator sidebar panel e Custom folder Use this option to store the local archive in a different location MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 294 396 MxCC User Manual Reference 6 1 2 The Connection Defaults Tab This tab contains the following group boxes Options xa General Connection Defaults View Connections to Cameras Alam Handling Remote Control Monitoring Action Log Username Elta D Password eeeeese Proxy server IP Port MxStatus Server Port 8080 Access Recordings File server path 2 User name _ Password Default Preview Settings Preview mode Camera Preview Remote Preview JPEG quality 40 X Frame rate 1 0 4 F s Resolution CIF 320x240 gt Audio No configuration loaded Connections to Cameras e User name Default user name
517. xample MxCC and activate the MxControlCenter privilege in Admin Menu gt Group Access Control Lists Create a new user for example mxcce for the MxCC group in Admin Menu gt Users and Passwords This user and the appropriate password will now be required to access the cameras from MxControlCenter see Settings in MxControlCenter below Click on Set to apply the current settings Click on Close and permanently store the entire configuration When using many cameras executing the tasks above for each camera can be very time consuming In this case configure one camera in the browser as described above Then use the Update Assistant to store the configuration of that camera and upload its configuration to all other cameras While doing so you can instruct the Update Assistant to only update the Security section of the camera configura tion see Section 5 1 7 Saving and Uploading Settings of One or More Cameras Settings in MxControlCenter Restrict access to ports of the MxControlCenter computer after testing By default the ports for alarm handling and for remotely controlling MxControlCenter can be used by any computer on the network By entering the IP addresses of cameras or other MxControlCenter computers that are allowed to access these ports you can restrict access to specific computers only On the Alarm Handling tab enter the IP addresses of devices that are allowed to send alarm messages in the Al
518. y fail MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 243 396 244 3 96 MxCC User Manual Enhanced Features 5 1 5 Updating the Software of MOBOTIX Cameras When updating the software of MOBOTIX cameras you need to make sure that the proper software versions are applied to the cameras As a general rule the first digit of the software versions need to match Examples e Cameras with software version MX V3 4 5 18 can beupdatedto3 5 2 23 r3 e Cameras with software version MX V4 0 2 33 r2 canbeupdatedto4 0 4 19 Make sure that you are installing the proper MX System version 3 5 2 23 83 language version for cameras with soft ee ae ee eee A Fie MX_system_de_3_5223r3 mpi ware versions 3 X and lower see red frame Software version in all available languages for al MOBOTIX M12 D12 2 s V12 M22M D22M and Q22M cameras Besides the many proven IN figure Camera softwa re versions 4 x features of the nirien versions this e ers number of improvements and enhancements n exposure control im age settings and higher contain all available languages See re Hemme Rance ED Seman ond a oem Aces Do not close MxControlCenter or Update Assistant during the software update process You should also avoid any power failures or disruptions of the network connection to the cameras Downloading and Updating the Software in One Step
519. y shows the alarm list when detecting a new alarm This feature is useful if alarms do not occur very offen In such a case you can use the entire display area of MxControlCenter to display the live camera images MOBOTIX AG e Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com The Options Dialog 299 396 When MxControlCenter detects an alarm it automatically shows the alarm list with the new alarm highlighted in red e Auto acknowledge alarms after Prompts MxControlCenter to automatically acknowl edge new alarms after the specified time has elapsed Alarm Messages 2 The options on this tab allow defining the reactions to incoming alarm messages see Section 3 4 How the Alarm Features Work and Section 4 5 3 Configuring MxControlCenter Reactions e Activate alarm message server listening for TCP IP message Activates the server part of MxControlCenter that listens to incoming alarm messages from MOBOTIX cameras e Port Enter the port for receiving alarm messages If this field is empty the alarm messages feature will not work e Allowed IP addresses Enter IP addresses that are permitted to send alarm messages to MxControlCenter You can enter either single IP addresses or computer names or use wildcards e g 172 16 When entering several addresses separate the different addresses by commas as in the example beneath the field Leave the default value in this f
520. yed in a list but rather as a video from a video recorder You can therefore fast forward or rewind through the alarms and the recorded image sequences of each alarm Automatically shows the live images of the camera or video source for which an alarm was triggered most recently If there are sev eral live alarm windows in a layout the first Live Alarm D alarm window always shows the live stream D Alarm Player window window of the camera with the most recent alarm and the last alarm window shows the live stream of the camera with the nt alarm Upon a new alarm the live streams of all other cameras are pushed back by one window Sequencer window icons particularly in background layouts window monitors for example a focus window can reside on the second monitor to provide a more detailed view of the selected live camera Close Windows Closes all open extra floating windows button Configure ES Opens a dialog which allows activating the B Sequencer button cameras of this layout that are supposed to be controlled by the camera sequencer button Layout Switches to a different layout of this button MxControlCenter installation Command B Executes an http command e g to remote button control a video wall DW Display window IC Icon BT Button BG Background layout X Multiple elements per layout 1 One element per layout O Not available X e rm EJ W Ww
521. yout Individual Grid Layouts In addition to the background layouts with map and building plans the image windows live video film or only preview image of several dozen cameras can be displayed simultaneously in a grid defined by the user with varying window sizes fom fxControlCente Ee lc View Layout VideoSource Recording Took B ww B nBoa me Hamana a Aa kE M e 125 kbi r 2408 14 41 25 Wed 15 09 10 Grid layouts can display not only current live images of selected cameras but also preview images of the most recent alarms triggered for example by movement in the image automatically in the display panel of alternating live images of specific cameras sequencers video clips recorded before in loop mode and many more aia BOLO S a RZ De Amik g 5 w os aN MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 25 396 Auto grid is a grid layout where the display panel is automatically split by MxCC into smaller sections to show the various video sources The user thus does not have to bother with the breakdown Grid layouts are always needed in practical situations when the display of the video sources is located in the foreground As with the building plans any number of grid layouts can be created and stored with a generally unlimited number of cameras as well The live image displayed on the screen can be adapted to the available bandwidth of th
522. zation 53 User accounts 53 MOBOTIX AG Security Vision Systems Made in Germany www mobotix com sales mobotix com 3 90 396 MxCC User Manual Index T Tab Time Servers 331 Testing Web server with MxRemotePreview 284 Third party cameras Integrating analog PTZ dome cam eras 267 Integrating IP PTZ dome cameras 264 Third Party cameras Using overview 261 Third party IP camera Connecting to MxServer 276 Time server Configuring 154 Time Servers Tab 331 Time tables 146 MxAnalytics 146 Use to control video motion detec tion 216 Title Bar 21 Toolbar 21 Configuring 190 Update Assistant 240 Toolbar buttons MxControlCenter 68 Troubleshooting 364 Two man rule Example 150 Implementing 220 Using 150 U UMTS 3G glossary 377 Update Assistant 238 Checking camera connection status 243 Elements of the dialog 239 Getting started 240 Toolbar buttons 240 V Updating camera software 244 Using stand alone 251 Updating Older Version of MxControlCenter 153 Software using Update Assistant 244 Uploading Camera settings 247 UPS glossary 377 Use MxAnalytics 146 User interface Configuring 190 MxControlCenter 66 Users 38 Creating 218 Editing 218 Groups and group rights 218 Need to enter a reason for an action 222 Using Dead Man s Switch 149 Event Searches 119 Extra live windows 77 Extra windows 76 Image post processing 80 Joysticks overview 261 Live Recording
523. zed system concept Yes Decentralized recording directly in the cameras with event detection an flexibly configurable alarm actions Cascadable installations Yes Central management and monitoring of several MxCC locations from a central MxCC location branch operation Joystick support Yes Complete support of current joysticks including storage movement to positions presets If supported by camera model License fees No No license fees no hidden costs MxControlCenter is available free of charge at www mobotix com Localized program versions Yes German English French Chinese PRC Italian Japanese Dutch Russian Spanish Program views Standard program view Reduced program view Yes individually configurable Yes individually Complete program view with all functions Minimal view showing only the usable configurable functions Full Image Yes individually Complete utilization of the complete configurable monitor area for display of building plans grid layouts Work areas Yes individually Storage loading of the current program configurable view as work area can be linked to user groups Monitor walls Yes Directly via an MxCC instance or by remote control of individual MxCC client computer Layouts Structured layouts Yes practically unlimited Rapid grouping by shifting the layouts Tree structure Linked layouts Yes practically

Mobotix MxControlCenter software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents